CFCX Work - NetSuite Release Notes

Account Setup Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated May 18, 2026.

For more information, see SuiteAgent Telemetry.

Removal of Sandbox Refresh Limits

As of March 6, 2026 NetSuite sandbox refreshes have changed from previous limits to be unlimited.

A refresh of a sandbox account copies a snapshot of all configurations, data, user passwords, and customizations from a source account to the target sandbox account. You can request a sandbox refresh in the NetSuite application at Setup > Company > Company Management > Sandbox Accounts.

For more information, see Requesting a Refresh and Refresh Summary.

NetSuite 360 Redesign Now Available Globally

NetSuite 360's redesigned interface is now available globally, including two new dashboards and updated payment methods for U.S. accounts.

For accounts outside of the U.S., NetSuite 360 introduces two specialized dashboards:

The NetSuite 360 Dashboard, which enables you to:
Review and manage NetSuite cases, enhancements, and issues
Update your support dashboard
Access the Action Items and Notifications portlet This portlet enables you to view product change notifications sent to your account's primary contact, as well as other notifications that may require action from you. Note: If you or the main email address associated with your account have opted out of product notifications from NetSuite, some notifications may not appear in the Action Items and Notifications portlet.
Set account preferences
Access SuiteIdeas
Manage your NetSuite email subscriptions
Add authorized support contacts
View details about your Advanced Customer Service or Learning Cloud Support subscriptions
The Financial Dashboard, which enables you to:
View and pay NetSuite invoices
Manage payment methods
Update your billing and shipping address and your primary contact
Download financial documents
Contact the NetSuite Collections team

For U.S.-based accounts, NetSuite 360 now supports domestic ACH payments and credit card payments in currencies other than USD.

For more information about NetSuite 360, see NetSuite 360.

Parent Record Filtering for Address Subrecords

Address-related subrecords (such as address and addressbook) are now filtered automatically for only those addresses linked to the specific parent record you're viewing (for example, a particular customer, a vendor, or an employee).

NetSuite shows only the relevant addresses that are associated with the main record, improving data accuracy and privacy while preventing over-fetching of unrelated addresses. This change also helps standardize how address data appears in your integrations (for example, SuiteQL queries, SuiteScript 2.0 and SuiteScript 2.1, or REST).

You may notice that result sets for address subrecords are smaller and more precise. If you have integrations that previously relied on unfiltered address results, you may need to review and adjust your logic, especially if this logic assumed cross-entity visibility.

No changes have been made to schemas, permissions, or roles as part of this update.

Enhancements to the Intercompany Elimination Feature

NetSuite 2026.1 includes the following enhancements to the Intercompany Elimination feature:

View Source Transactions for All Balance Sheet Elimination Journal Entries
New Intercompany Elimination Dataset in SuiteAnalytics Workbook
Track Deletion and Creation of Elimination Journal Entries During Intercompany Elimination Process

View Source Transactions for All Balance Sheet Elimination Journal Entries

When you run intercompany elimination, you can now view source transactions on elimination journal entries for all account types, including Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, and Other Assets and Liability. Source transactions link elimination journal entries back to the original intercompany transactions and help you understand why elimination was needed.

For more information, see Summarized Intercompany Elimination Journal Entries.

New Intercompany Elimination Dataset in SuiteAnalytics Workbook

A new Intercompany Elimination dataset is now available in SuiteAnalytics Workbook. This dataset provides detailed visibility into all intercompany elimination journal entries. In the new dataset, you can filter elimination journal lines by period. You can also see details about the associated source transactions such as transaction amount and currency, base currency amount and base currency, and consolidated exchange rate.

For more information, see Intercompany Elimination Dataset in SuiteAnalytics.

Track Deletion and Creation of Elimination Journal Entries During Intercompany Elimination Process

When you run intercompany elimination, you can now track two process types for each elimination request:

Intercompany elimination-delete removes previously generated elimination journal entries.
After the delete process completes successfully, Intercompany elimination-create generates new elimination journal entries.

This update helps you identify whether journals entries are being deleted or created and track the progress of each process during period close activities. For more information about running intercompany elimination, see Running Intercompany Elimination.

Unlink Intercompany Cross Charge Journals

You can now unlink intercompany cross charge journals that have been cleared by other cross charge journals in an open accounting period. Previously, when one cross charge journal was cleared (paid) by another, you couldn't reverse or delete the transactions yourself, and help from NetSuite Customer Support was required.

Now, if a cross charge journal credit was applied to a debit in an open accounting period, you can unlink the journals by clicking the Unlink Cross Charge Self Payments button in the Actions menu on the Cross Charge Workbench. When you unlink the journals, you remove the cross charge relationship and restore each transaction to its original state, which lets you delete and regenerate cross charge journals as needed.

For more information, see Resolving the Issue When You can't Delete Cross Charge Journals.

Updates to Prompt Studio

The following updates were made to Prompt Studio:

Support for GPT-OSS Model in Prompt Studio - Prompt Studio now supports the OpenAI GPT-OSS model. To specify this model when you create custom prompts, select GPT OSS from the Model Family list.
Sublist Variable Support in Prompt Templates and Testing - You can now insert sublist variables into prompt templates, enabling prompts to reference data from sublists associated with the target record (such as line items on a Sales Order). Additionally, the new Sublist Variables tab lets you test prompt templates by providing sample data for these sublist variables, ensuring your prompts generate expected output for various sublist scenarios.
New Text Enhance Action and Prompts for AI Description Fields - To support having a single "Optimize for AI" Text Enhance action and prompt for custom fields with AI descriptions, a set of new custom prompts has been added to override existing system prompts for AI-generated descriptions in custom fields. These prompts are already configured and do not require any changes.

New Intelligent Recommendations Subtab in AI Preferences

A new subtab, Intelligent Recommendations, was added to AI Preferences. Intelligent Item Recommendations use artificial intelligence algorithms to calculate and display items your company's customers might want to buy.

If you're a user with the Administrator role, you can use this subtab to manage your company's Intelligent Item Recommendations settings. The following company settings are available for Intelligent Item Recommendations:

Show Intelligent Recommendations Button for Item Recommendations - This setting lets you enable or disable Intelligent Item Recommendations for an account. Disabling this setting removes the Intelligent Recommendations buttons from sales orders, estimates, and opportunity records. It doesn't affect your use of intelligent recommendations on web sites.
Show Optional Columns - This setting lets you customize which columns are displayed in the Intelligent Recommendations popup window on sales orders, estimates, and opportunity records. Optional columns include Display Name, Unit Price, and Quantity Available. Selected columns are displayed in your NetSuite account and the Customer Center.

For more information, see Manage Intelligent Item Recommendations Preferences and Intelligent Recommendations.

New Narrative Insights Subtab in AI Preferences

A new subtab, Narrative Insights, was added to AI Preferences. Narrative Insights use generative AI to provide a concise overview of select reports and records for business users, emphasizing the most relevant information and making it easier to quickly understand key details.

If you're a user with the Administrator role, you can use this subtab to manage your company's Narrative Insights settings. The following company settings are available for Narrative Insights:

Enable Narrative Insights - This setting lets you enable or disable Narrative Insights. Narrative Insights is enabled by default.
Enable Narrative Insights for External Roles - This setting lets you control whether users with external roles, such as Vendor Center or Shopper, can use Narrative Insights. To enhance security, this setting is disabled by default. Only users with internal roles can use Narrative Insights unless you enable this setting. When you enable this setting, users with external roles can use Narrative Insights.
Use OCI Credentials for Narrative Insights - This optional setting lets you control whether Narrative Insights should use OCI credentials for paid, unlimited usage through your company's Oracle Cloud account. By default, this setting is disabled and Narrative Insights uses the free monthly usage pool provided by NetSuite.

For more information, see Managing Narrative Insights Preferences, Viewing Narrative Insights Usage Limits and Usage, and Narrative Insights Overview.

User License Information

NetSuite provides comprehensive guidance to help you understand and manage user licenses. You can review descriptions of license types, information explaining how licenses are counted, special guidance for SuiteCloud Plus and Concurrent Web Services User settings, and best practices to manage license usage. For more information, see User Licenses.

General Notices

Accounting Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated on May 18, 2026.

Journal Line Sublists Standardized to Keyed for Reliable Line-Level Updates

With NetSuite 2026.1 release, journal line sublists are now standardized to a keyed configuration across all supported journal types. Each line has a unique line key and integrations (REST, CSV, and SOAP) can reference these keys to update only the intended lines. This allows you to safely modify, add, or remove specific lines without replacing the entire sublist, improving accuracy and reducing rework in financial processes and integrations.

Previously, several journal variants included a line identifier but were configured as non-keyed sublists. Therefore, integration tools could not reliably update individual lines, and attempts to do so sometimes caused issues that prevented users from loading or editing the affected journals.

No new feature to enable for this enhancement, existing permissions apply.

Important: Integrations should work as expected for NetSuite accounts using the default configuration. However, if your integration reuses the same identifier on multiple lines, updates may fail validation after this change. Please review and test any process that updates journal lines before upgrading to NetSuite 2026.1.

For more information about sublists, see the help topics:

Improved Custom GL Lines Plug-in Functionality for Secondary Accounting Books

With the NetSuite 2026.1 release, the custom GL Lines Plug-in functionality has been improved to support transactions in secondary accounting books for all subsidiaries that have GL impact. This enhancement allows for the Custom GL Lines Plug-in to run in all accounting books active for any subsidiary participating in the transaction.

Previously, the Custom GL Line Plug-in didn't support inter-company transactions, consequently, the plug-in only run for the primary subsidiary, and the secondary subsidiaries were excluded even if the transaction had GL impact on their accounting books. This created inconsistencies between the primary and secondary accounting books.

For more information about Custom GL Lines Plug-in, see Custom GL Lines Plug-in Overview.

Ability to Change Posting Period on Journal Entries with Pending Approval Status

With the NetSuite 2026.1 release, users can now change the Posting Period field on journal entries with the Pending Approval status. This enhancement applies to Journal Entry, Intercompany Journal Entry, Advanced Intercompany Journal Entry, and Statistical Journal Entry types. This enhancement also enables better integration with SuiteApps such as Transaction Line Distribution, which creates journal entries for vendor bills that must post to the same accounting period. Consequently, both users and SuiteApps can now set the correct posting period for journals awaiting approval, ensuring consistent accounting, streamlining workflows, and reducing the likelihood of mispostings.

Previously, users could only update the posting period after a journal entry was approved. Any attempt to change the posting period on a journal entry pending approval wasn't saved, often requiring additional edits and increasing the risk of posting to the wrong period.

When you edit a journal entry that is pending approval, NetSuite keeps the selected Posting Period. NetSuite no longer updates the posting period to match changes to the transaction date.

No additional permissions or configuration are required to use this feature.

For more information about accounting periods, see Accounting Period Management.

Enhancements to Filtering for Updating Revenue Arrangements and Revenue Plans

The Update Revenue Arrangements and Revenue Plans page now includes several new filters. These additional options let you narrow your update criteria, helping to prevent unintended revenue arrangement and plan updates and improve performance.

You can now use these filters to specify which source records to include in your update. NetSuite identifies source records that match your selected filters and updates only the revenue arrangements and revenue plans that are eligible for processing. For more information about these new filters, see Updating Revenue Arrangements.

Additionally, the Criteria column has been added to the Status section. Selecting Criteria summary opens the Criteria summary page, which displays all the filters that were applied to the corresponding submission ID when updating revenue arrangements and revenue plans.

You can update revenue arrangements and revenue plans only if the Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) feature is enabled. For more information about enabling this feature, see Enabling the Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) Feature.

Enhancements to Revenue Automation with Treatment Rules

You can now define additional fields in the Criteria subtab on the Recognition Treatment Rule page. Previously, rules were limited to Accounting Book, Date, Item Revenue Category, Source Type, Subsidiary, and Transaction Type.

In addition to the existing options, you can now select the following fields:

Class, Department, or Location.
Custom segments (transaction line-level only). You must have custom segments enabled to add this criteria. For more information, see Enabling the Custom Segments Feature.
Custom fields (transaction line-level only). For more information, see Creating a Custom Field.

These new criteria simplify revenue automation and provide greater flexibility by letting you manage recognition across broader business dimensions than individual items. Although treatments could previously be grouped using attributes such as item revenue category or accounting book, you can now use new attributes, such as custom segments or custom fields.

These options let you group revenue elements and define different recognition behaviors in specific scenarios, controlling revenue scheduling, plan creation, allocation type, and allocation group for each revenue element. This gives you both simplified configuration and more granular control over revenue recognition and allocation.

For more information about this feature, see Rule-Based Recognition Treatment and Defining a Recognition Treatment Rule.

Automatic Approval for Reclassification Journal Entries

NetSuite now automatically approves all reclassification journal entries, eliminating the need for manual approval. This update prevents multiple reclassification journal entries from being approved, avoiding duplicate GL impacts.

The Approve Journal box no longer displays on the Create Reclassification Journal Entries and Schedule Reclassification Journal Entries pages. The following fields are now disabled for all pre-existing and newly-created reclassification journal entries:

Approval Status
Next Approver
Approved box

You can delete pre-existing reclassification journal entries that remain in Pending Approval or Rejected status, but you can't change their status.

If you have scripts, workflows, or customizations that reference approval fields on reclassification journal entries, review and update them as needed to ensure they continue to work correctly.

For more information about reclassification journals, see Reclassification of Deferred Revenue.

Exception Management Now Supported in Sandbox Accounts

NetSuites now supports using Exception Management (EM) in Sandbox accounts by running inference against models trained in the corresponding Production account. This enhancement lets teams safely evaluate EM workflows in Sandbox with production-quality results, without duplicating model training or requiring Sandbox data to meet historical volume thresholds.

How it works

A new feature flag, Exception Management Models, has been added alongside Exception Management. This new feature flag separates model training from inference on the UI, therefore, enabling Exception Management Models initiates the training of Exception Management AI models on your production data, and enabling Exception Management lets you turn on EM on the UI.

To work with EM in a Sandbox Account, in your production account, enable Exception Management Models to initiate model training on your production data, then enable Exception Management feature in your Sandbox to turn on the UI dashboard. In Sandbox, EM will run inference using the production trained models; only Sandbox transactions are sent for inference at the standard cadence (last two weeks at start, then hourly on edited or newly created transactions).

You can't enable Exception Management UI feature in both production and sandbox account if Exception Management Models is off in production. In production, if you enable the Exception Management Models alone, you'll be prompted to confirm this is intended for Sandbox testing.

You can't enable Exception Management Models feature directly in a Sandbox account.

Additionally, disabling Exception Management Models feature, will automatically disable Exception Management UI feature in production and all linked Sandboxes.

Availability and Compatibility

This change is backward compatible: any account that already had the Exception Management feature enabled will have both Exception Management Models and Exception Management enabled by default. Standard prerequisites and permissions still apply.

Exception Management (EM) remains a limited-release feature; if you don't see these options or need guidance, contact your NetSuite Account Manager.

For more information, see Working With Exception Management in Sandbox Accounts.

Class, Department, and Location (CDL) Role Restrictions on Account Records Updated to Include Unassigned Values

With this update, Class, Department, and Location (CDL) role restrictions on Account records have been updated to include unassigned values when the role restriction on the CDL segment is set to either 'Own and Subordinates Only' or 'Own, Subordinates, and Unassigned.' Both options now behave the same for Account records. This prevents empty Account datasets in Analytics and aligns Account behavior with the Chart of Accounts, improving consistency and data visibility.

Previously, Account records did not populate CDL restrictions themselves, and selecting 'Own and Subordinates Only' excluded unassigned Account records. This could result in empty Account datasets in Analytics when unassigned values existed and created inconsistency with Chart of Accounts and other record types where this change does not apply (for example, Sales Orders, Journal Entries).

Note: This exception in behavior only applies to Account records. The standard CDL restrictions remain unchanged for other records.

For more information about CDL restrictions, see Setting Department, Class, and Location Restrictions.

Currency Context for Account Balances Is Now Available in Analytics, Chart of Accounts, SuiteScript, and REST

With this update, account balance fields now include clearer currency context for Account records in Analytics (the Foreign Balance and Balance columns) and in the Chart of Accounts (the Balance column). Foreign Balance is calculated from the account's default currency, if defined. Additionally, SuiteScript and REST now expose both Foreign Balance (fxbalance) and Balance (balance), and Balance returns the consolidated amount based on the user role and the top-level parent company in the subsidiary hierarchy. This change aligns how balances are displayed and returned across Analytics, Chart of Accounts, SuiteScript, and REST, thereby making values easier to interpret.

Previously, the balance field returned a non-consolidated amount in the account currency, and that same amount was also shown in the Foreign Balance column in Analytics and Chart of Accounts. This could lead to inconsistent results across different interfaces because the consolidated amount shown in the Balance column in Analytics and Chart of Accounts wasn't available on the Account record.

Note: This is a breaking change. SuiteScript logic or REST integrations that relied on the previous Balance behavior may require updates. If you need an account-level (non-consolidated) amount, use Foreign Balance (fxbalance) instead.

For more information about currency, see Currency Management.

General Notices

AI Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated on May 18, 2026.

Refer to the following sections for details on artificial intelligence (AI) updates for NetSuite 2026.1:

Administrator and Developer Features

Model Context Protocol (MCP) Features

Narrative Insights

Intelligent Recommendations

Other AI Features

Narrative Insights on Reports and Records

Narrative Insights uses generative artificial intelligence (AI) to provide concise summaries of supported reports and records. These insights help you interpret data faster, highlight notable trends or anomalies, and focus on key information such as risks, opportunities, or data gaps.

To generate an insight, open a supported report or record and click Generate Insight. The Narrative Insights dialog displays a summary based on the content you're viewing. The structure, sections, and level of detail in the Narrative Insights dialog may vary depending on the report or record type and the available data. For the full list of supported reports and records, see Narrative Insights Overview.

Narrative Insights is available in all NetSuite regions and system-supported languages. For more information, see Generative AI Feature Availability in NetSuite.

The Enable Narrative Insights preference on the AI Preferences page controls whether you can generate insights. This preference is enabled by default. Users with an Administrator role can disable this preference at any time. For more information about Narrative Insights preferences, see Managing Narrative Insights Preferences.

Intelligent Close Manager Dashboard Portlet

The Intelligent Close Manager is a new dashboard portlet that uses transaction data and AI-driven exception detection to provide a centralized view of tasks, transaction amounts, and exceptions.

The Intelligent Close Manager portlet consolidates outstanding tasks, transaction amounts, key performance indicators (KPIs), and exceptions for core business areas such as A/R, A/P, and accounting. It uses recorded and expected transaction activity to inform close progress, helping operational teams manage close activities, identify potential issues early, prioritize tasks, and take action throughout the period to support a timely close.

After you enable the Intelligent Close Manager, tasks are automatically created based on transaction activity and the features and preferences enabled in your account. No setup or configuration is required.

From the Intelligent Close Manager portlet, you can:

Filter data - Use the Period and Subsidiary filters to display tasks and KPIs for a specific period and subsidiary.
Monitor KPIs - Track metrics including Largest Outstanding Task, Exceptions, Potential Variance, and Net Income change.
Manage tasks by priority - Use the Priority Queue to review tasks in workflow order with the Default view, or switch to AI Prioritized to view tasks automatically assigned a priority based on factors such as transaction amounts, due dates, and business impact.
Resolve tasks and exceptions - Review transaction amount breakdowns, complete outstanding tasks, and address exceptions.
Lock transaction types and periods - Lock A/R, A/P, Payroll, or the accounting period directly from the dashboard.

The information displayed in the Intelligent Close Manager portlet depends on the features and preferences enabled in your account. For more information, see Mapping Tasks and KPIs to Features and Preferences.

To enable this feature, go to Setup > Company > Enable Features (Administrator). On the Accounting subtab, in the Advanced Features section, check the Intelligent Close Manager box.

For more information, see Intelligent Close Manager Overview.

The Intelligent Close Manager portlet is automatically added to your Home page after enabling it. For more information about using the portlet, see Using the Intelligent Close Manager Dashboard Portlet.

General Notices

Authentication Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated on March 9, 2026.

Login Notification

As of NetSuite 2026.1, users with the Administrator role can set up a login notification in their account. This feature can be used, for example, to comply with the NIST standards.

When a login notification is set in the account, the system displays a compliance message to every user during login. Users must acknowledge the message before accessing the account.

Users with the Administrator role can track acknowledgments, including the date and time when users acknowledged the compliance message, using the Login Audit Trail.

Limited Number of Certificates per Integration Record

As of NetSuite 2026.1, you can have a maximum of five active certificates for each integration record. The number of revoked certificates remains unlimited. You can check the list of certificates on the OAuth 2.0 Client Credentials (M2M) Setup page.

Support for Multiple Redirect URIs

NetSuite now supports multiple Redirect URIs for integration records that use the OAuth 2.0 authorization code grant flow.

Multiple Sessions per User Requires 2FA

In NetSuite 2025.2, every NetSuite user was able to maintain three NetSuite sessions simultaneously. As of NetSuite 2026.1, this feature is updated to enhance security of your account:

Previously, the feature was automatically activated when the account was upgraded to NetSuite 2025.2. As of NetSuite 2026.1, a user with the Administrator role must explicitly allow multiple sessions per user on the Enable Features page.
As of NetSuite 2026.1, only users with 2FA-required roles can use this feature. If a user has more than one role in the account, all roles must be 2FA-required.

Manage OAuth 2.0 Client Credentials Certificates Using the Client Credentials Certificate Rotation Endpoint

As of NetSuite 2026.1, you can use the certificate rotation endpoint to manage certificates programmatically. This enables you to list, create, or revoke certificates used for the OAuth 2.0 client credentials flow.

PKCE Required for OAuth 2.0 Authorization Code Grant Flow in NetSuite 2027.1

Currently, PKCE is an optional security extension for the OAuth 2.0 authorization code grant flow that uses the confidential client. PKCE is only required with the use of public client.

As of NetSuite 2027.1, all newly created integrations using the OAuth 2.0 authorization code grant flow must include the PKCE parameters in their requests to the authorization and token endpoints. This requirement applies to both public and confidential clients.

End of Support for New Integrations Using the Token-based Authentication (TBA) feature in 2027.1

As of 2027.1, the support ends for new integrations using SOAP web services in NetSuite. For more information, see SOAP Removal Plans FAQ. As part of this gradual removal, as of 2027.1, you will no longer be able to create new integrations using the Token-based Authentication (TBA) feature with SOAP web services, REST web services, and RESTlets.

Existing integrations using TBA will continue to work. However, you should consider switching to the OAuth 2.0 feature as soon as possible. For more information, see OAuth 2.0.

Dynamic Client Registration (DCR) for Integrations Using OAuth 2.0

As of NetSuite 2026.1, you can implement DCR in your integrations. Clients can register to your NetSuite account without obtaining a client ID prior to the registration. DCR then enables returning the client ID of this integration record through a redirect URI, so the client can then use it to initiate the OAuth 2.0 code grant flow.

For more information, see Create Integration Records for Applications to Use OAuth 2.0.

General Notices

Banking Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated May 18, 2026.

Enriched Bank Data for Transaction Matching

You can now use the Enriched Bank Data feature to improve the accuracy of matching imported bank transactions to your general ledger (GL) in NetSuite. Generative AI automatically extracts entity information from the memo and payee or payor fields of imported bank transactions, resulting in better matching for ambiguous transactions (transactions with multiple possible matches).

After all system and custom rules have been applied, any transactions that remain unmatched and have multiple potential matches with the same amount are eligible for enrichment-based matching. This process identifies matches with the same amount, a GL transaction date up to seven days before the bank transaction date, and similar extracted entity information. Enrichment-based matching runs during bank data import and when reconciliation rules are run manually. Transactions already matched by system or custom rules aren't considered.

Matched transactions display a multicolored vertical line next to them on the Match Bank Data and Reconcile Account Statement pages. The match details popup indicates when a match is enrichment-based.

This feature is enabled by default. You need the same permissions required to access the Match Bank Data page and to import bank data. To change the feature's status, sign in as Administrator and go to the Accounting subtab under Setup > Company > Setup Tasks > Enable Features.

For more details, see Enriched Bank Data for Transaction Matching.

Note: Matches that use entity information extracted by generative AI could be erroneous. All matches should always be reviewed before finalizing reconciliation.

Payment Date Prediction for Invoices

You can now view predictions for when customers are expected to pay invoices. These predictions are generated using machine learning and are available on the Invoices page and invoice forms.

Note: Payment date predictions use machine learning models based on historical payment data. These predictions are estimates, not guarantees. Use this information as a helpful planning aid, but always consider additional business context and judgment.

To enable the Payment Date Prediction feature (disabled by default), go to Setup > Company > Setup Tasks > Enable Features and open the Accounting subtab (support activation no longer needed). The Administrator role is required. Predictions are updated periodically for all open invoices. The initial set of predictions may take up to one day to appear after enablement.

To generate predictions, your account must include at least 12 weeks of historical payment data and at least 50 paid invoices that occurred before the start of that 12-week period.

Note: This feature is not supported on Release Preview accounts.

When the feature is enabled, the following new read-only fields appear on the invoice form. For custom invoice forms, you need to manually enable these fields in Customization > Forms > Transaction Forms (Administrator role required).

Predicted Payment Date (generated by AI) - Displays the date when payment is likely, based on historical customer payment patterns using AI. Appears on the invoice record and the Invoices page.
Predicted Overdue Days (system-generated) - Displays the predicted number of overdue days when payment is expected after the due date. Appears on the invoice record and the Invoices page.
Predicted Payment Date Availability (system-generated) - Displays whether a prediction is available for an invoice. Appears on the Billing subtab of an invoice.
Predicted Payment Date Last Updated (system-generated) - Displays the most recent update to the predicted payment date. Appears on the Billing subtab of an invoice.

You can also manually enter payment estimates in the Billing subtab of an invoice. These fields are always visible and editable even if the Payment Date Prediction feature isn't enabled:

User-Estimated Payment Date (manual entry) - Enter your estimated payment date, if known.
User-Estimated Payment Date Source (manual entry) - Specify the source for your estimate, with options like Company Estimate or Customer Promised Date. This field is required when you enter an estimated payment date. The field is automatically cleared if the estimated payment date is removed.

For more information about payment date predictions, see Payment Date Prediction for Invoices.

Dedicated Credit Card Refund Page and Menu Option

Previously, you went to Transactions > Bank > Use Credit Card, then selected Charge or Credit on a shared transaction page. You also went to Transactions > Bank > Use Credit Card> List and selected CCard Refund or Credit Card to filter for refund or charge transactions. As of NetSuite 2026.1, refund and credit card charge transactions have separate menu options.

Go to:

Transactions > Bank >Issue Credit Card Charge to record a purchase.
Transactions > Bank >Issue Credit Card Refund to record a credit on your account.
Transactions > Bank >Issue Credit Card Refund> List to list credit card refunds.
Transactions > Bank >Issue Credit Card Charge> List to list credit card charge transactions.

You can complete the same tasks as before, including entering company credit card charges and refunds that post immediately, with clearer navigation for the transaction type you want.

Note: The CCard Refund label have been now changed to Credit Card Refund. Similarly, the Credit Card label have been changed to Credit Card Charge. This applies for filters, analytics, form customizations, and all pages across NetSuite.

Enhanced Controls for Import Email Notifications

You now have improved flexibility and visibility into how email notifications are sent for both automatic imports and file uploads. Notification delivery varies based on the import type, your configured preferences, and permission settings.

For automatic imports using a format profile, you can assign a Notification Email address (designated email address) to receive both success and error notifications. To access a format profile, go to Setup > Accounting > Financial Institution. Select a financial institution and click View. Under the Format Profile: Configuration subtab, select an existing format profile.

On successful import, notifications are sent to the designated email if Send Success Messages Too (Failure Messages Are Always Sent) is enabled.
On error or partial success, notifications are always sent to the designated email, regardless of the success notification setting.
If no designated email is set, notifications may be sent to other recipients. These include the format profile creator (if their user notification preference is enabled) and the company's return email address (if enabled by the administrator). The format profile creator receives notifications as a fallback if all other options are opted out.
You may receive multiple notifications if both user and company preferences are enabled.

For file uploads, the following is true:

The designated email address in the format profile is not used for file uploads.
On success, notifications go to the user who performed the upload if their notification preference is enabled.
On error or partial success, the user who performed the import always receives the notification, and they cannot opt out.
The company return email address also receives notifications if company-level notification is enabled, for both success and error scenarios.

Configuration and Access Requirements

The Notification Email field and Send Success Messages Too (Failure Messages Are Always Sent) box in the format profile are set by the profile owner or editor. These options are only available if the profile type is Bank Reconciliation and the connectivity type isn't Manual Import.
User notification preferences are configured at Home > Set Preferences and include the following:
Notify Me Of Successful Manual Bank Imports
Notify Me Of Successful Automatic Bank Imports
Alert Me Of Issues With Automatic Bank Imports
The company return email and related notification settings are managed by the administrator using company-wide notification preferences at Setup > Company > General Preferences. The company return email is an address set by the administrator for receiving company-level notifications. Four new company-wide notification preferences are available:
Email Return Address When A Manual Bank Import Is Done
Email Return Address When An Automatic Bank Import Is Done
Email Return Address If A Manual Bank Import Has Issues
Email Return Address If An Automatic Bank Import Has Issues
The following permissions are required:
Import Online Banking File (Create or Full) for file upload notifications.
Financial Institution Records (Create or Full) for automatic import and related alerts.

If you use a custom workflow for bank import notifications, review your routing and notification preferences to ensure they align with these new behaviors.

Custom Scheduling for Automatic Imports

Starting from 2026.1, you can schedule automated bank transaction imports based on your business needs and your bank's data availability. Previously, automated imports for bank reconciliation occurred only once daily between 4:00 to 7:00 AM Pacific Time. Each format profile set up for bank reconciliation now includes an Import Schedule subtab. You can choose the frequency, interval, start date, start time, and preferred time zone for automated imports. Flexible import scheduling supports timely bank data updates and supports more efficient reconciliation processes.

The Import Schedule feature is available under the format profile of a financial institution record. To access a financial institution record, go to Setup > Accounting > Financial Institution > List.The Import Schedule subtab appears only for profiles with Profile Type field set to Bank Reconciliation. Additionally, the Connectivity Method field must also be set to a connectivity plug-in, not Manual Import.

When you create a new profile, the scheduling fields under the Import Schedule subtab are automatically populated with default values:

the unit of time as Day,
the frequency as Repeat Every 1 day,
and a randomized import time between 4:00 and 7:00 AM Pacific Time.

You can edit the schedule in both new and existing format profiles. Ensure to meet one of the following criteria:

All fields are filled, using either the default values or your own values.
All fields are left blank. The system will use the default values.

All fields must be either fully completed or left blank. Partial entries are not allowed.

To use the Import Schedule feature, at least one account must be linked to activate scheduling options. If no accounts are linked in the Account Linking subtab, the Import Schedule subtab appears, but its fields remain unavailable. To manage import schedules on the Match Bank Data page, you need to have the Financial Institution Records permission with edit-level access.

With the import schedule feature, you can do the following:

Schedule automated imports for each format profile set up for bank reconciliation.
View the last successful import date and time in your time zone on the Format Profile and Match Bank Data pages.
Use the new Manage Import Schedules button on the Match Bank Data page header for faster navigation and adjustments. This button directly takes you to the appropriate format profile if one is configured. Active profiles are prioritized and listed alphabetically. If no profiles exist, the button takes you to the Financial Institutions page.

If a profile doesn't have account mapping or is set to Manual Import, there is no associated import schedule. Imports don't run until the necessary conditions are met. For inactive profiles, the associated schedule remains paused until the profile is reactivated. The schedule can be edited while the profile is inactive, but imports don't run until the profile is active.

For more information, see Setting Up a Bank Import Schedule.

Control Start Date for Transaction Imports

You can now specify the exact start date for importing transactions from a bank account to linked general ledger accounts. This gives you greater control during account linking setup, ensuring that only transactions within your chosen date range are imported.

A new column, Earliest Transaction Date for Import, appears in the Account Linking subtab of the format profile. This column appears when you select Bank Reconciliation as the Profile Type and a connectivity plug-in as the Connectivity Method. The column displays for each account linking, allowing a unique date to be set for every newly linked account. For each new account linking, the default date is set to 60 days before the current date. You can adjust this to any date within the available 60-day range.

Note: The following SuiteApps do not currently support configuring the earliest transaction date for imports. Instead, the date is fixed at 60 days prior to the current date. The related field and column do not appear in format profiles that use these SuiteApps: Australia Bank Feeds Auto Bank Statement Import Brazil Banking Integration

If you're setting up multiple new account linkings, you can set the same date across all your new linkings. To do so, use the Earliest Transaction Date for Import (All Accounts) field and the Apply button. This makes configuration easier at scale.

Important: After you save the format profile and the initial import is completed, you can't edit the Earliest Transaction Date for Import for account linkings. The only exception is when the linked account is changed in NetSuite. When you add a new bank account using the connectivity plug-in, you can set the start date as part of linking the account in NetSuite. The mass update action affects only newly created account linkings. Existing linkings remain unchanged.

Setting a future date as the earliest transaction date is permitted, but it may result in missed or unexpected transaction import timing. You should only set a future date if you specifically want to delay your initial import. When you set a future date, no transactions are imported until a scheduled import occurs on or after the future date. At that point, the system imports all transactions received between the day after the format profile was created and your specified future start date. This may result in a high volume of transactions being imported at the same time.

If all account linkings are set with a future start date, the initial import doesn't occur at save. If at least one account linking uses today or a past date, the initial import occurs immediately after saving.

To access this feature, go to Setup > Accounting > Financial Institution, select or create a format profile for bank reconciliation, and open the Account Linking subtab.

For more information about this feature, see , Creating Format Profiles for Bank Reconciliation.

Update Imported Data for Connected Accounts On Demand

You can now impsmaller ort the most recent transaction data from your Account Information Service Provider (AISP) for connected accounts on demand. Examples of AISPs include Yodlee, MX, Salt Edge, and American Express. This feature supports bank reconciliation and corporate card expenses. This feature is available after the required plug-in updates have been implemented (see the For Plug-In Developers section).

Note: This feature is now supported for bank reconciliation in Bank Feeds SuiteApp version 26.1.0. For details, see Updating Imported Bank Feeds Data. For corporate card expenses, the AMEX Corporate Card Integration SuiteApp supports on-demand updates, but with certain limitations (see the Limitations section).

Previously, scheduled imports occurred once daily and included only data already available from your AISP. With this enhancement, if supported by your plug-ins, you can prompt the system to update transaction data from your AISP and initiate an import. This ensures your records are as current as possible.

A new Update Imported Bank Data button is available at the top of the Format Profile page when in view mode. Using this button initiates an on-demand import for all connected accounts configured in the format profile, if your plug-ins support it. This action updates your records with the latest data for reconciliation or review. If the required plug-in methods aren't implemented, clicking Update Imported Bank Data imports only data already available from your AISP.

To access this feature, go to Setup > Accounting > Financial Institution. Select a financial institution record and click View. In the Format Profile: Configuration subtab, select an existing format profile or click Add to create a new profile. The Update Imported Bank Data button appears at the top of the Format Profile page when in view mode.

You can continue to use the existing Update Imported Bank Data button on the Match Bank Data page to update imported data for a specific account.

For format profiles scheduled for automatic imports every 6 or 12 hours, the system now automatically initiates data updates on that schedule, if your plug-ins support it.

Limitations

For Corporate Card Expenses format profiles, the AMEX Corporate Card Integration SuiteApp uses a file-based process. You can use the AMEX Connectivity Plug-in to update data, but it will only update data if a new file is already available from American Express. The plug-in can't request a new file from American Express at the time of import, so updated data may not always be available. The SuiteApp doesn't perform real-time refreshes or request new files from American Express.

Error Handling

If a data update can't be completed for one or more accounts, you may see new account-level error messages related to update failures. For more details about the new standardized error codes, see Standardized Error Codes for Imports.

For Plug-In Developers

The Financial Institution Connectivity Plug-in now supports new methods for importing the latest data, which can be used for custom plug-in implementations:

Implement the refreshData(context) method to enable on-demand data updates. For more information, see refreshData(context).
For Corporate Card Expenses profiles, also implement getRefreshRequestStatus(context) to support data import status checks. For more information, see getRefreshRequestStatus(context).

Standardized Error Codes for Imports

Standardized error codes and clearer messages are available for bank import failures when supported by your connectivity and parser plug-ins. Standardized error codes and messages are replacing plain-text failure reasons across overall imports, account-specific imports, and file parsing errors. This provides you with more consistent and actionable feedback.

The removal of free-text failure reasons is targeted for NetSuite release 2026.2, beginning in August 2026. Upgrade dates may vary by customer account and region. Custom or third-party plug-ins should be updated before your upgrade to use standardized error codes and messages. SuiteApp-provided plug-ins are updated through SuiteApp upgrades. For more details, see the Requirements section.

If you see a free-text failure reason, a warning indicates that these are being phased out. The warning is visible if you have Edit access for the Financial Institution Records permission.

You'll see standardized error codes and messages on three pages, depending on your setup. Free-text failure reasons continue to appear for plug-ins or connections that don't yet support standardized error codes.

Banking Import History Page

The Banking Import History page (Transactions > Bank > Banking Import History) now displays standardized error codes for import-level, account-level, and parser plug-in errors. In failed or partially completed imports, error messages associated with each code appear, as well as a list of affected general ledger accounts. Free-text failure reasons continue to appear for plug-ins that have not yet been updated. To improve performance, import failure details now load only when you expand a row.

Format Profile Page

On the Format Profile page, the Account Linking subtab now displays standardized account error codes from your selected connectivity plug-in. Errors appear as a tooltip when you hover over the error icon in affected account rows. Free-text errors continue to appear for plug-ins that haven't yet been updated.

Match Bank Data Page

The account status growl message on the Match Bank Data page (Transactions > Bank > Match Bank Data) now displays standardized errors for general ledger accounts. The system prioritizes account-level and parser errors over import-level errors. If multiple errors exist for an account, you're prompted to review details on the Banking Import History page.

Default Parser Enhancements

Default BAI2 and CSV parsers now automatically report parser-level errors in addition to import-level errors, with no parser plug-in updates required. If multiple issues are found in a file, these errors are captured and displayed on the Banking Import History page. Errors are often shown with line number and position to support more precise troubleshooting. Default parsers now catch exceptions and convert them into parser errors, improving error detail and increasing resilience.

Requirements

If you use custom or third-party connectivity and parser plug-ins, those plug-ins need updating. If you have the administrator role, contact your plug-in author to do the following. Otherwise, contact your administrator for help.

Update your custom or third-party connectivity plug-in to use the new errorCode field (replacing failureReason) for account errors.
Update your custom or third-party parser plug-in to use the new addError API for reporting parsing errors.
Update your custom or third-party connectivity and parser plug-ins to use the new method for throwing exceptions that include standard import-level errors.

For more information, see the following help topics:

For a list of all standardized error codes, scenarios, and messages, see Bank Import Error Codes (Reference).

Enhanced Presentation of To Be Generated Transactions During Bank Reconciliation

NetSuite has enhanced the presentation of transactions that auto-create rules suggest during bank matching and reconciliation. Previously, the review experience displayed less context. The Review tab and the side-by-side details modal on the Match Bank Data and Reconcile Account Statement pages now display more transaction context and clearer statuses. You can more easily review and verify general ledger transactions generated by auto-create rules.

A new GL Account column is available on the Review subtab of the Match Bank data page and Reconcile Account Statement page. The column is only visible if an auto create rule is active and displays a GL account for impacted rows. The account name is a clickable link that opens the respective GL account page.

In the side-by-side Matched Transaction details modal, the Imported Bank Data grid includes Memo. The Account Transactions grid includes Memo and may display Department, Class, and Location when any of those segments are populated on the transaction. A GL Account column is also available only when the auto-create rule is active.

On Match Bank Data page, the View Details column for To Be Generated transactions displays the transaction type ( for example, Deposit to Be Created instead of Matched). On the Reconcile Account Statement page, the View Details column for rows generated by auto-create rules displays Created and****Matched.

Transaction Category Support for Imported Transactions in Financial Institution Parser Plug-in

Note: This update is intended for plug-in authors and does not impact end-user UI or behavior right now. Existing integrations continue to work as before if no transaction category is supplied.

NetSuite has enhanced the Financial Institution Parser Plug-in to capture an optional transaction category for each imported banking transaction. Plug-in authors can provide a category value through the API by including a category field in the additionalFields parameter when calling createNewTransaction. For more details, see createNewTransaction().

If a transaction category is supplied by the financial institution as part of the transaction data, NetSuite stores the category value in each imported transaction record. The category is not visible in the UI and can't be used yet. Storing this data now enables future enhancements in transaction matching.

Plug-in authors are encouraged to begin including the category field when importing banking data to prepare for future functionality.

New Matching Rule: Match on Amount when Date is within 3 Previous Days

You now have access to a new system reconciliation rule on the Reconciliation Rules page: Match on Amount when Date is within 3 Previous Days. This rule automatically matches imported bank transactions with general ledger transactions that fulfill these criteria:

Have the same amount
Are dated on the same day or up to 2 days before the imported transaction date (a 3-day date range)

The new rule helps improve match accuracy when you're working with multiple transactions that share the same amount. By narrowing the date range, the rule can reduce ambiguity and increase the likelihood of correct automatic matches.

This rule works similarly to the existing Match on Amount when Date is within 90 Previous Days rule but uses a shorter time frame. It's executed before the 90-day rule, so more specific matches are prioritized.

You can't edit or delete this system-defined rule, but you can inactivate it by clearing the Active checkbox in the System Rules list on the Reconciliation Rules page. System rules can't be reordered.

You can access this rule by going to Transactions > Bank > Reconciliation Rules.

For more details, see System Reconciliation Rules.

Renew MFA-Affected Bank Connections from Match Bank Data Page

You can now identify and resolve multifactor authentication (MFA) bank connection issues directly on the Match Bank Data page (Transactions > Bank > Match Bank Data). Previously, when a bank connection required MFA reauthentication, transactions stopped importing without clear guidance during reconciliation. Now, when you select an affected account, NetSuite displays a warning banner indicating that additional authentication is required to import financial data.

If you have the Financial Institution Records permission, the warning banner includes a Renew connection link. If the link isn't visible, contact the person at your company who manages connections in NetSuite.

You'll see this banner and renewal option only for accounts whose last import failed due to an MFA error. Bank Feeds connections and connections that aren't configured with a SuiteApp are applicable. Currently, renewing a connection from the Match Bank Data page can only be done from the warning banner.

When you click Renew connection in the banner, the following occurs:

If the connection supports renewal on the Match Bank Data page, NetSuite opens a modal that displays the existing connectivity configuration flow for the connection. In the modal, after renewing, you can initiate an import for one hour later or close the modal without importing. Closing the modal doesn't affect authentication.
If the connection doesn't support renewal on the Match Bank Data page, you'll see a message. If the message includes a link, you can open the corresponding format profile to manage or update the connection from the Connectivity Configuration subtab. For Bank Feeds connections, see Multifactor Authentication in Bank Feeds. For details on setting up a connection without a SuiteApp, see Configuring a Connection to a Financial Institution (Without a SuiteApp).
If there's no link in the message, contact the person at your company who manages connections in NetSuite.

If another delayed import was scheduled within the past hour, NetSuite notifies you and doesn't initiate a duplicate import.

For more details on renewing a connection from the Match Bank Data page, see Renewing a Bank Connection after an MFA Error on the Match Bank Data Page.

New Bank Matching and Reconciliation Landing Page

With NetSuite 26.1, the Bank Matching and Reconciliation page lets you view a summary of GL bank and credit card accounts in a single view. You can also see the reconciliation status for each account. This page helps you identify accounts that need action without having to open multiple pages.

To access the page, go to Transactions > Bank > Bank Matching and Reconciliation.

You need a role with the proper access permissions. For more information, see Permissions for Banking Features.

For each account, the landing page shows:

Bank balance and GL account balance.
Last import date and time in your local time zone.
Subsidiary and currency.
Total matches that require review.
Total unmatched transactions.

On the Bank Reconciliation and Matching page you can:

Sort columns, and apply pagination preferences.
Click the count in the Unmatched Transactions or Matches to Review column to open the related Match Bank Data page and complete reconciliation work.

General Notices

Connectors Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated May 4, 2026.

Catalog and Price List Sync in Shopify B2B

The Shopify connector now supports catalog and price list sync for B2B merchants. B2B merchants can define item catalogs and price levels in NetSuite, apply item-level fixed price overrides, and automatically sync them to Shopify B2B company accounts. This ensures buyers see the correct products and pricing.

The catalog and price list sync enables you to:

Sync catalogs with item and price level assignments.
Apply fixed price overrides per item.
Automatically assign catalogs to Shopify B2B company accounts.
Target storefronts using mappings.

Loop Returns in NetSuite Connector

Loop Returns connector is now available in NetSuite Connector.

The Loop Returns Connectors integrate returns, refunds, and exchanges from Shopify through Loop Returns into NetSuite for seamless synchronization.

The integration automates the creation of refund-related records, including Return Authorizations, Item Receipts, and Cash Refunds, in NetSuite. It mirrors actions taken in Shopify and Loop Returns to ensure accuracy. The integration aligns with Shopify and Loop workflows to reduce manual data entry and eliminate discrepancies in the returns process.

Contact your Account Manager to add the Loop Returns connector to your NetSuite Connector account.

NetSuite Connector for Outlook Now Available

NetSuite Connector for Outlook is a Microsoft Outlook add-in that syncs emails and events from Microsoft Outlook to corresponding NetSuite records.

To use NetSuite Connector for Outlook, you need to install the Microsoft Outlook add-in. For information about using NetSuite Connector for Outlook, see Managing NetSuite Connector for Outlook.

AI-Enhanced Error Messages for Shopify Connector

Error messages received from Shopify are now processed through an Oracle NetSuite AI service. The AI-enhanced messages are clearer and more user-friendly. Guidance on resolving the error is also included whenever possible. See Enhanced Storefront Error Messages in NetSuite Connector for more information.

General Notices

CPQ Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated May 18, 2026.

NetSuite CPQ AI Assistant

Important: For this initial release, the NetSuite CPQ AI Assistant is available only in non-production accounts, including sandbox and release preview accounts.

NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.8.0) introduces the CPQ AI Assistant, a generative AI-driven tool that simplifies and enhances the product and service configuration process. Using a large language model (LLM), the assistant guides sales reps and buyers through complex product configurations by responding to natural language prompts. When a user selects a configurable item in a transaction, a Configure with CPQ Assistant button appears in the bottom-right corner. Selecting this button launches the AI Assistant, opening a guided chat to collect configuration details and provide real-time recommendations. Through this interaction, the assistant clarifies options and helps users of all experience levels complete even complex configurations efficiently.

Users with the Administrator role or CPQ Product Builder role prepare product, question, and answer records for the AI Assistant on the CPQ AI Assistant subtab, found on each related record. This subtab allows administrators to review readiness, create or improve AI descriptions, ensure records meet quality standards, and control where and when end users see the AI Assistant.

For more information, see NetSuite CPQ AI Assistant.

Change Separator in Resolve Expressions

When users select multiple answers, resolve expressions return the corresponding information separated by a comma and a space. You can now specify a custom separator directly in the resolve expression. With NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.9.5), add your preferred separator within parentheses when writing the resolve expression. For example, suppose a configurable desk includes a question with the code LAMP and answers with codes GREEN, BLUE, and YELLOW. To retrieve the lamp color codes, you can use the resolve expression {LAMP(-)}. If users select all answers, the resolve expressions will return GREEN-BLUE-YELLOW instead of GREEN, BLUE, YELLOW. For more information, see Obtaining Answer Data with Resolve Expressions.

Convert Multiple Transaction Line Items into Configured Items in a Single Session

The NetSuite CPQ Ecommerce Integration (version 1.2.1) introduces improvements to convert multiple line items into configured items in a single session. To make multiple configuration submissions for the same product in a single session, you no longer have to organize the product logic into a single action and use recalcRulesets() to refresh building blocks. With the restart parameter for the submitConfig() function, you can submit a configuration to the transaction and, then, restart the processing flow from the first before-event action, refresh building blocks, and run after-event actions-instead of continuing to the next action. By letting you keep the product logic divided into multiple actions, this enhancement simplifies code writing and maintenance. With the product parameter, you can also dynamically switch between products for different transaction lines during a single session. Restarting the conversion process with a different product during the same session improves performance for large transactions by minimizing the NetSuite CPQ Ecommerce Integration script launches and transaction saves.

See an example of the restart and product parameters for the submitConfig() function:

Note: If you call submitConfig() with restart set to true, any actions after that action won't run. If you need all actions to run, make sure you apply the function on the last action of the queue.

The restartConfig() function has also been introduced to restart the conversion process into configured items for a new transaction line from the beginning of the processing flow without submitting any configurations. This function is useful when you need to prepare the transaction data for processing. By specifying a different product ID when calling restartConfig(), you can switch between products for different transaction lines. You can apply restartConfig() when using a dedicated product that analyzes the transaction lines, prepares the list of conversion tasks, and delegates the conversion process and the submission to transaction to other products. By setting the copy parameter to true, the configuration choices will be carried to the next conversion task. This parameter is false by default, and you can omit it if you want to start with a blank configuration.

See an example of the restartConfig() function:

Note: If you use restartConfig() without parameters, the conversion process will be restarted using the same product and with a blank configuration.

For more information, see submitConfig() and restartConfig(). To learn how to optimize actions for the conversion process into configured items using these functions, see Converting Transaction Line Items into Configured Items with a Single Scheduled Script Call.

Arrange PDF Files in Business Documents

Business documents for your configurable items can be created in PDF format. You can now arrange the main PDF file and all additional PDF files in your preferred order with Proposal Generator (version 1.2.5). To control the position of the main PDF in the final document, use the new PDF Sequence field on the template record. By assigning a positive or negative sequence number to the template, you can place the main PDF file before, between, or after the additional PDF files.

When creating the final document, PDF files are arranged from the lowest to the highest sequence number. If an additional PDF file has a sequence number lower than the main PDF file, it will be placed before the main PDF file. If the additional PDF file has a sequence number higher than the main PDF file, it will appear after the main PDF file. For example, if you set the main PDF file's sequence number to 0, you can assign -1 to the PDF you want to appear before the main PDF file, and 1 to the PDF you want to appear after.

Previously, only additional PDF files had sequence numbers and they were appended to the main PDF file. If you leave the PDF Sequence field blank, additional PDF files continue to be appended to the main PDF file and maintain their current order in business documents generated from existing templates. For more information, see Creating Document Templates and Including PDF Files in Documents.

Search for Sublist Line Fields With Dynamic Tables

When searching for sublist line fields, dynamic tables return only one search result for each record, even if multiple sublist entries exist. For example, if you search for an item's vendors, you'll get only one search result, even if the item is associated with multiple vendors.

To address this, you can use the option Show all sublist results. When this box is checked, the search query returns multiple search results-one for each sublist entry. For example, if an item is associated with five vendors, you'll obtain five search results-one for each vendor for the same item.

Note: The Show all sublist results option only applies to search queries involving sublist line fields. Search queries using body fields remain unaffected.

Dynamic table supports search queries for a limited number of sublists line fields. With the Search using SuiteQL option, you can run search queries using SuiteQL-NetSuite SQL-based query language-instead of the standard search module. For more information see, SuiteQL. Use this new option to:

Expand the search to any sublist line field.
Retrieve all sublist results.

When specifying sublist line fields in the Record Fields or Search Filter fields on the table record, make sure you use the SuiteQL dot notation- sublistID.sublistFieldID-instead of the sublist field ID alone. For example, use itemvendor.purchaseprice to search for the Purchase Price field on the item record's Vendors sublist using SuiteQL.

You can use the Show all sublist results and Search using SuiteQL options when creating dynamic table records in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.9.1). For more information, see Creating Dynamic Tables.

Organize Table Data by Sublist Using Scripts

When loading dynamic and function-generated tables using scripts, you can now obtain data organized by sublist. To achieve this in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.9.1), you can set the new sublist parameter for getTable().loadContent() to true. This parameter is false by default, and you can omit it if you don't need it. To improve table loading performance in new implementations, use this solution instead of getData() with the loadapi parameter set to true. See the syntax:

This is an example of the function output in the console:

Include Prices when Adding Materials Using Scripts

When adding materials to the configuration using scripts, you can now automatically create the associated pricing records for the current configuration session in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.9.1). To create and link a pricing record to the material, set the itemPrice parameter to true in the addRuleset() function. See the following example:

Note: The itemPrice parameter is available only when type is material.

The material price label will be sourced from the name parameter of the material. See the example:

If name is omitted, the Display Name/Code field from the item record is used. If Display Name/Code is blank, the material price will have no label. However, the amount will still be displayed on the product interface.

On the product interface, the material price will be displayed under Audit menu > Pricing and in the Summary. It will also be included in the Total for the configured item.

Launch the Configurable Items Page from Third-party Websites

The Configurable Items page shows all your active products. Users can now access the Configurable Items page from third-party websites with NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.9.1). To integrate this page into your website, first check the Launch products from SuiteCommerce box on the options record. Only products marked as Available on SuiteCommerce on the product record will be displayed on the external Configurable Items page.

Next, create the link for your third-party website. To create the link, use the External Link of the CPQC-ST-SCA-Wrapper script deployment and append the &cmd=selector string. For more information, see Launching the Configurable Items Page from Third-party Websites.

Arrange Materials on the Work Order and Audit Menu

When adding stand-alone materials to work orders, you can now arrange them in your preferred order. To achieve this, use the new Sequence Number field on the material record in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.9.1). Materials assigned to routing steps continue to be sorted based on the operation sequence. If you leave the Sequence Number field blank, the assigned sequence number is 0.

Materials will also be sorted based on their own sequence number under the Audit menu > Materials option on the product interface. For more information, see Defining Materials for the Configurable Item.

Add Labels to Additional Item Prices in the Summary

Additional item prices can be included in the Summary by enabling the Show additional item prices in Summary option on the product record. You can now add a label to be displayed in the Summary for the additional item price. To add the label, enter text in the Label field on the additional item record in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.9.1). If you don't provide a label, the Name will continue to be displayed in the Summary.

Note: You can use resolve expressions to source the label from answers users select on the product interface. For more information, see Obtaining Answer Data with Resolve Expressions.

For more information, see Including Additional Items Related to the Configurable Item.

Resolve Layout Differences Between Document Formats

When creating business documents, you can use various formats-DOCX, PDF, and browser preview-and define their look and feel using custom CSS styles. To address layout differences between document formats, two predefined CSS class selectors have been introduced in NetSuite CPQ Proposal Generator (version 1.2.4):

.html - Defines specific styles for the browser preview.
.pdf - Defines specific styles for PDF files.

Note: The corresponding html and pdf classes are automatically assigned to the template <body> element; no setup is required.

You can continue to control the styling of DOCX files using general CSS styles, and use the .pdf and .html class selectors to override any general styles. Styles without these class selectors will be applied to all document formats. Use these new class selectors in the Custom Styles field on the template record. For more information, see Creating Document Templates.

Type the Date and Time Based on the Predefined Format

Users can now type the date and time in the product interface based on the predefined format of your choice. Formatted date and time typing is available when users answer these question types:

Date and time input box text fields. For more information, see Input Box Questions.
Date and time qTable columns. For more information, see QTable Questions.
Checkboxes and radio buttons associated with a date and time field. For more information, see Checkbox and Radio Button Questions.

Note: The date and time format is sourced from the answer record associated with the date and time field.

To let users type the date and time while enforcing the correct format, go to the answer records for these question types in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.9.0). Then, check the Enable date mask box.

In the date and time field, users will be able to enter only allowed characters. Fixed characters-such as slashes and hyphens-will be automatically completed as they type. Using the left and right arrow keys, they can move between the date and time elements. With up and down arrow keys, they can increase or decrease the date and time values.

Note: Users will still be able to select the date and time using the calendar and time selector.

Set and Retrieve Date and Time Field Values Using Scripts

The setFormattedValue() and getParsedValue() functions have been introduced to simplify setting and retrieving date and time field values when using scripts in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.9.0).

The setFormattedValue() function converts the JavaScript Date object into the string format expected by the answer record before setting the value. See the syntax below:

Conversely, the getParsedValue() function returns the field's value as a JavaScript Date object.

Both functions are available for client-side and server-side actions. If used with other field types, these functions behave like setValue() and getValue(), respectively. For more information, see List of Functions.

Unlock the QTable Header Row and Lock Key Columns While Scrolling

You can now unlock the header and keep key columns in view while comparing and entering data in large qTables. Two new options have been added for these purposes in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (1.9.0):

Unfreeze top row - When enabled, the qTable's header will no longer remain fixed at the top of the table and will move out of view as users scroll down past the visible rows. You can find this checkbox under the QTable tab on the question record. Note: A maximum number of visible rows must be set in the Maximum Visible Rows field on the same subtab.
Freeze column - When enabled for specific columns, they will remain visible and pinned to the left side of the qTable when users scroll horizontally to the right. You can find this checkbox under the QTable Cells tab on the answer record.

For more information, see QTable Questions.

Manufacturing Improvements to the Item Creation Record

You can automatically create or update assemblies with advanced BOMs using item creation records. When creating or updating an assembly, you can now define a master default BOM or add a new BOM with a unique name. Two options have been introduced for these purposes:

Master Default - Sets the BOM as the master default for the assembly.
Add as a new BOM - Updates the assembly by adding a new BOM. Note: The new BOM name must be unique. If the name isn't unique, an existing BOM will be overwritten.

To use these options in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.8.3), go to the BOM subtab on the item creation record. For more information, see Working with Assemblies on Item Creation Records.

General Notices

CSV Import Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated April 20, 2026.

Cash Refund Records Now Supported in CSV Import Assistant

You can now manage cash refund records in bulk using the CSV Import Assistant. Previously, you could create cash refunds only one at a time. This limitation slowed high-volume processing and data migration and increased the risk of manual entry errors. With this enhancement, you can import multiple cash refunds in a single file, making processing faster and easier.

To get started, go to Setup > Import/Export > Import CSV Records. In Step 1 on the Import Assistant page, select the Transactions import type, and then select the Cash Refund record type.

The CSV Import Assistant lets you map all standard and custom fields available in the UI, REST, or SuiteScript for cash refunds. Importing the data uses your existing permissions and settings. No additional setup is required.

For more information, see CSV Imports Overview.

SaaS Fields Available for Items Import

The CSV import of Items now supports the following software-as-a-service (SaaS) fields for accounts with the SaaS Metric Reporting feature enabled.

SaaS Metric Tracking - It is a Boolean field, and if the value is set to true, the next two fields become available.
SaaS Metric Start Date - Required field.
SaaS Metric End Date - Optional field.

For more information about these fields, see SaaS Metric Tracking.

The fields are supported for import of the following Item types.

Non-inventory Item for Sale
Non-inventory Item for Resale
Service Item for Sale
Service Item for Resale
Inventory Item
Lot Numbered Inventory Item
Serialized Inventory Item
Kit/Package Item
Matrix Items

For more information about the Item types, see Item Types. For more information about importing Items, see Items Import.

Credit and Deposit tab on the Customer Payment Now Supported in CSV Import Assistant

You can now manage the Credit and Deposit tab on the customer payment record with the CSV Import Assistant.

For more information about the customer payment record, see Customer Payments.

For more information, see CSV Imports Overview.

General Notices

Employee Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated April 13, 2026.

New Time-Off Permission

A new Time-Off permission is available to provide better control over employee access to the Time-Off Request records and the Time-Off portlet in the Employee Center. This permission is available with None, View, and Edit access levels.

When creating or modifying custom roles, ensure you set the Time-Off permission at the appropriate access level:

None: Restricts users so they can't create, view, cancel, or access Time-Off Request records or the Time-Off portlet. This level can be assigned only to Employee Center roles.
View: Allows users to view Time-Off Request records and the Time-Off portlet. Users, however, can't create or cancel requests. Users with the Chief People Officer (CPO) or Human Resources Generalist (HRG) role and supervisors with this level can view requests but can't approve or reject them.
Edit: Allows users to view and create their own time-off requests from both the record and the Time-Off portlet. Users can cancel future-dated requests. CPO or HRG roles and supervisors with this level can approve and reject time-off requests.

Note: Make sure you assign appropriate Time-Off access levels for custom roles and HR personnel to align with your organization's policies.

For more information about time-off permissions, see:.

Support for Employer Match Reporting for Employer Contributions

SuitePeople U.S. Payroll now lets you report 401(k) Employer Match in jurisdictions that require employer contributions to be included in taxable wage. You'll see a new 401(k) Employer Match pay code on the Payroll Item page, which is taxable and reportable in the following jurisdictions:

Oregon
Canby Area Transit Tax
Lane County Transit Tax
Sandy Transit Tax
South Clackamas Transit Tax
Tri-Met Tax
Wilsonville Transit Tax
Arkansas Unemployment Tax
Illinois Unemployment Tax

This list of jurisdictions is subject to change based on legislative requirements.

To set up this payroll item, Go to Lists > Employees > Payroll Items > New. Select Earning:Addition as the Item Type, then select 401(k) Employer Match as the Pay Code and enter the amount. You'll also need to add the Nontaxable Fringe Benefit pay code to offset the new pay code. For more information, see the help topic Setting Up Taxable Employer Match Contributions starting March 17, 2026.

General Notices

Field Service Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

Here's a chronological list of Field Service Management SuiteApp releases for 2026. Click a version to see detailed release notes for new features, enhancements and issue fixes.

2026.03.2 Version of Field Service Management

In version 2026.03.2 of the Field Service Management (FSM) SuiteApp, records with the FSM user event script deployed (such as case, customer, and task) load faster in the NetSuite user interface.

2026.03.1 Version of Field Service Management

Version 2026.03.1 of the Field Service Management (FSM) SuiteApp includes the following enhancements and issue fixes:

Field Service Management Includes Default Translations for NetSuite Supported Languages
Enhanced Permissions for Field Service Roles
Barcode Scanning from the Search Option in FSM Mobile
Task List Fetching and Loading Indicators Updated in FSM Mobile
Issue Fixes

Field Service Management Includes Default Translations for NetSuite Supported Languages

The SuiteApp includes translations for all languages that NetSuite supports. The Field Service Management (FSM) translation collection includes the default translated strings, so you won't need to manually import strings for the standard product. The collection is locked and overwrites existing strings. If you previously modified the collection in your NetSuite account, add the custom strings again by following the process in the help topic Multi-Language Support for FSM.

The collection includes only English (US) strings, and FSM uses them for all English languages. The collection doesn't include separate strings for other English variants.

Enhanced Permissions for Field Service Roles

The following Field Service Management roles get additional permissions to improve access control:

Role Subtab Permissions Level Field Service System Transactions Charge Full Setup Custom Fields View Setup Custom Record Types View Lists Record Custom Field View Transactions Purchase Order Full Field Service Administrator Setup Translation Full

The Field Service Manager and Field Service Administrator roles now have the Field Service Mobile and Field Service Scheduler boxes checked in the role record, which grants access to mobile and scheduling features.

These updates help administrators improve role configuration and user access control.

Task List Search and Filter Enhancements in Mobile App

A new search filter is available at the top of the mobile task list, letting you quickly filter tasks. As you enter text, the task list updates in real time to show matching results. The filter supports clear, persistent filtering and shows a message when there are no matching tasks.

This enhancement streamlines finding tasks and improve the overall mobile user experience. The filter applies to all task and event data loaded on the mobile app.

Barcode Scanning from the Search Option in FSM Mobile

On FSM Mobile tabs with a search option in the page header, a barcode scanner icon appears next to the search option when your device camera is available. After you grant camera access, scanning a barcode replaces any existing search text and uses the same search and filter behavior to show matching records. For example, on the Assets Installed tab, you can scan an asset barcode to quickly find existing asset records.

Task List Fetching and Loading Indicators Updated in FSM Mobile

The FSM mobile app includes the following updates to task list fetching and loading indicators:

The task list view shows a loading icon during the initial task search and displays a message in your selected language when no tasks exist. The task list view uses a loading icon that's different from the sync icon for easier distinction.
The Add New Task button stays dimmed until all required data is available and remains disabled if the data fails to load.

Issue Fixes

Improved Dropdown Performance for Large Lists in FSM Mobile FSM Mobile displays dropdown options faster by loading only the items you can see on screen, which reduces delays for lists with up to about 80,000 items. Dropdown search and filter behavior stays the same, including on the Inventory tab.
Project Task Fields Show Previously Saved Field Values When Show Project in New UI Preference Is Set If the Show Project in New UI box is checked on the General Preferences page, you'll see the previously saved field values when editing an existing project task. Previously, all fields appeared blank when editing an existing project task.
Faster Responses for Field Service Suitelet API Requests Field Service Suitelet API requests return responses faster. Previously, an unnecessary translation check added delays to unrelated requests.
Activity Time Records Generate for Completed Tasks Even When Other Tasks Have Processing Errors With the Time Tracking feature enabled, the Time Scheduled script continues processing other tasks even when a task encounters an error. The script skips the failed task for 24 hours and then retries it. If the failed task is recovered earlier, it returns to the queue the next time the Time Scheduled script runs.
FSM Mobile Task Status Based on Field Service Start and Field Service End Fields FSM Mobile determines task status based on the Field Service Start (custevent_nx_task_start) and Field Service End (custevent_nx_task_end) fields, as follows:
Not Started - Displays when both fields are blank.
In Progress - Displays when only the Field Service Start is set.
Completed - Displays when the Field Service End is set. The mobile app ignores the task status value in NetSuite. If you change the task status in the NetSuite user interface, you must clear these fields using a workflow, script, or manual process to ensure the status in FSM Mobile remains synchronized. To learn how to clear the Field Service Start and Field Service End fields manually, see Updating the FSM Mobile Task Status from the NetSuite User Interface (SuiteAnswers ID: 1045621).
Independent Resizing for Preview and Editor Fields on the Field Service Configuration Page With the Configuration Preview feature enabled, you can resize the Preview and Editor fields independently on the Field Service Configuration page. Previously, when you edited a Field Service Configuration record, you couldn't read, scroll, or resize the Editor and Preview fields.
Remote Search Returns Results for Select Fields in Table Rows Fields configured for remote search within table row forms now return matching options based on your search, even if the parent table is set up with a remote configuration. This update restores the expected behavior for fields such as the Item field on the Quote and Order tabs.
Restored Hourly Scheduling for Field Service Scheduled Script The Field Service Scheduled Script runs hourly all day, not just between 4:00 p.m. and midnight local time. This change ensures uninterrupted operation of FSM processes that rely on hourly script scheduling.
Complete Visibility for Address Search Suggestions in Asset Form The full dropdown menu for the address search field displays correctly when the field is in the leftmost column of an Asset form. Suggested addresses will no longer be cut off, ensuring all results are visible and accessible.
Update Status Banner Only Displays When There Are Pending Updates The Update Status banner appears only when there are pending updates for the case or its child tasks. Previously, the banner showed even when the case didn't need any updates.
Custom Form Labels Use Account's Default Language in FSM Mobile FSM Mobile displays custom form field labels for all configured fields based on the language selected in the employee record's Field Service Language field. If this field is blank, the app uses the account's default language. Previously, in accounts with a default language that isn't English, FSM Mobile displayed default field labels instead of custom form labels.
Email Notifications Send When HTML Title Includes Multiple Lines The system delivers email notifications even if the HTML template title contains multiple lines. Previously, the system couldn't send email notifications when the title had multiple lines.
Field Service Icon Appears in Browser Tab The FSM Schedule Board now displays the Field Service icon on the browser tab. This update fixes the incorrect file path error.
Status on Agenda Task Cards Updates When You Return to the List Page After you start or complete a task in FSM Mobile, the status badge on the Agenda task card shows the current status as soon as you return to the list. Previously, the task card kept showing the old status until you changed the search filter.

2026.01.1 Version of Field Service Management

Version 2026.01.1 of the Field Service Management (FSM) SuiteApp includes the following enhancements and issue fixes:

Globalization Enhancements
Issue Fixes

Globalization Enhancements

Scripted strings, reports, and notifications in FSM are ready for translation support. Note that you don't see other languages in scripted strings, reports, or notifications yet, even if you select a different language. This update gets FSM ready for a future release that includes full translation files.

Contact your NetSuite Account Manager if you want to test translations. We provide a PDF guide to help you test FSM translations, along with access to test files.

Issue Fixes

Improved Barcode Scanning Reliability The barcode scanner in FSM Mobile more consistently reads and captures barcode values, even in less ideal lighting or camera angles. The scanner automatically selects the optimal resolution for your device, improving overall scanning accuracy and performance across all supported barcode types.
Fixed CSV Import for Employee Passwords Employee passwords for mobile-only users are set and updated through CSV import without error. The system correctly processes the Field Service Password field during import, resolving previous failures.
Error-Free Password Entry in Employee Record You can now enter and save a password for mobile-only employees in the employee record without receiving an erroneous 'Please enter a password' alert. The save process works correctly on the first attempt.
Accurate Search Results for Dynamic Option Fields Select fields configured with dynamic options return accurate search results. The current options list is always used during searches, resolving issues with missing or empty results.
Correct Latitude and Longitude from Assets Without Addresses Task and Project Task records copy latitude and longitude values from the related Asset, even if the Asset's address field is empty. This ensures new tasks always have accurate geographic information.
Consistent App Icon Background on Mobile Home Screens The app icon displays with a solid blue background on iOS and Android home screens. Unwanted background colors or badges no longer appear, ensuring a consistent and professional appearance.
Full-Screen App Launch from iOS Home Screen Launching the app from the iOS home screen opens it in full-screen mode without the browser navigation bar. The app displays the correct name, Field Service, providing a more seamless and branded user experience.
Resolved Looping When Attaching Large Numbers of Contacts to Projects The Contact scheduled script successfully attaches all customer contacts to a project and then clears the Update Contacts box, even when the customer has more than 1,000 contacts. This update prevents the script from looping and ensures all contacts are attached.

General Notices

Inventory Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated May 4, 2026.

New Consigned Inventory Management

NetSuite 2026.1 introduces the Consigned Inventory Management feature to track vendor consigned inventory using a distinct set of inventory statuses. This feature lets you process vendor consigned regular, lot, and serialized items from purchasing and receiving to outbound fulfillment. It also supports processes, like vendor returns, inventory counts, replenishment, and adjustments, that ensure accurate and adequate levels of stored items.

If you have multiple locations, you can assign a location to your own consigned inventory statuses. Item records enabled for consigned inventory track quantities and values for consigned and non-consigned inventory separately within each location. When you set costing methods, you can assign a required vendor consigned asset account and optional vendor consigned COGS account. If you use bins, your bin settings for locations and items also apply to consigned items.

Based on your business requirements, you may use transactions that support the feature and add consigned items automatically or manually, as follows:

Create a purchase contract for consigned items by marking it Consigned.
Check the Consigned box on purchase order lines or link an entire order to a purchase contract for consigned items.
Add received items with appropriate inventory statuses to item receipts generated from purchase orders.
Add unconsumed items to vendor return authorizations without ever taking ownership.
Add sales or transfer order lines for outbound consigned items, and then generate fulfillments for fulfilled quantities.
Add sold items to cash sales or invoices, whether generated or standalone.
Generate vendor bills from purchase orders that automatically include consigned items with consumed quantities only.

To distinguish from non-consigned items, ensure that consigned items have the appropriate default inventory status or one of your own. Enhanced tracking and integration among procurement, fulfillment, and sales flows ensure that you pay only for sold or consumed vendor consigned items, with ownership automatically transferred at the time of sale. Using the Consignment Purchases workbook, you can view and track consignment consumption.

For more information, see Consigned Inventory Management. To set up, see Consigned Inventory Management Setup

Warehouse Management Enhancements

Note: Use of Warehouse Management requires installation of these two SuiteApps in the following order: (1) SCM Mobile and (2) Oracle NetSuite WMS.

In NetSuite 2026.1, Warehouse Management includes the following enhancements for inbound, inventory, and outbound processing:

Receiving with Estimated or Actual Landed Cost

If you use the Landed Cost feature, you can activate the Set Landed Cost During Receiving system rule for the app. You can activate it for all purchase order, transfer order, and inbound shipment receiving processes or a single process of your choice. Landed cost setting through the app applies only to transactions that use landed cost allocation per line.

You can set landed cost categories and actual landed cost amounts for each item line through the app. If you also use the Estimated Landed Cost feature, you can choose an associated landed cost template for each item line instead. Regardless of whether you activate the Manually post item receipts? rule, manually created or generated item receipts reflect your landed cost settings.

For more information about landed cost, see Landed Cost Overview or Estimated Landed Cost. To set landed cost per line, see Landed Cost Allocation per Line. To activate the system rules, see System Rules for NetSuite WMS.

Manually Posting Item Receipts During Receiving

If you activate the Manually post item receipts? rule, you can post receipts for one or more item lines through the app. After you partially or fully receive at least one item, the Post Item Receipt option appears on the Enter Item mobile page. Before you generate a receipt, you can review all items and quantities included. Through this option on the app, you can't add more items or quantities from the same transaction to existing item receipts.

To activate system rules, see System Rules for NetSuite WMS. For more information about receiving through the app, see Inbound Processing.

Reversal of Inbound Shipment Receiving

Within the NetSuite UI, you can reverse the receiving of inbound shipments processed through the app even if item receipts haven't been posted yet. For each inbound shipment, you can choose the associated fully or partially received purchase order lines to reverse.

Note that you can't specify quantities to reverse, either per item line or per order. The app may adjust received quantities after you reverse inbound shipments, regardless of whether item receipts have been posted. It may also delete only the reversed item lines, or the entire item receipt if all lines are reversed.

For more information, see Inbound Processing.

Search Inventory for Kit/Package Items

Through the app, you can now use the Search Inventory process to view information for kit/package items. You can print item labels for each component, which may include lot or serial numbers. Without PrintNode integration, you can save generated item labels to your file cabinet. If you activate the Advanced Barcode system rule, you can print labels with an item bar code in GS1 format. For more information, see Searching for Inventory.

Processing Zero Quantity Picks

During sales or transfer order picking, you can close pick tasks that don't have any picked quantities. On the app, you can choose one of the following options to process pick tasks:

Mark All Done - This option closes both zero and partial quantity picks associated with the order in the wave. If you want to close zero picks only, make sure that you tap this button before you process any partial picks.
Mark Partial Picks Done - This option closes only partial quantity picks associated with the order in the wave.

Both options enable you to stage any partially picked quantities. On pick task subrecords, you can view the pick task lines that have been set to Done status. For zero quantity picks, no staging bins or generated item fulfillments appear in the subrecord.

For more information, see Picking Orders.

Picking Updates for Backordered Quantities

Through the app, you can now pick work orders even if one or more component items have backordered quantities. On the list of work orders, you can display the Backordered Qty column to view the total quantity backordered across all item lines in an order. If you activate the Pick only fully committed work orders rule, an error message still appears when you choose orders with backordered quantities.

You can activate the Show app notice for backordered quantities system rule if you want to always hide the confirmation popup window for affected orders. This rule can be activated it for all sales, transfer, or work order picking processes or a specific process of your choice.

To activate system rules, see System Rules for NetSuite WMS. To pick sales or transfer orders, see Picking Orders. To pick work orders, see Picking Component Items for Work Orders.

Supply Chain Planning and Allocation Enhancements

View the Supply Planning and Allocations 2026.1 New Feature Preview (Article available only in English).

NetSuite 2026.1 includes the following capabilities for inventory planning and allocation:

New Supply Chain Planning Results Workbook Template in SuiteAnalytics

With the Material Requirements Planning (MRP) feature enabled, you can now use the Supply Chain Planning Results Workbook template in SuiteAnalytics. This enhancement provides a comprehensive view of current and future supply and demand across your supply chain operations.

The workbook template is built on the Planning Results Pegging dataset and includes the following pages:

Supply Overview for Purchasing
Supply Overview for Sales
Supply Overview for Production
Production Summary

You can also customize the workbook to highlight the insights that are most relevant to your role.

Earliest Item Availability Page Now Includes Kit Items

The Earliest Item Availability page now supports viewing kit item availability across all locations. This enhancement provides accurate calculations of available kit quantities and dates based on the combined availability of each kit's components.

If the Supply Allocation feature is enabled, you can select kit items to view available quantities at each location. Quantities are calculated based on the combined availability of each kit's components. When you enter a required kit quantity on the page, the earliest availability date for that quantity is displayed.

If the Sales Channel Allocation feature is also enabled, NetSuite limits kit item availability and dates across locations according to existing sales channel reservations.

These enhancements provide distribution, fulfillment, and customer service teams with precise data to answer availability inquiries and set accurate promise dates for kit item orders.

Supply Planning Issue Fixes

As of 2026.1, Supply Planning feature includes the following issue fixes:

Purchase Order Creation from the Order Items Page Uses Standard Purchase Order Form
Supply Type and Supply Lot Sizing Method Fields Automatically Populate

Purchase Order Creation from the Order Items Page Uses Standard Purchase Order Form

When a purchase order is created from the Order Items page, NetSuite uses the Standard Purchase Order form to create the order. This behavior applies when your preferred transaction form is either Custom Outsourced Purchase Order or Standard Outsourced Purchase Order. When you open or edit the purchase order, NetSuite still shows your preferred form.

To prevent errors, make sure your role has access to the Standard Purchase Order form.

Supply Type and Supply Lot Sizing Method Fields Automatically Populate

NetSuite populates these fields when you duplicate an item. The change applies only to items that first used the Reorder Point replenishment method then had it changed to Material Requirements Planning (MRP).

Previously, the Supply Type field followed MRP behavior and didn't reflect the default Reorder Point values.

General Notices

Items Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated May 18, 2026.

Add-Multiple Workflow for Price Rules in Advanced Pricing

Advanced Pricing now includes an Add Multiple workflow for Price Rules. In a modal window, you can select multiple items and customers, with support for search, pagination, managing the current selection, and clearing all selections.

This release also includes synchronization and usability fixes, including improvements to page-range and search consistency, UI and translation refinements, and selection state handling.

The Add Multiple option helps pricing teams build and update price rules faster and more accurately. In complex pricing configurations, you'll benefit from reduced manual setup time and a reduced risk of selection errors.

For details, see Editing a Price Rule.

Basic Pricing Analytics for Advanced Pricing

Advanced Pricing now includes basic pricing analytics with these new SuiteAnalytics workbooks, datasets, and pivots:

Sales Pricing Overview Workbook: This workbook is based on the Sales Pricing Overview dataset. From within the workbook, you can use the following pivot tables to visually compare your price levels:
Sales Amount by Price Level: Shows completed sales revenue by price level for a selected date range and subsidiary.
Price Variance by Item: Compares sales prices to item base and price-level rates over time, including quantity and revenue variance.
Sales Pricing Overview Dataset: This dataset provides details for pricing from Invoice, cash sale, cash refund, and credit memo transactions. Use this dataset to analyze price levels by item, item count, price level, amount, and other options.

These analytics help you evaluate pricing performance without manual spreadsheet analysis. Teams can identify where realized prices differ from expected price levels, assess pricing strategy effectiveness, and share consistent pricing performance reporting with leadership.

For more information, see Sales Pricing Overview Workbook.

Use Item Cost as Transfer Cost Preference Now Supports Standard Cost Items on Transfer Orders

You can now set the Use Item Cost as Transfer Cost preference on transfer orders for items that use the Standard costing method. This enhancement automates item cost calculations when transferring standard cost items between locations or subsidiaries, ensuring accurate general ledger (GL) postings and variance accounting.

Use this preference for transfer orders and intercompany transfer orders that contain items with the standard costing method. When you set this preference, NetSuite uses the item's standard cost at the source location as the transfer cost. This enhancement ensures accurate cost differences are posted to Purchase Price Variance (PPV), reduces manual effort, and improves your financial reporting.

Advanced Pricing: Price Rules

With the new Price Rules feature, pricing managers now have greater flexibility and control over pricing in NetSuite. Price rules let you automatically apply price levels to sales transactions based on specific criteria such as customer, item, or date range. Using price rules helps ensure that your pricing strategy remains up to date.

Each price rule can specify:

Rule name and description
Price level
Start and end dates
Customers or customer groups (static or dynamic)
Items

For example, you can create a price rule that applies a specific price level to all roller skate sales for ACME Inc. during January. When the criteria in your rule match a sales transaction, NetSuite automatically defaults to the specified price level.

To get started, enable Advanced Pricing by going to Setup > Company > Enable Features. On the Transactions subtab, in the Sales section, check Advanced Pricing. You can then manage your Price Rules by going to Lists > Accounting > Price Rules. Here you can view existing rules or create new ones by clicking New.

Note: The following areas in NetSuite aren't currently compatible with Advanced Pricing and should only be used when Advanced Pricing isn't enabled: Price Lists Customer Center and SuiteCommerce You should wait until support is added before using these areas with Advanced Pricing enabled. In all cases, the features recognize customer pricing only as defined on the customer record, and don't support customer pricing defined by price rules.

Price rules give you control over when and how price levels are applied, making it easier to tailor your pricing to business needs.

Cost-Plus Pricing

Pricing managers can now set up Cost-Plus (Cost+) pricing at the price level.

The price level record has been enhanced with new pricing methods. Selecting a pricing method of Markup/Discount keeps existing functionality unchanged. Selecting the new Cost+ method lets you pick a cost basis and set a markup or discount percentage.

You can base Cost+ pricing on:

Average Cost: Uses the Average Cost field from the inventory item.
Cost for Pricing: A new item record field where you can set a custom cost, ideal for items without standard costing or with volatile prices.

Create and manage price levels by going to Setup > Lists > Accounting.

The item record has also been updated for Cost+ pricing. The Discount % column is now Pricing Method, letting you see at a glance whether a price level uses a discount or Cost+ pricing for each item.

Advanced Pricing: Transactions and Reports

You can now use price rules on all major sales transactions in NetSuite, including:

Sales orders
Cash sales
Estimates
Invoices
Credit memos
Return authorizations

When you add items to a transaction, NetSuite automatically checks for prices with applicable rules based on the items, customer, and transaction date. NetSuite also checks for prices that are configured directly on the customer record. If it doesn't find a price, NetSuite uses the item's base price.

To start using price rules, enable Advanced Pricing by going to Setup > Company > Enable Features. On the Transactions subtab, in the Sales section, check Advanced Pricing. You can then manage your price rules by going to Lists > Accounting > Price Rules. Manage price levels by going to Setup > Lists > Accounting.

Item Subrecord Script ID Changes for SuiteQL and SuiteAnalytics Connect

Selected item subrecord script IDs were shortened to meet a 40-character identifier limit. This update aligns item subrecord identifiers with protocol constraints to improve compatibility across interfaces.

After your NetSuite account is upgraded to 2026.1, queries that reference the previous subrecord script IDs may fail or return no results until you update the script IDs to their new values.

This change affects the following channels:

SuiteQL queries REST web services integrations
SuiteAnalytics Connect queries to the ODBC NetSuite2.com data source

For the full list of updated item subrecord script IDs, including a complete old-to-new item subrecord script ID mapping, see Item Subrecord Script ID Changes for SuiteQL and SuiteAnalytics Connect (SuiteAnswers ID: 1025032).

Item Creation Assistant

The new Item Creation Assistant lets you create item records in NetSuite by using generative AI to extract product data directly from uploaded files.

With this feature, you can upload PDF product catalogs, review extracted item details, adjust, and create items in a few steps, reducing manual effort.

The assistant provides links to access your newly created item records.

The Item Creation Assistant can extract information from the uploaded files for the following item record fields:

Item name/number
Item type
Tax schedule (visible when Advanced Tax Engine feature is enabled)
Subsidiary (visible when Subsidiary Column feature is enabled)
Display name/code
Item's description (maximum 200 characters)
UPC code
Purchase rate (visible when Multiple Currency feature is enabled)
Purchase price currency
Sales rate (visible if Multiple Currency feature is enabled)
Sales price currency

For detailed instructions and other information, see Creating Item Records Using the Item Creation Assistant.

General Notices

NetSuite Analytics Warehouse Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

Updated NetSuite Analytics Warehouse Configuration Page

The NetSuite Analytics Warehouse Configuration page has been redesigned. You can access it through Setup > Integration > Configuration or through Analytics > NetSuite Analytics Warehouse Configuration. The new layout improves the navigation experience and includes additional resources such as direct links to the newest release notes, training courses, and product documentation. For more information, see Accessing the NetSuite Analytics Warehouse Configuration Page.

General Notices

Order Management Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated March 16, 2026.

Commitment Credits in SuiteBilling

You can now manage consumption-based commitments across multiple usage services in NetSuite SuiteBilling. With the Commit Plus Overage (C+O) subscription model, you can share commitment credits among different usage lines. Overage charges are calculated and billed based on the specific service that incurred the overage.

With this enhancement, you can:

Allocate commitment credits across multiple usage services instead of a single service.
Charge different overage rates based on each usage line, such as unique rates by service type or consultant tier.
Apply this model to subscriptions grouped by customer, currency, and subsidiary.

How it works:

Commitment is billed from the C+O line, and commitments reset as before.
Overage is now charged at the individual usage line level, according to each service's price plan.
Overage price plan and frequency fields won't apply when a usage is booked against a specific service.
Breakage and overage revenue are still tracked against the C+O line.

For more information, see the help topic Billing for Usage and Commit Plus Overage Charges.

Prepay Across Subscriptions

Prepaid usage with drawdown in NetSuite SuiteBilling has been enhanced to enable selection of usage services across a unique combination of customer, currency, and subsidiary.

With this enhancement, you can:

Set up a prepay service on one subscription.
Charge and burn down the prepayment with usage services on another subscription.

For more information, see the help topic Prepaid Usage with Drawdown.

Customer Level and Cohort Analysis: Enhanced SaaS Metric Recurring Revenue Reporting

NetSuite automatically tracks new, upsell, downsell, and churn revenue impacts for SaaS items at the customer level, instead of by contract. This enhancement introduces cohort analysis by acquisition month and adds a new field to revenue records to improve reporting and analytics on dashboards.

With this update, you can:

Report recurring revenue metrics at the customer level, including new, upsell, downsell, and churn.
Analyze acquisition cohorts using a new acquisition month field on revenue records.
View standardized metrics in dashboards, SuiteAnalytics, and data warehouse reports for Monthly Recurring Revenue (MRR) and Annual Recurring Revenue (ARR).
Easily trace and include all source records and their fields, including custom fields, in analytical impact reporting for comprehensive analysis.

For more information, see the help topic Analytical Impact Record for SaaS Metric Reporting.

Subscription Metrics Cohort Enhancement: Acquisition Date Field on Customer Records

The Financial subtab of the Customer record now includes an Acquisition Date field. Enter this date manually or leave it blank to default to the date of the customer's first transaction, or to the earliest imported analytical impact. This field improves customer cohort analysis and SaaS metric reporting in SuiteAnalytics and Subscription Metrics. For details, see the help topic Acquisition Date for Customer Cohort in SaaS Metric Reporting.

Shipping Integration with FedEx: REST API Updates

In NetSuite 26.1, the Shipping Integration with FedEx includes the following updates to comply with the FedEx Web Services Ship API upgrade:

Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Required for FedEx Account Registration

As part of the FedEx REST API upgrade, FedEx requires multi-factor authentication (MFA) to register and use your FedEx account in NetSuite. Existing FedEx accounts must be re-registered with MFA. Until MFA re-registration is complete, FedEx shipping label creation may fail.

Using one of the available authorization methods (SMS, phone call, email, invoice details, or FedEx Customer Support), you'll receive a PIN to enter on the FedEx Registration page to complete authorization.

Find the new Authorize your FedEx Account section on the FedEx Registration page at Setup > Accounting > Shipping > Add FedEx Account.

For more information, see Registering a FedEx Account.

New Fields for Shipping Hazmat or Dangerous Goods

Two new fields are now available on the Hazmat tab of the item fulfillment record:

Regulation: The type of documentation FedEx expects to accompany the specific hazmat item shipment.
Option Type: The type of hazardous material you are shipping.

A new Technical Name field is also available on the Hazmat/Dangerous Goods tab of the item record. Use this field to record the proper technical name for hazardous materials shipped via FedEx.

When you fulfill an order using a FedEx shipping method with Hazmat/Dangerous Goods enabled, NetSuite uses these details to generate FedEx hazmat shipping labels and required documentation.

For more information, see Shipping Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Materials.

New ZPLII FedEx Label Types

Two new FedEx tire identification label formats are available: ZPLII (4 x 8-1/2) and ZPLII (4 x 10-1/2). These specialty tire label formats include a doc tab with a duplicate bar code, permitting the main label to be applied to the tread and the doc tab to the sidewall, supporting tire-specific shipping processes. Because NetSuite supports the default FedEx layout (sidewall bar code below the main label), you can't select a different Doctab Location on the FedEx Registration page when you use one of these label formats.

Find the new label formats in the FedEx Label Types field on the FedEx Registration page at Setup > Accounting > Shipping > Add FedEx Account.

For more information, see Printing Integrated Shipping Labels With a Thermal Printer.

Newly Supported Record Types for CSV Import: Customer Deposit and Customer Refund

You can now import customer deposit and customer refund records into NetSuite using the CSV Import Assistant.

To import the records with the CSV Import Assistant, you must have the Import CSV File permission. For more information, see Importing CSV Files with the Import Assistant.

New Sales Order Renewals

The new Sales Order Renewals SuiteApp version 26.1.1 enables you to renew sales orders automatically through a batch schedule, or manually. The SuiteApp provides the Sales Order Renewals custom form with fields and controls for renewing sales orders. The custom form displays the Renew SO Automatically box, which, when checked, sets automatic scheduled renewal of sales orders. The Create Renewal button, when clicked, sets a manual renewal on demand. Other fields let you specify the renewal price, uplift percentage, and dates.

The Sales Order Renewals SuiteApp is available from the NetSuite SuiteApp Marketplace.

Note: Before installing the SuiteApp, consider the following: You must enable the NetSuite features Sales Orders and Advanced Billing for transactions, as well as Client SuiteScript and Server SuiteScript for SuiteCloud. The Sales Order Renewals SuiteApp is not compatible with the Contract Renewals SuiteApp. If you want to use either one, you must uninstall the other.

After installing the SuiteApp, you can start setting up renewals of newly created and existing sales orders. However, you can't renew sales orders with a Canceled status or those with a subscription.

The SuiteApp supports the Multiple Currencies feature and the Multi-Subsidiary Customer feature.

For more information, see Sales Order Renewals.

General Notices

Purchasing Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated March 16, 2026.

Bill Capture Enhancements

NetSuite 2026.1 includes the following Bill Capture enhancement:

Open Scanned Documents from List
Intelligent Bill Capture
New Bill Capture Preference

Open Scanned Documents from List

You can now open your scanned documents from the Scanned Vendor Bills list. Click the file name to preview the document in your browser and download the document.

Intelligent Bill Capture

Bill Capture now leverages Oracle Cloud Infrastructure (OCI) Document Understanding Custom Generative Model to intelligently extract key values from your vendor bills. For more information about this service, see Creating a Custom Generative Model V2.0 (New).

Using this large multimodal model (LMM) improves accuracy for extracting information from complex invoice formats. For example, those with multiple columns, mixed content types, and unstructured or free-text layouts.

Intelligent Bill Capture is currently only available to select accounts that are hosted in US data centers. If it's available in your account, a 'Built with Llama' notification is displayed on the Review Scanned Bill page.

For more information, see Bill Capture Considerations.

New Bill Capture Preference

Previously, currency was only sourced from the vendor record. Now, you can source your currency from the scanned file. By default, the currency is sourced from the scanned file. To review or set the preference, go to Bill Capture Preferences > Review Page Field Sourcing > Currency. For more information, see Bill Capture Preferences.

General Notices

SC/SCMA/SCA - SuiteCommerce Solutions Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

The 2026.1.0 major release includes the updates listed below.

Most of the updates below apply to SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced. Some updates apply only to certain products or implementations, and that is noted in each section.

SuiteCommerce Performance Improvements

Applies to: SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce Advanced

As of 2026.1, the following performance improvements are available for Commerce web stores:

Rehydration - Standard prerendered page content appears sooner, and the page then becomes a fully interactive single-page application (SPA) without replacing the existing Document Object Model (DOM). This behavior improves first-load performance and aims to provide a smooth transition after the SPA finishes loading. For more information, see SuiteCommerce Rehydration.
Font-display swap - Text appears sooner by using a fallback font first, and then switching to the selected font after it loads.
Standardized image height - On product list pages, image height is standardized to reduce layout movement during page load and improve visual stability.
Image loading fixes - Image loading behavior is improved to reduce unnecessary delays and support more efficient loading of prerendered page content.

Payment Status Messaging on the Thank You Page

Applies to: SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce Advanced

With the 2026.1 release, messaging on the payment Thank You page for Commerce websites has been updated based on the payment status of the order. Previously, the page displayed a generic order confirmation message regardless of whether payment was approved, pending, or on hold. This update gives shoppers clearer information about the status of their payment after checkout.

When payment is successful, the Thank You page continues to display the standard confirmation message with the order number. When payment is pending, the page informs shoppers that the order has been created but payment is still being confirmed, and advises them to check their order history for updates. When payment is on hold, the page informs shoppers that the order has been created but payment requires additional review, and advises them to wait for an email update or contact Customer Support.

Note: This change applies to implementations of SuiteCommerce and SuiteCommerce Advanced versions 2026.1 and later.

Configuration Properties Updates

Applies to: SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced

No new SuiteCommerce configuration properties have been added with the 2026.1.0 release.

Node.js Requirement

Applies to: SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced

The 2026.1.0 release continues to require Node.js version 20.10.0 for the Theme, Extension, and core SCA developer tools. Make sure your development environment uses this version before you upgrade.

For more information, see Install Node.js.

Third-Party Library Updates

Applies to: SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced

This release updates the third-party libraries listed below. The current version is also shown in the distro.json file. If your themes or extensions use any of these libraries, confirm that they are compatible with the new version and update your code if needed. If you are migrating SCA, also check for any deprecated methods before upgrading.

Library Old Version New Version immutables 4.3.5 4.3.8 underscore 1.13.1 1.13.8 handlebars 4.7.7 4.7.9

Issue Fixes

Applies to: SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced

The 2026.1.0 release includes the fixes, improvements, and security updates delivered in the 2025.2 minor releases. See 2025.2.x Minor Releases for details.

General Notices

SuiteAnalytics Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated April 20, 2026.

SuiteAnalytics is a feature area that includes NetSuite Analytics Warehouse, Connect, Workbook, Searches, Reports, and Dashboards.

Automatic Reminders Portlet Refresh

The Reminders portlet now automatically refreshes its data every 30 minutes, ensuring you always see the latest information without needing to manually reload the portlet. The portlet displays the last refresh time, helping you anticipate when new reminder data becomes available.

For more information, see Setting Up Reminders.

AI Summaries for Reports

For accounts in supported locations and for users whose language preference is set to English, you can now use generative AI to summarize the results of some reports.

For more information about the Narrative insights feature, see Narrative Insights Overview. For more information about supported locations, see Generative AI Feature Availability in NetSuite.

New Option to Publish Saved Searches on a Website

Previously, you needed to check the Public box on a saved search to make it available for publishing on a website. Now, you check the Available for publishing on website box instead. For more information, see Publishing Saved Search Results on Your Website.

Outdated NetSuite.com Data Source is No Longer Available

As announced in earlier communication campaigns, the outdated NetSuite.com data source is no longer available when your account is upgraded to NetSuite 2026.1. The NetSuite2.com data source is the only data source available for SuiteAnalytics Connect, and queries run through the NetSuite.com data source won't work.

If you haven't completed all the required actions to move to the NetSuite2.com data source, you must complete them as soon as possible. For more information, see Changing from NetSuite.com to NetSuite2.com.

Upgrade to JDBC Driver Version 8.10.184.0 Recommended

As of December 15, 2025, the latest JDBC driver version is available for download. This driver version includes some important security fixes, and we strongly recommend that you upgrade your JDBC driver to version 8.10.184.0 as soon as possible.

Note: Note: If you are using ODBC or ADO.NET drivers, no action is required.

To download the latest driver version, log in to NetSuite. In the Settings portlet on the Home page, click Set Up SuiteAnalytics Connect. For information about upgrading to the latest driver, see the following help articles:

For information about the latest driver version, see JDBC Drivers.

General Notices

SuiteApps (Bundles) Released by NetSuite Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated March 9, 2026.

Following are the 2026.1 accounting enhancements to SuiteApps:

New Applied Trans Date and Applied Trans Period Columns for Account Matching Report

Version 1.1.0 of the Account Matching Report SuiteApp introduces two new columns and renames an existing column. These changes provide additional context when reviewing matched transactions.

New Columns

The following columns help you confirm when and in which posting period a transaction was posted, so you can get more details when reconciling accounts.

Applied Trans Date - Shows the transaction date of the applied transaction.
Applied Trans Period - Shows the posting period of the applied transaction.

Renamed Column

The Applied Date column has been renamed to Last Applied Date to clarify that the value shows the most recent application date.

For more information, see the help topic Report Columns.

SuiteApprovals Enhancements

The SuiteApprovals SuiteApp version 2026.1.1 now includes the following enhancements:

Record Locking and Reapproval Feature for Journal Entries
Journal Entry Count in Records for Approval Portlet
SuiteApprovals Reminders Portlet Enhancements
Monitor Journal Entries
New Aging Days and Next Approver Columns

Record Locking and Reapproval Feature for Journal Entries

You can specify when a journal entry becomes read-only based on its status. The status can be Pending Approval, Approved, or both. You can also set tolerance thresholds, either in percentage or amount, that automatically reroute edited journal entries for approval.

These settings help prevent unauthorized edits, enforces policy compliance, and remove the need for manual resubmission.

For more information, see the help topic Defining Record Locking and Reapproval Settings.

Journal Entry Count in Records for Approval Portlet

The portlet now shows the number of journal entries that need approval. You can evaluate each journal entry on the Review Documents Awaiting Approval page. To open the page, click the Journal Entry link.

For more information, see the help topic Records for Approval Portlet.

SuiteApprovals Reminders Portlet Enhancements

The following enhancements are available for the SuiteApprovals Reminders portlet.

Monitor Journal Entries

You can now monitor all journal entries in Pending Approval or Rejected status in the journal entry section. This view helps you see which records are already awaiting the next approver and which requires reapproval.

New Aging Days and Next Approver Columns

The following columns are available on the Review Documents Awaiting Approval page. To go to this page, click the Pending Approval or Rejected link.

Aging Days - Displays how long each transaction has been waiting for approval.
Next Approver - Displays the name of the assigned approver.

These columns enable you to spot approval delays and follow up with the next approvers when needed.

For more information, see the help topic SuiteApprovals Reminders Portlet.

General Notices

SuiteBuilder Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated April 13, 2026.

AI Description Field Added for Custom Records, Fields, and Transactions

AI Description fields have been added for custom records, custom fields, and custom transactions definitions. These fields appear in the main body section of each definition page. Administrators can use this field to provide concise, meaningful descriptions (up to 250 characters) of custom objects. AI features optimize this description for AI and then use it to understand the meaning of the custom object, so they can deliver relevant, meaningful answers to user questions about the object.

Descriptions added in the AI Description field are used by NetSuite AI features, such as NetSuite AI Connector Service. This service uses Model Context Protocol (MCP) to connect external AI platforms (such as ChatGPT or Claude) to your NetSuite data, enabling smarter responses and integrations.

For more information, see AI Description for Custom Object Definitions AI Description for Custom Object Definitions.

General Notices

SuiteCloud Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF) is a development framework and deployment mechanism. Customers and partners can use SDF to create customization projects for internal use within their organizations or for commercial distribution. For more information about SDF, see SuiteCloud Development Framework.

For a complete list of custom records and customizations that are supported by SDF, see Customizations Supported by SuiteCloud Development Framework.

This release note was updated May 18, 2026.

New beforeUndeploy Installation Hook

You can now define hooks that run custom logic at certain defined entry points. The new beforeUndeploy hook can run logic before a SuiteApp is uninstalled from an account. This logic can include deleting custom records, files, folders, and objects before a SuiteApp is uninstalled.

The beforeUndeploy hook is defined in a new, optional configuration file called application.xml, located at the root of your SuiteApp project, alongside manifest.xml and deploy.xml. In this file, you can define a <beforeUndeploy> section under the <hooks> element and reference one or more SDF installation scripts that contain the logic.

For additional information, see Life-cycle Hooks.

Add Support for File Permissions for .ss and .ssp Files

The existing <file> XML definition has been enhanced to let you define permissions for files with .ss and .ssp extensions directly in your SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF) projects. You can now manage file permissions using the <permission> tag without relying on manual configuration in the NetSuite UI.

File permissions for .ss and .ssp files are defined in your project's file XML definitions.

For additional information, see SuiteScript 2.0 SSP Applications

Changes to the SDF Custom Object for Custom Tools

The SDF custom object for custom tool scripts has been updated. Key changes include:

The SDF object name was changed from tool to toolset.
The scriptid prefix was changed from customtool_ to custtoolset_.
The exposeto3rdpartyagents attribute was renamed to exposetoaiconnector.

These changes are part of the enhancements to the custom tool script type and are required to use the execution log feature for custom tools. For more information, see Custom Tool Script Enhancements.

See the following topics:

Custom Tool Scripts as XML Definitions
SDF Custom Object XML Definition: toolset
How to Update Custom Tool Scripts for Execution Log Support in NetSuite 2026.1 (SuiteAnswers ID: 1024036)

New SuiteCloud Agent Skills

You can now use SuiteCloud Agent Skills, a platform-agnostic skill collection that supports common NetSuite and SuiteCloud development workflows (SuiteScript, SDF, UIF SPA components, security, documentation, deployment). This content helps you standardize recurring tasks, reduce errors through source-of-truth references, and reinforce security practices such as least-privilege access patterns.

The following skills are now available for use:

netsuite-ai-connector-instructions: Provides guardrails and domain guidance for AI-to-NetSuite sessions, enforcing correct tool selection, safe SuiteQL usage, consistent output formatting, and proper multi-subsidiary and currency handling through the NetSuite AI Service Connector.
netsuite-sdf-roles-and-permissions: Helps generate and review SDF permission configurations (for example, customrole XML and script deployment permissions) and validates permission IDs/levels using NetSuite reference data.
netsuite-uif-spa-reference: Helps build, modify, and debug NetSuite UIF SPA components by providing API/type lookup for @uif-js/core and @uif-js/component (constructors, methods, props, enums, hooks, and component options).

This update provides a developer tool package (CLI), not a NetSuite UI feature. You must use command line interface for installation and execution. For more information, see SuiteCloud Agent Skills.

General Notices

SuiteCloud Agent Skills Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated May 18, 2026.

SuiteCloud Agent Skills extend NetSuite development workflows by providing reusable, structured guidance for AI-assisted development and automation. These components help standardize processes, improve accuracy, and enforce best practices across SuiteCloud projects.

New Skills Added to SuiteCloud Agent Skills

The following skills have been added to SuiteCloud Agent Skills:

netsuite-owasp-secure-coding: Platform-agnostic OWASP secure coding practices with JavaScript/Node.js patterns and NetSuite SuiteScript examples. Covers Open Worldwide Application Security Project (OWASP) Top 10 (2021), output encoding, injection prevention, CSP headers, file security, API hardening, AI agent security, DRY security patterns, and 48+ security pitfalls with GOOD/BAD code templates.
netsuite-suitescript-upgrade: SuiteScript 1.0, 2.0, and 2.x to 2.1 migration assistant. Analyzes, converts, explains, and validates script upgrades. Covers 125+ API mappings, 34 object conversions, 13 unmapped API workarounds, all script type entry point changes, SuiteScript 2.0/2.x to 2.1 upgrade guidance, and 16 categories of breaking behavioral changes. Essential for modernizing legacy SuiteScript code bases.

For more information, see SuiteCloud Agent Skills on GitHub and SuiteCloud Agent Skills in the Help Center.

New Skills Added to SuiteCloud Agent Skills

The following skills have been added to SuiteCloud Agent Skills:

netsuite-sdf-project-documentation: Generates enterprise-grade documentation for NetSuite SDF projects. Analyzes scripts, object XML files, manifest.xml, and SuiteQL queries to produce README.md, architecture diagrams (Mermaid/ASCII), deployment guides, and troubleshooting tables. Can integrate with post-deployment documentation workflows when automation (for example, hooks) is available.
netsuite-suitescript-records-reference: SuiteScript records and fields reference. Looks up field IDs, types, required status, and search capabilities for all 272 NetSuite record types. Use this when building SuiteScript to ensure correct field usage.

For more information, see SuiteCloud Agent Skills on GitHub and SuiteCloud Agent Skills in the Help Center.

New SuiteCloud Agent Skills Available

You can now use SuiteCloud Agent Skills, a platform-agnostic skill collection that supports common NetSuite and SuiteCloud development workflows (SuiteScript, SDF, UIF SPA components, security, documentation, and deployment). This content helps you standardize recurring tasks, reduce errors through source-of-truth references, and reinforce security practices such as least-privilege access patterns.

The following skills are available in the initial release of SuiteCloud Agent Skills:

netsuite-ai-connector-instructions: Provides guardrails and domain guidance for AI-to-NetSuite sessions, enforcing correct tool selection, safe SuiteQL usage, consistent output formatting, and proper multi-subsidiary and currency handling through the NetSuite AI Service Connector.
netsuite-sdf-roles-and-permissions: Helps generate and review SDF permission configurations (for example, custom role XML and script deployment permissions) and validates permission IDs and levels using NetSuite reference data.
netsuite-uif-spa-reference: Helps build, modify, and debug NetSuite UIF SPA components by providing API/type lookup for @uif-js/core and @uif-js/component (constructors, methods, props, enums, hooks, and component options).

For more information, see SuiteCloud Agent Skills on GitHub and SuiteCloud Agent Skills in the Help Center.

General Notices

SuiteScript Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated May 4, 2026.

Refer to the following sections for details on SuiteScript updates for NetSuite 2026.1:

MCP App Interactive UI Support in Custom Tools

MCP Apps are interactive applications built on the Model Context Protocol (MCP) that allow AI-enabled chat clients to render secure, embedded HTML user interfaces in the chat experience. You can now create custom tools that include interactive UIs, allowing AI clients to present rich workflows and guided data entry directly in conversational AI.

With MCP App support, developers can:

Build and deploy custom tool scripts that go beyond text responses and render interactive UIs directly inside the chat.
Present forms, pickers, dashboards, or feedback panels in AI chat clients as part of the conversational experience.
Trigger SuiteScript actions and data retrieval from the MCP App UI, enabling flexible automation and richer user input workflows.

MCP Apps build on the existing custom tools framework in NetSuite, using the same deployment model and core requirements, with these additional components for interactive UI support:

UI metadata in the tool schema - The _meta.ui.resourceUri attribute specifies the bundled HTML UI resource for the AI client to load.
Bundled HTML UI resource - The AI client renders the HTML UI in the chat and communicates with it to retrieve results and trigger tool execution.

For more information, see Building MCP Apps (Interactive UI) with Custom Tools.

Custom Tool Script Files Are Not Editable in the File Cabinet

When you deploy a SuiteApp or account customization project (ACP) that includes a custom tool, you can't edit the associated custom tool script file, JSON schema file, or HTML resource file from the File Cabinet. If you try to edit any of these files there, an error message appears.

You can edit these files only through SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF). This restriction applies to files associated with any custom tool in both SuiteApps and ACPs.

This update helps maintain the security and integrity of deployed custom tool scripts and related resources. For more information, see SuiteScript 2.1 Custom Tool Script Type.

Custom Tool Script Enhancements

NetSuite 2026.1 introduces the following enhancements to custom tool scripts:

Custom Tool Script and SDF Object Updates
New Custom Tools Page

Custom Tool Script and SDF Object Updates

The custom tool script type and its corresponding SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF) object have been updated. With these changes, you can now view execution logs for custom tool scripts on the Script Execution Logs page by going to Customization > Scripting > Script Execution Logs.

To use this logging feature, update your existing custom tool scripts and their corresponding SDF objects, and ensure that new and updated custom tool implementations include the following updates:

For custom tool scripts:
Add the JSDoc tag @NScriptType CustomTool.
Declare entry point functions for tool methods as asynchronous.
For SDF object XML definition files associated with custom tool scripts:
Change the SDF object name from tool to toolset.
Update the scriptid prefix from customtool_ to custtoolset_.
Rename the attribute exposeto3rdpartyagents to exposetoaiconnector.

Applying these updates gives you improved script monitoring and troubleshooting capabilities with access to execution logs.

For guidance on updating your custom tools, see How to Update Custom Tool Scripts for Execution Log Support in NetSuite 2026.1 (SuiteAnswers ID: 1024036).

For more information, see the following help topics:

SuiteScript 2.1 Custom Tool Script Type
Custom Tool Scripts as XML Definitions
SDF Custom Object XML Definition: toolset

You can also see the updated sample SuiteCloud project in the MCP-Sample-Tools directory of the SuiteCloud Project Repository on Oracle Samples GitHub.

New Custom Tools Page

In NetSuite, custom tool scripts let you define one or more tools, which are individual functions that perform specific actions and can be invoked by external AI clients through the NetSuite AI Connector Service.

The new Custom Tools page provides a centralized location to view and manage the tools available in your NetSuite account. This page displays tools from SuiteApps and account customization projects (ACPs), organized by toolset, which is the SDF object used to define custom tool scripts and group related tools.

To access the Custom Tools page, go to Customization > Scripting > Custom Tools.

When you expand a toolset, you can see individual tools and the permissions required to access them in the AI client. You can delete ACP toolsets directly from the Custom Tools page. You can't delete SuiteApp toolsets from this page, but you can use the SuiteApp link to go to the Installed SuiteApps page and remove the SuiteApp toolsets by uninstalling the associated SuiteApp.

For more information, see Managing Custom Tools in NetSuite.

Binary File Support for N/https Module

You can now send a binary file in SuiteScript with the N/https module. Convert the file contents to a Uint8Array with Uint8Array.fromBase64(), then pass the result in the options.body parameter of https.post(options). You can send only one file per request.

For details, see https.post(options).

New Preference to Use LIST for SFTP File Uploads

A new preference named SFTP: Use LIST to Test That a File Exists is now available on the General Preferences page. Set this preference only when uploading to SFTP servers that don't support the default STAT command and trigger false FILE_ALREADY_EXISTS errors.

When the SFTP: Use LIST to Test That a File Exists box is checked, the N/sftp module switches its file-existence check from STAT to LIST. This setting eliminates the FILE_ALREADY_EXISTS duplicate file error during SFTP uploads, without sacrificing performance.

You need the Set Up Company permission to set this preference.

For details, see Setting General SuiteScript and Advanced Preferences.

New Preference to Execute SuiteScript 2.0 Scripts as SuiteScript 2.1

A new company preference is now available that lets you run all SuiteScript 2.0 server scripts in a SuiteScript 2.1 environment. This new preference helps you verify that existing SuiteScript 2.0 server scripts function correctly under SuiteScript 2.1. Note that only those SuiteScript 2.0 server scripts recognized as compatible with SuiteScript 2.1 will be affected by this preference.

Take advantage of this preference to verify existing SuiteScript 2.0 server scripts for SuiteScript 2.1 environment compatibility. If your SuiteScript 2.0 server script validates successfully with this preference enabled, consider updating the script annotation to SuiteScript 2.1 to take advantage of performance benefits. If your SuiteScript 2.0 server script does not validate successfully, it will continue to run as SuiteScript 2.0. Script records with the "Execute As" field set to 2.0, will continue to run as SuiteScript 2.0.

By enabling this preference, SuiteScript 2.0 scripts are executed using the SuiteScript 2.1 runtime engine, which provides improved performance and stability compared to the SuiteScript 2.0 runtime engine. For more information, see SuiteScript 2.1

To use this setting, go to Setup > Company > General Preferences and check the Execute SuiteScript 2.0 Server Scripts as 2.1 box.

N/http and N/https Now Supports PATCH Method

The Method enumeration in both N/http and N/https API modules now includes PATCH. Use it for external calls or internal Suitelet calls with these functions:

Important: You can pass either http.Method.PATCH or https.Method.PATCH to any parameter that accepts a Method value. If, however, the API doesn't allow PATCH, NetSuite returns HTTP 405 (Method Not Allowed).

For more information, see http.Method and https.Method.

Support for GPT-OSS Model in N/llm Module

The N/llm module now supports the OpenAI GPT-OSS model. You can specify this model when you call llm.generateText(options) and llm.generateTextStreamed(options) (and their promise versions). For more information, see llm.ModelFamily.

Tooling Support in the N/llm Module

The N/llm module now supports tooling, which lets SuiteScript developers extend large language model (LLM) interactions with custom tools. This enhancement addresses limitations in static LLM responses by letting scripts run business logic, retrieve NetSuite data, and return structured outputs during response generation. You can use tooling to build more dynamic, context-aware AI experiences that align with specific business workflows.

Define a tool using llm.createTool(options) and specify required parameters using llm.createToolParameter(options). Provide these tools when calling llm.generateText(options) or llm.generateTextStreamed(options) so the LLM can determine when to request them. When the LLM response includes tool call requests, your script can run the corresponding tool handler and return results using llm.createToolResult(options). Your script can repeat this process until no additional tool call requests are required. Using tools can help you build interactive, AI-driven workflows that combine user input, LLM reasoning, and NetSuite data.

For more information, see Tooling in the N/llm Module.

New SuiteCloud Agent Skills

The following skills are now available for use:

netsuite-ai-connector-instructions: Provides guardrails and domain guidance for AI-to-NetSuite sessions, enforcing correct tool selection, safe SuiteQL usage, consistent output formatting, and proper multi-subsidiary and currency handling through the NetSuite AI Service Connector.
netsuite-sdf-roles-and-permissions: Helps generate and review SDF permission configurations (for example, customrole XML and script deployment permissions) and validates permission IDs/levels using NetSuite reference data.
netsuite-uif-spa-reference: Helps build, modify, and debug NetSuite UIF SPA components by providing API/type lookup for @uif-js/core and @uif-js/component (constructors, methods, props, enums, hooks, and component options).

This update provides a developer tool package (CLI), not a NetSuite UI feature. You must use command line interface for installation and execution. For more information, see SuiteCloud Agent Skills.

General Notices

SuiteTalk Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

New Attach and Detach Operations in REST Web Services

With the new attach and detach operations, you can define or remove a relationship between two record instances. For example, you can associate a contact record instance with a partner record instance, or you can associate a file record instance with an opportunity record instance.

Currently, you can attach or detach contact records and file records only.

To attach or detach two records, you must use the record type and IDs of the record instances. For example: .../services/rest/record/v1/customer/660/!attach/contact/106

For more information, see Attach and Detach Operations.

For information about every available operation in REST web services, see SOAP Web Services and REST Web Services Operations.

Support for Homogeneous Batch Operations in REST Web Services

With the new homogeneous batch operations, you can add, update, delete, or upsert multiple instances of the same record type in a single REST request.

Batch operations reduce the number of network requests by processing multiple records in one request, minimizing latency and server load. This approach is useful for large-scale data imports, updates, and deletions, because it improves system performance and user experience. Batch operations in REST web services are executed asynchronously.

For more information, see Batch Operations.

For information about every available operation in REST web services, see SOAP Web Services and REST Web Services Operations.

New create-form Operation in REST Web Services

The create-form operation returns a record form with all fields prepopulated. This operation enables you to see all default fields and the line IDs of default lines on a record, and you can modify these values before submitting the record.

With the create-form operation, you can emulate a NetSuite UI workflow by prepopulating fields on transaction line items with values from a related record. Your REST web services application can then modify only the values it needs to before submitting the record.

For example, in the UI, when you bill a sales order, an invoice record is loaded with fields populated with values from the sales order. When loading an invoice record in REST, you can reference the related sales order record to initialize fields with values from that sales order.

For more information, see Create-form Operation.

For information about every available operation in REST web services, see SOAP Web Services and REST Web Services Operations.

New selectOptions Operation in REST Web Services

With the new selectOptions operation, you can retrieve valid select options for specific records and fields.

This operation is useful if you are creating an application UI that needs to mimic NetSuite UI logic, if the referenced record type is not yet exposed to REST web services. The selectOptions operation is also useful when the logged-in user's role doesn't have permission to the instances of the referenced record type. The selectOptions operation can return different results for the same field for different roles.

For more information, see selectOptions Operation.

For information about every available operation in REST web services, see SOAP Web Services and REST Web Services Operations.

REST Web Services Supported Records in 2026.1

In 2026.1, the following records became fully supported in REST web services.

Record Type Notes Accounting Book You need to have the Multi-Book Accounting feature enabled and you must have the Accounting Book Administrator permission to work with this record. Automated Clearing House You must enable the Payment Instruments and Credit Card Payments features. Budget Exchange Rate The budget exchange rate record is available when the Multiple Currencies and Multiple Budgets features are enabled. Budget Import You need the Set Up Budget permission to import budget data. You don't need the Import CSV File permission. Campaign Audience You must enable the Marketing Automation feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Campaign Category You must enable the Customer Relationship Management and Marketing Automation features before you can use this record through REST web services. Campaign Channel You must enable the Marketing Automation feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Campaign Family You must enable the Marketing Automation feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Campaign Offer You must enable the Marketing Automation feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Campaign Search Engine You must enable the Marketing Automation feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Campaign Subscription You must enable the Marketing Automation feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Campaign Template You must enable the Marketing Automation, Customer Relationship Management, and CRM Template Categories features before you can use this record through REST web services. Campaign Vertical You must enable the Marketing Automation feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Entity Group You must enable the Marketing Automation feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Fair Value Formula The fair value formula record is available only when the Advanced Revenue Management (Revenue Allocation) feature is enabled. General Token You must enable the Payment Instruments and Credit Card Payments features. GL Audit Numbering Sequence The GL Audit Numbering feature must be enabled. Inventory Status You must enable the Inventory Status feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Item Supply Plan You must enable the Demand Planning feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Lead Source You must enable the CRM feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Lot Numbered Assembly Item You must enable the Assembly Items and Lot Tracking features before you can use this record through REST web services. Lot Numbered Inventory Item You must enable the Lot Tracking feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Partner Category You must enable the CRM feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Paycheck Journal Before you can use this record with REST web services, you must enable the payroll and payroll journal features. Payment Card You must enable the Payment Instruments and Credit Card Payments features. Payment Card Token You must enable the Payment Instruments and Credit Card Payments features. Resource Allocation The Resource Allocations feature must be enabled at Setup > Company > Setup Tasks > Enable Features (Administrator), on the Company subtab. Sales Price Rule You must enable Pricing before you can use this record through REST web services. Sales Price Rule Entry You must enable Pricing before you can use this record through REST web services. Sales Campaign You must enable the Marketing Automation and Sales Campaigns features before you can use this record through REST web services. Serialized Assembly Item You must enable the Assembly Items and Serialized Inventory features before you can use this record through REST web services. Serialized Inventory Item You must enable the Serialized Inventory feature before you can use this record through REST web services. Site Category You must enable the Site Builder (Web Store) and Site Builder (Website) features to use this record in REST web services. Support Case Origin You must enable the CRM > Customer Support and Service feature to work with this record in REST web services. Support Case Priority You must enable the CRM > Customer Support and Service feature to work with this record in REST web services. Support Case Status You must enable the CRM > Customer Support and Service feature to work with this record in REST web services. Support Case Type You must enable the CRM > Customer Support and Service feature to work with this record in REST web services. Tax Control Account The Legacy Tax feature must be enabled. Tax Group The Legacy Tax feature must be enabled. Tax Schedule The Advanced Taxes feature must be enabled. Win/Loss Reason You must enable the Sales Force Automation feature to use this record with REST web services.

For a list of every supported record, see REST Web Services Supported Records.

You can also see the list of supported records in the REST API browser. For more information about working with the browser, see The REST API Browser.

SOAP Web Services Endpoint Availability

Oracle NetSuite has scheduled the gradual removal of SOAP web services from the product as part of ongoing efforts to provide modern integration channels.

The 2025.2 SOAP endpoint was the last planned SOAP endpoint, and any later SOAP endpoints would be released only as necessary to meet business, technical, or other significant requirements.

The following table shows the endpoint version and its status in future NetSuite release:

S: Supported endpoint

U: Available endpoint without support

-: Disabled, unavailable endpoint

Endpoint Version/NetSuite Release NetSuite 2026.1 NetSuite 2026.2 NetSuite 2027.1 NetSuite 2027.2 NetSuite 2028.1 NetSuite 2028.2 2025.2 S S S S S - 2025.1 S S S U U - 2024.2 S S S U U - 2024.1 S S U U U - 2023.2 S U U U U - 2023.1 U U U U U - 2022.2 U U U U U - 2022.1 U U U U U - 2021.2 U U U U U - 2021.1 U U U U - - 2020.2 U U U - - - 2020.1 U U - - - - 2019.2 U - - - - - 2019.1 - - - - - - 2018.2 - - - - - -

For more information, see the SOAP Removal Plans FAQ.

Also refer to Removal of SOAP Web Services.

New Subtab in Execution Log of Integration Records for AI Connector Service (MCP)

When you go to the Execution Log of an integration record, along with the SOAP Web Services, REST Web Services, and RESTlets subtabs, you can now also find one for AI Connector Service (MCP). The log shows calls identified with the integration record you are currently viewing, and includes the following information in respective columns:

Time
Duration
Status
User email
HTTP status code
Method
URL

General Notices

UI Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 18 May 2026 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated May 18, 2026.

Changes to Text Enhance User Experience

For Text Enhance users, the Enhance Text icon and menu are replaced by a button in text area fields and rich text fields. This change makes AI-powered options more discoverable.

With this enhancement, you can:

Perform the default Text Enhance action for the field with a single button click. The default action is typically Clean up or Generate (where supported for the field).
Access more Text Enhance actions from the dropdown list associated with the button. Additional actions include Clean up (when Generate is the default), Translate to, Make Longer, Make Shorter, and any custom Text Enhance actions added to your account.
Enjoy direct, context-sensitive text improvements and translations for supported fields.

The new button is available in the lower right corner of fields with Text Enhance. In the example shown below, clicking the button performs the Generate action. When you click the arrow on the button, additional Text Enhance actions, such as Clean up, Make longer, Make shorter, and Translate to, are available from the list.

For more information, see Text Enhance.

General Notices

Artificial Intelligence (AI) Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 00:00:00 GMT

Narrative Insights on Reports and Records
Intelligent Close Manager Dashboard Portlet
SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code - New SuiteCloud Developer Assistant Feature
Changes to Text Enhance User Experience
Updates to Prompt Studio
New Intelligent Recommendations Subtab in AI Preferences
New Narrative Insights Subtab in AI Preferences
Support for GPT-OSS Model in N/llm Module
Payment Date Prediction for Invoices
NetSuite CPQ AI Assistant
Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion Workbook
Filter by Available Items for Intelligent Item Recommendations
Column Customization of Intelligent Item Recommendation Results
Popular Item Recommendations
Accessing Intelligent Item Recommendations Preferences
Redwood Theme Experience and UI Updates to Intelligent Item Recommendations
Exception Management Now Supported in Sandbox Accounts

Commerce Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 00:00:00 GMT

Commerce · Commerce Sales and Marketing

Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion Workbook
Filter by Available Items for Intelligent Item Recommendations
Column Customization of Intelligent Item Recommendation Results
Popular Item Recommendations
Accessing Intelligent Item Recommendations Preferences
Redwood Theme Experience and UI Updates to Intelligent Item Recommendations

Commerce · SC/SCMA/SCA - SuiteCommerce Solutions

The 2026.1 release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced will be available in a future release. For the current release notes for these solutions, see the help topic 2025.2 Release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced.

Commerce · SuiteCommerce InStore

Release Summary Integrated Solutions Integrated Solutions · Enterprise Performance

Management (EPM)

NetSuite Enterprise Performance Management Integration SuiteApps
NetSuite EPM Connector Release Notes
Planning and Budgeting Sync Release Notes
Account Reconciliation Sync Release Notes
Close Management and Consolidation Sync Release Notes

Integrated Solutions · NetSuite Analytics Warehouse

Updated NetSuite Analytics Warehouse Configuration Page

Integrated Solutions · SuiteProjects Pro

Release Notes SuiteApps

SuiteApps · SuiteApps (Bundles) Released by NetSuite

Accounting SuiteApps
Administration SuiteApps
Banking SuiteApps
Integration SuiteApps
Inventory Management SuiteApps
Localization SuiteApps
Manufacturing SuiteApps
Order Management SuiteApps
SuitePeople SuiteApps
Taxation SuiteApps
Vendors, Purchasing, and Receiving SuiteApps

Commerce Sales and Marketing

Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion Workbook
Filter by Available Items for Intelligent Item Recommendations
Column Customization of Intelligent Item Recommendation Results
Popular Item Recommendations
Accessing Intelligent Item Recommendations Preferences
Redwood Theme Experience and UI Updates to Intelligent Item Recommendations Commerce Marketing

Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion Workbook

An Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion workbook is now available. Use the workbook to analyze conversions based on intelligent item recommendations (IIRs) and view estimated revenue. This workbook has three views:

Recommendation Conversions Table - Shows a breakdown of IIR-related conversions by date, scenario, employee, customer, transaction, transaction type, and item.
Estimated Revenue Table - Summarizes estimated revenue associated with IIR-driven transactions.
Daily Estimated Value Area Chart - Displays daily aggregated estimated revenue over the past 30 days as a graph. For more information about the workbook, see the help topic Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion Workbook. This workbook is based on the new Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion dataset. It provides detailed tracking of transaction lines in CRM where an IIR-driven conversion has occurred. The dataset supports filtering by date range, transaction type, and item value, enabling targeted reporting. For more information about the dataset, see the help topic Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion Dataset.

Filter by Available Items for Intelligent Item Recommendations

When using Intelligent Item Recommendations on your sales orders, estimates, and opportunity records, you can now filter to view available items only. By default, all items are shown, but you can refine your results by selecting the 'Available items only' option. Available items include those in stock and those available for backorder.

Column Customization of Intelligent Item Recommendation Results

You can now customize which columns are displayed in the intelligent item recommendations popup window on sales orders, estimates, and opportunity records. Optional columns include Display Name,

Unit Price, and Quantity Available. Selected columns are displayed in your NetSuite account and the

Customer Center. To customize these columns, go to Intelligent Item Preferences. For more information, see the help topic Customize Display Columns.

Popular Item Recommendations

If intelligent item recommendations aren't available for your sales orders, estimates, or opportunity records, you'll see a list of popular items instead. This helps you discover additional products.

Accessing Intelligent Item Recommendations Preferences

Intelligent Recommendations preferences are now available in the AI Preferences menu on the

Intelligent Recommendations subtab. The Show Intelligent Recommendations button for item

recommendations option has also been moved to the Intelligent Recommendations subtab. This preference was previously at Setup > Sales > Sales Preferences. Keeping your AI-related preferences together makes it easier to customize these features.

Intelligent Recommendations preferences can be accessed from multiple locations:

As an Administrator, access preferences at Setup > Company > AI Preferences > Intelligent Recommendations subtab.
As an Administrator, access preferences at Commerce > Marketing > Recommendation Preferences.
As a Sales Manager, access preferences at Setup > Sales & Marketing Automation > Recommendation Preferences. For more information, see the help topic Manage Intelligent Item Recommendations Preferences. Redwood Theme Experience and UI Updates to Intelligent Item

Recommendations

We made the following updates to enhance the look and feel, and to align with the Redwood Experience

Theme:

Updated the popup window for sales orders, estimates, and opportunity records.
Updated the Recommendation Availability page. To enable the Redwood Theme Experience in your account, go to Home > Set Preferences. On the Appearance tab in the Redwood Experience area, click Enable. Regardless of the active theme in your account, the Recommendation button on the Item line has been renamed to Alternative Items.

SC/SCMA/SCA - SuiteCommerce Solutions

The 2026.1 release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced will be available in a future release. For information about the current release, see the help topic 2025.2 Release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced. Important: Commerce Themes and Extensions are only available if they are provisioned and set up in your account.

Commerce Themes

Complete release notes on the latest themes for your SuiteCommerce and SuiteCommerce Advanced site are available here: Commerce Themes Release Notes.

Commerce Extensions

Complete release notes on the latest extensions for your SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced site are available here: Commerce Extensions Release Notes.

SuiteCommerce InStore

SuiteCommerce InStore (SCIS) uses a phased release process to distribute managed-bundle upgrades. Each phase consists of a different group of customers that receive the latest SCIS release. Administrators set up for customers within a phased group receive an email notification listing when their upgrade will occur. Note: Contact your account representative or Customer Support if you have questions about the availability of SCIS 2026.1.

Release Summary

SCIS 2026.1 provides improvements and fixes for processing that occurs in the background. The release

has no new features or functional changes that are visible at the point-of-sale (POS).

Commerce Sales and Marketing Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 00:00:00 GMT

Commerce Marketing

Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion Workbook

An Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion workbook is now available. Use the workbook to analyze conversions based on intelligent item recommendations (IIRs) and view estimated revenue.

This workbook has three views:

Recommendation Conversions Table - Shows a breakdown of IIR-related conversions by date, scenario, employee, customer, transaction, transaction type, and item.
Estimated Revenue Table - Summarizes estimated revenue associated with IIR-driven transactions.
Daily Estimated Value Area Chart - Displays daily aggregated estimated revenue over the past 30 days as a graph.

For more information about the workbook, see Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion Workbook.

This workbook is based on the new Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion dataset. It provides detailed tracking of transaction lines in CRM where an IIR-driven conversion has occurred. The dataset supports filtering by date range, transaction type, and item value, enabling targeted reporting. For more information about the dataset, see Intelligent Item Recommendations: CRM Conversion Dataset.

Filter by Available Items for Intelligent Item Recommendations

Column Customization of Intelligent Item Recommendation Results

You can now customize which columns are displayed in the intelligent item recommendations popup window on sales orders, estimates, and opportunity records. Optional columns include Display Name, Unit Price, and Quantity Available. Selected columns are displayed in your NetSuite account and the Customer Center. To customize these columns, go to Intelligent Item Preferences. For more information, see Customize Display Columns.

Popular Item Recommendations

If intelligent item recommendations aren't available for your sales orders, estimates, or opportunity records, you'll see a list of popular items instead. This helps you discover additional products.

Accessing Intelligent Item Recommendations Preferences

Intelligent Recommendations preferences are now available in the AI Preferences menu on the Intelligent Recommendations subtab. The Show Intelligent Recommendations button for item recommendations option has also been moved to the Intelligent Recommendations subtab. This preference was previously at Setup > Sales > Sales Preferences. Keeping your AI-related preferences together makes it easier to customize these features.

Intelligent Recommendations preferences can be accessed from multiple locations:

As an Administrator, access preferences at Setup > Company > AI Preferences > Intelligent Recommendations subtab.
As an Administrator, access preferences at Commerce > Marketing > Recommendation Preferences.
As a Sales Manager, access preferences at Setup > Sales & Marketing Automation > Recommendation Preferences.

For more information, see Manage Intelligent Item Recommendations Preferences.

Redwood Theme Experience and UI Updates to Intelligent Item Recommendations

We made the following updates to enhance the look and feel, and to align with the Redwood Experience Theme:

Updated the popup window for sales orders, estimates, and opportunity records.
Updated the Recommendation Availability page.

To enable the Redwood Theme Experience in your account, go to Home > Set Preferences. On the Appearance tab in the Redwood Experience area, click Enable.

Regardless of the active theme in your account, the Recommendation button on the Item line has been renamed to Alternative Items.

General Notices

Projects Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 00:00:00 GMT

Add and Edit Tasks in Bulk with Inline Editing

You can now add multiple project tasks directly during project creation using a new inline table on the project form. This enhancement helps you add and manage tasks more efficiently, without switching between forms. To do this, click the Add/Edit Tasks in Bulk button on the Schedule subtab. In the inline table you can enter project task details such as Name, Status, Planned Work (or Estimated Work, depending on your configuration), and Notes. Each task can be edited later to add more details.

Tasks are assigned a default status of Not Started. If you leave the Planned Work field empty or set to

zero, the task will be saved as a Milestone and flagged for your reference. The order you enter tasks in the table determines how they'll appear in the Schedule view when the project is created. After you save the project, each row in the table is automatically added as a project task or milestone.

For existing projects, you can edit or add tasks in bulk by clicking Add/Edit Tasks in Bulk. This opens a

window where you can view and update existing tasks or add new tasks inline. This button is available by default in standard project forms but hidden by default in customized forms. To show this button on customized forms, go to Customize > Customize Form > Sublists, and then select both View project - Show Add/Edit Tasks in Bulk button and Create project - Show Add/Edit Tasks in Bulk button. The same capabilities apply to project templates.

Enhanced Revenue Recognition Features on Project Page

You can now recalculate revenue recognition for a specific project directly from the project form. This enhancement improves usability, transparency, and troubleshooting efficiency when working with project revenue arrangements and revenue plans. On the Project record, click Actions, and then click Recalculate Revenue Arrangements or Recalculate Revenue Plans to trigger the recalculation on demand. This feature supports the following methods for calculating project revenue recognition:

Project revenue recognition rules
Revenue recognition on the line items in sales transactions Note: When Revenue Recognition Rule on the item's Revenue Recognition / Amortization subtab is set to Default Percent Complete, revenue is recognized based on the project's percent complete. If a project has an existing revenue recognition rule, the system automatically ignores any revenue recognition settings on related transactions.

Preconditions for this feature:

The Project Management feature must be enabled.
The Advanced Revenue Management feature must be enabled.
Charge-Based Billing must be enabled. Note: Advanced Revenue Management in Configuration Mode must be disabled.

SuiteApps Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteApp distribution includes SuiteBundler, SuiteApp Marketplace, and SuiteApp Control Center capabilities that you can use to distribute customizations to accounts. New Control Center API Endpoints to Automate SuiteApp

Management

Control Center API endpoints let you automate SuiteApp release and management actions. These

endpoints provide a secure and efficient way for you to manage SuiteApp deployments and updates. With these endpoints, you can now:

Initiate SuiteApp releases and updates without manual interference in the UI.
Enable monitoring for the entire SuiteApp install base. To get started, create an integration record and obtain an OAuth 2.0 access token for secure API access. You can use common REST API editor tools, such as Postman, to manage and make API calls. For more information, see the help topic Getting Started with SuiteApp Control Center API Endpoints.

SuiteCloud SDK Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteCloud Software Development Kit (SuiteCloud SDK) is a set of tools you can use to develop SuiteCloud

projects. These tools are the SuiteCloud IDE plug-ins and extensions, and the command-line interfaces. SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code - New

SuiteCloud Developer Assistant Feature

The latest version of SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code introduces SuiteCloud Developer Assistant. This version is available before the full release of the 2026.1 SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code. SuiteCloud Developer Assistant is an AI-powered coding assistant designed for SuiteCloud developers.

Integrated with Visual Studio Code (VS Code) through the Cline extension, it uses advanced language

models specialized for SuiteCloud and SuiteScript to support NetSuite customization tasks. With SuiteCloud Developer Assistant, you can:

Get real-time, context-aware coding assistance within your SuiteCloud projects
Generate SuiteScript 2.1 code based on your input
Create and manage XML custom objects to speed up development
Work within your existing VS Code and Cline setup for a consistent workflow
Approve each task suggested by the assistant before it is implemented For more information, see the help topics SuiteCloud Developer Assistant Guide and Setting Up SuiteCloud Developer Assistant Using Cline in SuiteCloud Extension for VS Code. 2026.1 SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code Is Not

Yet Available

The 2026.1 SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code is targeted for release in February 2026.

SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code provides a UI for NetSuite platform development using

SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF). You can install the SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio

Code, develop SuiteCloud projects, and deploy them to your account. For more information, see the help topic SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code Overview.

SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code is an open-source project published in GitHub. To view its

code and get the latest changes, see SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code GitHub Repository. 2026.1 SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js Is Not Yet Available The 2026.1 SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js is targeted for release in February 2026.

SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js is a tool that you can use with your own integrated development environment

(IDE) or source-code editor to develop SuiteCloud projects. This CLI is optimized for the experience. It is interactive and guides you through all the steps of the communication between your local project and your NetSuite account. For more information, see the help topic SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js Guide. SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js is an open-source project published in GitHub. To view its code and get the latest changes, see SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js GitHub Repository. 2026.1 SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm Is Not Yet

Available

The 2026.1 SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm is targeted for release in February 2026.

SuiteCloud IDE plug-in for WebStorm is an integrated development environment (IDE) that is packaged

for NetSuite platform development. It provides a UI for SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF). You can download SuiteCloud IDE plug-in for WebStorm as a plug-in installation, develop SuiteCloud projects, and deploy them to your account. For more information, see the help topic SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm Overview. 2026.1 SuiteCloud CLI for Java Is Not Yet Available The 2026.1 SuiteCloud CLI for Java is targeted for release in February 2026.

SuiteCloud CLI for Java is the SDF command-line interface. You can use the CLI for Java with your own

integrated development environment (IDE) source code editor to create SuiteCloud projects. You can also create batch and shell scripts that use CLI commands to automate your project validation and deployment processes. When used with your own IDE, CLI for Java acts as an alternative to SuiteCloud IDE. For more information, see the help topic SuiteCloud CLI for Java Guide. SuiteFlow (Workflow Manager)

View Logs for Scheduled Workflows

You can now view the status of your scheduled workflows from the Workflow Definition page. The log shows the status of each scheduled workflow, when each instance of the workflow ran and completed, and the number of records processed with each workflow. To access the log, click the Scheduled Log subtab on the Workflow Definition page. For more information, see Workflow Definition Scheduled Log Subtab.

SuiteCommerce InStore Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 00:00:00 GMT

Note: Contact your account representative or Customer Support if you have questions about the availability of SCIS 2026.1.

Release Summary

SCIS 2026.1 provides improvements and fixes for processing that occurs in the background. The release has no new features or functional changes that are visible at the point-of-sale (POS).

General Notices

SuiteProjects Pro Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 00:00:00 GMT

Note: The following pages include: Release notes listing the new features and product enhancements introduced in the latest release of SuiteProjects Pro Notes regarding any interim changes made since the last release. Visit these pages regularly to find out about new features, product enhancements and add-on application releases. You can view release notes for previous SuiteProjects Pro releases in SuiteProjects Pro Help Center at Release Notes Archive.

Taxation Updates in NetSuite 2026.1

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteTax

Line Level Location in SuiteTax
Tax on Term Discounts in SuiteTax for Sales Transactions
Brazil Certification Tax Authorities Enhancement
Brazil Localization Enhancements
Brazilian Hub Enhancement
Chile Localization Now Available
Custom Transaction for Tax Payments in Brazil
SuiteTax Latam Engine - Brazil Records Enhancements

Legacy Tax

Advanced Intercompany Journal Entries in Philippine Tax Audit Files
Brazilian Hub Enhancement

Line Level Location in SuiteTax

Starting from 2026.1, nexus determination in SuiteTax will now consider the line-level location on an item, if available. Other factors such as shipping address and entity tax registration will also be considered. This is supported by most transaction types in NetSuite. Previously, only the header location was used in the nexus determination. Now, specifying a location at the line level on each item provides more accurate tax calculations when items are shipped from multiple locations. When you select a location at the line level, the system validates the nexus for each item line as it creates or updates transactions. All item lines must share the same nexus. Otherwise, you must create separate transactions. You can select a location from the dropdown list under Location subtab. If your location isn't on the list, you can add it and then select it. For more information, see the help topic Single Nexus Validation on Transactions.

Tax on Term Discounts in SuiteTax for Sales Transactions

Starting from 2026.1, you can automate tax adjustments when you apply term discounts on sales transactions. Previously, when customers paid invoices early and qualified for a term discount, you adjusted only the discount, and any related tax adjustment required manual calculation and entry. With the new Tax on Term Discounts feature, the system automatically generates credit memos for both the discount and its associated tax amount. You can choose to create adjustment transactions for the discount alone or include the tax adjustment in the same transaction, depending on your configuration preferences. To use this feature, ensure to:

Enable the Create Adjustment Transactions for Term Discounts accounting preference.
Enable the Include Tax for Term Discounts preference at the nexus level if you want to adjust the tax with the discount amount.
Grant the edit-level permission for the Tax details tab and the Create Credit Memo Transaction permission to any role that needs to record payments with term discounts.

Account Setup Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated September 8, 2025.

Introducing the NetSuite Service Tier Dashboard

NetSuite introduces the Service Tier Dashboard, which shows your NetSuite account usage and Service

Tier metrics. You can view the following data for your account all in one place:

Monthly transaction lines (previous six-month rolling average)
Monthly transaction lines (previous month)
SuiteCloud Plus licenses
User licenses
File cabinet storage (GB) (previous day) You can use the NetSuite Service Tier dashboard to track your account’s current numbers, the service tier limits, and the percentage of your service tier limits used, which will help you decide when to upgrade your NetSuite Service Tier to optimize your company’s growth and your account’s performance. To view your account’s usage details in the Service Tier Dashboard, Administrators can go to Setup > Company > Service Tier Dashboard. For more information, see the help topics Service Tier Dashboard and NetSuite Service Tier Structure.

Near Match Duplicate Detection

The NetSuite 2025.2 release introduces an improved Near Match Detection method for identifying duplicate entities of records in the database, such as customer and vendor data. This feature is available to all customers whose accounts use Latin or Cyrillic characters. In previous NetSuite releases, duplicate detection relied on exact matches of names and other criteria. The system would alert users of potential duplicates if they entered the same information about a new entity record that matched an existing one. With the new Near Match Detection feature, users in supported regions can now identify duplicates based on similar but not exact match criteria. This enhancement improves duplicate detection by catching duplicates created from misspellings, typos, and other minor variations in data. When potential duplicates have been detected, users will see a notification banner highlighting records that could be merged into one entity record. To enable this feature, administrators can go to Setup > Company > (Company Management) Duplicate Detection (Administrator) and check the Near Match Detection box. The feature can be disabled at any time to revert to the exact match detection method. For more information, see the help topics Duplicate Detection Preferences and Near Match Detection.

New Project Manager Role

The Specialized User: Project Manager role is a standard role with predefined permissions which grants you access to Project Management features. Use this role to manage projects, resources, time & expense, and other transactions related to projects in NetSuite. This role prevents the use of any functionality not included within the role's permissions.

New Site Operator Role

The new Specialized User: Site Operator role is a standard role with predefined permissions which grants users limited access to NetSuite to perform operational functions. This role is designed for managers overseeing specific physical locations such as stores, restaurants, or clinics. Assigning this role helps ensure users have the tools they need to efficiently manage daily operations at the store or site level while maintaining appropriate access controls. For more information, see the help topic Specialized User: Site Operator.

New Parent Role Field on Role Records

You can now see a new Parent Role field on any custom role record when clicking Customize next to a standard role on the Manage Roles page. The Parent Role field allows you to see from which standard role was your custom role created. When you click the parent role name, it opens in a new tab. Note: You may not see the Parent Role field on older role records.

New parentrolescriptid attribute for custom roles in SDF

See the release note at New parentrolescriptid attribute for custom roles in SDF.

Removal of Unsupported Permissions from Standard Roles

Permissions available for some standard roles were updated, either removed or their access level was

changed. This might affect your customized roles. To view which permissions are no longer supported by a role, go to the customized role. On the Permissions subtab, look at the Unsupported column.

Unsupported permissions are still assigned to a role, but you should consider updating the permissions

assigned to this role. For more information, see the help topic Unsupported Permissions.

Customization of the Advanced Partner Center Role

To create a new Advanced Partner Center (APC) role, you must now customize the standard APC role through the UI or with SDF. It's no longer possible to create a new APC role without using the standard role. To customize a role through UI, go to Setup > Users/Role > Manage Roles and click Customize next to the standard role's name. When you customize the APC standard role in SDF, you must fill out the parentrolescriptid attribute. Introducing the SuiteSuccess Transaction Types Analysis

Workbook

NetSuite introduces the SuiteSuccess Transaction Types Analysis workbook, which offers powerful views

to any user looking for a deeper understanding of their transaction lines metrics for the current month. The workbook highlights Daily Transaction Types, Transaction Types Breakdown, and Transaction Type Line Details, for your NetSuite account in the current month. Administrators can use this knowledge to gain insights into trends, including:

Total count of transactions for the current month
Breakdown of transaction lines for the current month For more information, see the help topic Transaction Types Included in Monthly Transaction Lines Metric.

Updates to AI Preferences

A new subtab, Text Enhance Translations, was added to AI Preferences. If you're a user with the Administrator role, you can use this subtab to manage your company's Text Enhance Translations Translation is enabled by default for all customers with Text Enhance.

Enable Translations for External Roles: This setting lets you control whether users with external roles can use Text Enhance Translations. To enhance security, this setting is disabled by default. Only users with internal roles can use Text Enhance Translations unless you enable this setting. When you enable this setting, users with external roles can use Text Enhance Translations.
Translation Languages: This setting lets you choose which languages are on the Translate to menu. For more information, see the help topic Supported Languages for Text Enhance Translation. For more information, see the help topic Manage Text Enhance Translations Preferences. Updated Time Zone Presets for Mexico to Reflect Daylight

Saving Time Legislation Changes

As part of recent changes to daylight saving time legislation in Mexico, some time zones have been redefined. Specifically, Chihuahua no longer follows the same rules as La Paz and Mazatlán. To ensure compliance with applicable laws and maintain accuracy, NetSuite ERP has updated the available time zone presets.

Accounting Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated August 25, 2025.

Japan Consumption Tax Form and Invoice Summary Enhancements

Malaysia Electronic Invoicing Enhancements
North America Electronic Invoicing Now Available
North America Electronic Invoicing Enhancements
Portugal Localization Enhancements

Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing Version 6.0.0

US Sales Tax Reports SuiteApp Enhancements Create Revenue Recognition Field Maps for Identical

Custom Fields

You can now create revenue recognition field maps when the same custom field is selected in both the Source Field and Target Field. When creating a field map with the same custom fields in both the source and target, you must check the Automatically Update Target Field Value box. This enhancement eliminates the need to manually update the target field value after the source field value changes. Previously, you had to update the target field whenever the source field changed because field maps with identical custom fields in both the source and target weren't supported. For more information about revenue recognition field mapping, see the help topic Mapping Revenue Recognition Fields.

Direct Revenue Posting for ARM Workflows

You can now configure SuiteFlow to automatically post transactions to an item revenue account using the Direct Revenue Posting option. This enhancement is particularly useful for transactions that recognize revenue at the time of the sales transaction date. The Direct Revenue Posting option is now available under Field in the Parameters section when configuring a Set Field Value action in a workflow. You can check or clear the Checked box to control whether an item posts directly to an item revenue account:

If the Checked box is set, Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) is disabled for that item.
If the Checked box is cleared, the item continues using ARM. This enhancement gives you more flexibility when configuring ARM workflows in SuiteFlow. To use this functionality, you must enable both Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) and SuiteFlow. For more information about enabling these features, see the following help topics:
Enabling the Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) Feature
Enabling SuiteFlow For more information about direct revenue posting and setting field value actions, see the following help topics:
Item Configuration for Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) and (Revenue Allocation)
Set Field Value Action SuiteScript and REST Restrictions on Revenue Recognition and Reclassification Journal Entries You can no longer use SuiteScript and REST Web Services to edit Debit and Credit amounts in the Lines subtab of revenue recognition and revenue reclassification journal entries. Previously, these amounts were editable through SuiteScript and REST. This restriction helps maintain data consistency in financial reporting. This update aligns SuiteScript and REST behavior with existing UI restrictions, where these fields are already read-only. This editing restriction applies to both classic Revenue Recognition and Advanced

Revenue Management (Essentials). For more information about editing restrictions, see the help topics

Editing an Advanced Revenue Recognition Journal Entry and Reclassification of Deferred Revenue.

Improved Handling of Large Expense Allocation Schedules

With the NetSuite 2025.2 release, the allocation process now splits destination lines into multiple journal entries, each containing about 1,000 lines. All journal entries from the same allocation are grouped under the same allocation detail ID. This update helps prevent timeouts and allows large allocation schedules to be processed successfully without manual intervention. Before this release, users could encounter a timeout error when running Expense Allocation Schedules that generated more than 10,000 allocation detail destination lines, primarily when using the Auto Populate option for multiple fields (such as Name, Department, Location, or Class). When this happened, the allocation process stopped and no journal entries were posted. Note: This only applies to accounts updated to 2025.2. If you're using 2025.1 or earlier, the previous error rules still applies. For more information about expense allocation schedules, see the help topic Expense Allocation Overview.

Authentication Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Multiple NetSuite Sessions per User

NetSuite now supports multiple sessions per a single user. This means you can have NetSuite logged

in on more devices or in more browsers at the same time. You can check how many active sessions you currently have on the new Active Sessions page, which you can access from your Settings portlet. You can also invalidate all of the other sessions in the same account on the Active Sessions page. The maximum number of simultaneous valid sessions you can have is three.

OAuth 2.0 Certificate Expiration Notification

With the NetSuite 25.2 release, administrators of accounts that use OAuth 2.0 client credentials flow certificates receive an email indicating that the certificates are about to expire. The certificate expiration notification is sent based on the following rules:

NetSuite sends a notification for certificates expiring in two months, one month, or 14 days.
If more certificates for the same account expire on the same day, they're included in one notification.
NetSuite doesn’t send notifications for revoked certificates.
NetSuite doesn’t send notifications for certificates uploaded with validity shorter than two months. All administrators in the account receive the notification. You must update the expiring certificate to ensure the integration keeps working properly.

Enhanced Check for Leaked Passwords

Previously, NetSuite performed multiple checks on new passwords during their creation. As of NetSuite 25.2, when you log in to NetSuite, your password is compared to a database of leaked passwords. Next time you log in, you will be prompted to change your password if it's in the database. This feature increases security of your NetSuite account.

Update to the OAuth 2.0 Refresh Token Validity

As of NetSuite 25.2, you can change the validity of a refresh token for the OAuth 2.0 authorization code grant flow. This gives you more flexibility when you set up OAuth 2.0 for use with integrations. The new default validity of a refresh token is two days. It previously was three hours. You can make other updates this value on the integration record associated with the integration. You can also change the length of time after which the integration user must reauthenticate. Both of these values can be changed to anything between one hour and 720 hours (thirty days in hours). The option to change these values only applies to public clients.

Banking Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated August 25, 2025. Enhanced Transaction Management For Bank

Reconciliation

The Match Bank Data and Reconcile Account Statement pages have been enhanced with new bulk selection and processing capabilities. These enhancements provide more flexibility to manage transactions and streamline bank reconciliation. Previously, on the Match Bank Data page, you could only submit all transactions for an account by selecting Submit at the top of the page. Also, you could only undo a matched or cleared transaction one at a time. Now, because selection options are available, the Review subtab includes an option to submit selected transactions (Submit Selected) or undo selected transactions (Undo Selected). You can still submit all transactions for reconciliation using the new Submit All button. can deselect them by clicking Deselect Matched Transactions.

Select Cleared Transactions – Selects all cleared transactions on the current page of the grid. You can deselect them by clicking Deselect Cleared Transactions.
Box in header – Selects all transactions on the current page.
Selection boxes – Selects transactions using the box next to each transaction. Selections persist when navigating between pages of transactions or applying filters. The Review subtab on the Reconcile Account Statement page also includes these selection options, enabling you to undo multiple transactions at the same time. Note that this subtab is only for reviewing or undoing transactions, as before. To reconcile transactions, go to the Reconcile subtab and enter an ending statement balance if you haven’t already. To access the Match Bank Data page, go to Transactions > Bank > Match Bank Data. To access the Reconcile Account Statement page, go to Transactions > Bank > Reconcile Account Statement. To use the Intelligent Transaction Matching and Account Reconciliation features, you require the following permissions:
Accounts
Matching Rules for Online Banking
Reconcile Reporting
Reconcile For more information about permissions, see the help topic Permissions for Banking Features. If an account isn't available for matching, ensure that the Use Match Bank Data and Reconcile Account Statement Pages box is checked on the account record. For details, see the help topic Editing Accounts to Use the Match Bank Data and Reconcile Account Statement Pages. For more information about bank reconciliation, see the help topic Reconciling Bank and Credit Card Statements.

Commerce Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Commerce · Commerce Website Setup

Support for Second-level Domains on NetSuite CDN

Commerce · SC/SCMA/SCA — SuiteCommerce Solutions

The 2025.2 release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced will be available in a future release. For the current release notes for these solutions, see the help topic 2025.1 Release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced.

Commerce · SuiteCommerce InStore

Release Summary SuiteApps

SuiteApps · SuiteApps (Bundles) Released by NetSuite

Accounting SuiteApps
Administration SuiteApps
Banking SuiteApps
Integration SuiteApps
Inventory Management SuiteApps
Item Record Management SuiteApps
Localization SuiteApps
Manufacturing SuiteApps
Order Management SuiteApps
SuitePeople SuiteApps
Taxation SuiteApps

Commerce Website Setup

Support for Second-level Domains on NetSuite CDN

As of June 23, 2025, you can host your second-level domains on NetSuite content delivery network (CDN). Hosting your domain on the CDN lets NetSuite generate domain-validated SSL certificates on your behalf. NetSuite also keeps the certificates updated automatically, removing the need for any manual action. The rules and conditions for hosting the second-level domains on NetSuite CDN are the same as for the third-level domains. For more information, see the help topic Point Your Domain Name at Your Domain (DNS Settings). When hosting a second-level domain on NetSuite CDN, you still need to use CNAME flattening, as you would with any other second-level domain.

SC/SCMA/SCA — SuiteCommerce Solutions

The 2025.2 release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced will be available in a future release. For information about the current release, see the help topic 2024.2 Release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced. Important: Commerce Themes and Extensions are only available if they are provisioned and set up in your account.

Commerce Themes

Complete release notes on the latest themes for your SuiteCommerce and SuiteCommerce Advanced site are available here: Commerce Themes Release Notes.

Commerce Extensions

Complete release notes on the latest extensions for your SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced site are available here: Commerce Extensions Release Notes.

SuiteCommerce InStore

Release Summary

SCIS 2025.2 provides improvements and fixes for processing that occurs in the background. The release

has no new features or functional changes that are visible at the point-of-sale (POS).

Connectors Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated September 1, 2025.

New Connector for Salesforce

The Salesforce Connector is now available in NetSuite Connector Platform. This new connector is hosted completely in NetSuite Connector Platform and integrates NetSuite with Salesforce. For more information about the Salesforce Connector, see the help topic Managing the Salesforce Connector in NetSuite Connector Platform.

CPQ Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Source Price Information from Materials

Pricing records can now source price amounts from materials in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version

1.7.0). To use the material price, go to the pricing record. In the Source Price from Material field, select a material. The pricing record also inherits the rule of the selected material and you can view it in the Material Rule field. Materials derive their price from the associated item record. For more information, see the help topics Sourcing Price Information from Materials and Calculating the Final Pricing for the Configurable Item. If you use the Multiple Prices and the Multiple Currencies features, item records include price levels organized by currency where you can specify price amounts for each level. If the item record include multiple price levels and currencies, the price level and currency for the material depends on those assigned to the customer specified on the transaction. For more information, see the help topics Setting Up Item Pricing and Using Multiple Pricing. If you use the Multiple Quantity feature, also the quantity ranges specified on the item record are taken into account for the material price. For more information, see the help topic Using Quantity Pricing. Note: When prices change based on the quantity you sell for a material, the Subtotal amount for a single configured item may change when users increase or decrease the quantity on the product interface.

Display Additional Item Prices in the Summary

Additional item prices can now be displayed in a dedicated section within the Summary on the product

interface. By displaying additional item prices in the Summary, users can make more informed choices about which additional items to include based on their price and review all pricing details before adding the configured item to the transaction. Previously, users could only view additional item prices on the transaction. To let users view additional item prices, check the Show additional item prices in Summary box on the product record in NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.7.0). The additional item prices are still excluded from the Subtotal and Total fields in the top bar of the product interface. For more information, see the help topics Working with the Price of Additional Items and Including Additional Items Related to the Configurable Item.

Support for Multiple Languages

NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.7.0) is now available in all languages that NetSuite supports. For

a list of supported languages, see the help topic Configuring Multiple Languages. To set your preferred language, go to Home > Set Preferences. For more information, see, Choosing a Language for Your NetSuite User Interface.

Improvements to the recalcRulesets() Function

The recalcRulesets() function for NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.6.4) has been improved to use up-to-date information about questions and answers in before-event actions. Previously, this function could only update data related to building blocks (formerly called rulesets), such as additional items, materials, and routing steps. Before updating building blocks data, the function now updates the current state of questions and answers by verifying which are visible and which are hidden. Hidden questions and answers have rules that match options selected by users on the interface. Then, if the Reset when hidden option is enabled, the function clears answers when they or their corresponding question become hidden. Improved Labels and Field-Level Help for User Interface

Elements

The language and terminology of NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.6.0) have been aligned with

NetSuite standards to provide a consistent user experience across the platform. The SuiteApp now

includes improvements and changes to the labels of the following user interface elements:

records
fields
field options
sections
subtabs
columns Note: The changes only affect the labels of user interface elements. The IDs of all records and fields remain unchanged. Scripts that reference those IDs will continue to run as expected. In addition, the field-level help for all fields has been revised and enhanced to provide immediate and comprehensive support when you are viewing or editing fields. Consequently, field labels are clearer and more intuitive, and the meaning and usage of fields and records are easier to understand. For more information about the changes, see the help topic Updated Labels for User Interface Elements.

CRM Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated August 18, 2025.

Enhanced Customer 360 Metrics and Data Visibility

As of 25.2, Customer 360 continues to evolve with new features that improve visibility and access to customer data across various touchpoints.

Key Enhancements:

Opportunities and Estimates: Four key metrics — Projected Total, Weighted Total, Opportunities Won, and Estimates Converted — now include direct links to workbooks. These links provide a deeper view of data.
Orders and Returns : The metrics— Orders in the Year, Returns in the Year, In Progress Orders, and Average Order Value— have been enhanced with links to corresponding workbooks, providing a deeper view of data.
Receivables: The metrics— Open Invoices, Overdue Invoices, and Available Credit Memos— now feature links to customer-specific workbooks, providing a deeper view of data.
New Activity: An Activity tab has been added to expand on the Recent Activities shown on the Overview page. This new tab provides a comprehensive list of all customer activities and transactions such as Sales Order invoices, Credit Memo, Return Authorization, etc.
The See Customer History link now directs you to the Activity tab instead of the workbook. These additions help to access detailed data and support more informed decision-making across departments. Improved Visibility into Automatic Location Assignment

Processing

The Business Events Processing History section in the System Information tab of a sales order now provides improved visibility into how locations are assigned. By clicking the See More link, you’ll see detailed messages explaining how automatic location assignment was evaluated and applied to each item. This release makes it easier to understand how locations are selected, which rules were applied, and why certain locations were used—or not. You can now clearly see the reasoning behind location assignment decisions, including factors like missing postal codes, inventory availability, or location restrictions. You now have better visibility into the processing flow, making it easier to trace how location assignment decisions are made for each order line. Security Enhancements to External Case Response Page in

Case Management

The External Case Response Page is a web page that shows information about a support case to users who don’t have NetSuite accounts – like your customers or other relevant stakeholders. External users can edit case information through the page, and their access is provided through time-limited links sent by email with each case update. As of NetSuite 2025.2, the External Case Response Page is provided with multiple security enhancements:

Users with the Administrator role now have the option to immediately disable any active link to the External Case Response Page using the Disable link button on the associated support case record.
Active link expires if the contents of the Email(s) field on the associated support case record are changed.
By default, each link is valid for a time-limited period only. You can adjust the validity period by the External Link Validity Period (in Weeks) preference in Support Preferences. Note: Every time an active link expires, external users are automatically prompted to generate a new link the next time they try to access the page. Marketing Campaign Email Address Validation

Enhancement

When validating your campaign email address, you can now click Send New Code to send a new authorization code if the original has expired. An authorization code is valid for 24 hours. For more information, see the help topic Creating a Campaign Email Address Record.

Employee Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated September 1, 2025.

SuitePeople U.S. Payroll Enhancements

As of 2025.2, the following enhancements are available in SuitePeople U.S. Payroll:

Pension Plan Contribution Pay Codes Grouping
Medical Insurance for New Hire Reporting
457(b) Catch-Up Contributions for Employees Aged 60 Through 63

Pension Plan Contribution Pay Codes Grouping

As of 2025.1, selected pension plan contribution pay codes in SuitePeople U.S. Payroll are now grouped by their annual limits. Each group has a predefined deduction limit, representing the maximum amount that can be deducted from an employee's pay for pension contributions. The paycheck can't be committed if the total deduction amount exceeds the individual pay code or group deduction limit. Adjustments must be made before committing the paycheck to ensure compliance with the relevant regulations. The following group limits are in effect as of January 1, 2025: Pension Plan Contribution Group Annual Limit (2025) 401(k), 408(k)(6), 403(b) CU 60-63 $11,250 408(p) EE Elective Deferrals $16,500 408(p) EE Elective Deferrals Catch-Up Regular $3,500 457(b) plan catch up (60-63) $11,250 Govt. EE 457(b)-Additional Catch up $23,500

Pension Contributions 60-63 Catch up $81,250

This enhancement is part of ongoing efforts to ensure compliance with the Secure Act 2.0 regulations and streamline your payroll processes. For more information, see the help topic Pension Plan Contribution Pay Codes.

Medical Insurance for New Hire Reporting

As of 2025.2, you can specify medical insurance information for your employees when they join your company so that this information is included in new hire reporting. On the employee record, click the Human Resources tab and then click the Medical Insurance tab. From there, you can check one or more of the following boxes, as appropriate:

Medical Insurance Availability: Check this box if medical insurance is available for this employee.
Medical Insurance Enrolled: Check this box if the employee is enrolled in medical insurance.
Dependent Medical Insurance Availability: Check this box if the employee has medical insurance available for any dependents.
Dependent Medical Insurance Enrolled: Check this box if the employee has any dependents enrolled in medical insurance coverage. For more information, see the help topic Medical Insurance Information for New Hire Reporting. 457(b) Catch-Up Contributions for Employees Aged 60 Through 63 SuitePeople U.S. Payroll now supports 457(b) catch-up and special 457(b) catch-up contributions for employees aged 60 – 63. In the latest version, you can now assign the following 457(b) catch-up payroll items to an employee record:
Govt. EE 457(b)-Catch-Up-60 – 63
Govt. EE 457(b) Roth-Catch up 60 – 63
Govt. EE 457(b) - Catch-up, Additional - 3 Years to Retirement-ROTH When assigning payroll items to an employee record, note that the automatic catch-up calculation feature does not apply to Govt. EE 457(b) - Catch-up, Additional - 3 Years to Retirement-ROTH and Govt. EE 457(b) - Catch-up, Additional - 3 Years to Retirement payroll items. The system calculates catch-up contributions for these payroll items even if the employee has not yet reached the annual deferral limit. Consult your plan sponsor for further details on this requirement. This enhancement ensures compliance with relevant regulations and helps streamline your payroll processes. For more information, see the help topic Setting Up Automatic Catch-Up Age 60 – 63 Calculations.

EPM Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

NetSuite Close Management and Consolidation: Job

Analytics Insights with GenAI

Job Analytics Insights gives users improved visibility into consolidation job performance by providing a

streamlined analysis of job execution details. By enabling the Consolidation Job Analytics setting, you can use GenAI to generate summaries for consolidation jobs after the jobs have completed. These summaries simplify troubleshooting by highlighting time spent during job execution, enabling quicker resolution of performance issues. For more information, see the Oracle Help Center topic Generating Consolidation Job Analytics.

Field Service Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

2025.07.1 Release Notes Complete release notes are available under 2025.07.3 of Field Service Management Release Notes.

New Configuration Preview Feature
Subsidiary Field Removed from Field Service Configuration
Issue Fixes

Inventory Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

CSV Import Support for Bin Putaway Worksheet

If you use the Bin Management feature, you can initially assign bins to items in bulk using the Import

Assistant. You can use the Bin Putaway Worksheet transaction to import CSV files that contain a list of

items and bin numbers. For more information about CSV imports, see the help topic Importing CSV Files with the Import Assistant. Warehouse Management Enhancements

Enhancements to Bin Blocking

Through the app, you can now block bins using the Bin Empty button within the Work Order Picking

process. It includes support for the existing Smart Count integration to spot count items and unblock the bins. For all supported mobile processes, you can add up to two email recipients of bin blocking notifications. You can add them to location records enabled with the Use Warehouse Management setting. For more information, see the help topic Managing Bins Blocked from Order Picking.

New Filters for Bulk Pick Assignment

The Bulk Pick Task Assignment facility enables you to assign pick tasks for items that belong to an item process group or family. From the process groups or families that you create, you can choose one that you set up on one or more item records. For more information, see the help topic Assigning Pick Tasks in Bulk.

Autogeneration of Serial Numbers

If you use the Lot Auto Numbering SuiteApp, you can activate the Autogenerate Serial Numbers? rule.

It enables generation of serial numbers only when you receive purchase orders or build assemblies for

work orders. It includes the serial number details that you set up on item records and enter on the app. To activate rules, see the help topic System Rules for NetSuite WMS.

Supply Planning Enhancements

View the Supply Planning Enhancements 2025.2 New Feature Preview (Article available only in English). Additional Filters in Planning Workbench Views

New Subsidiary Field

You can now filter results by subsidiary on the Planning Workbench Views page.

New Preset Filters by Action Type

To give planners more control and flexibility in managing supply planning, the following Action Type filters have been added to the Planning Workbench View page:

Cancel Firm – Identify orders that can be canceled
Reschedule In Firm – Filters orders that can be rescheduled to an earlier date
Reschedule Out Firm – Filter orders that can be rescheduled to a later date These new filters offer suggestions for canceling and rescheduling orders due to supply chain disruptions. For more information, see the help topic Creating a Planning Workbench View. Exclude Transfer Orders from Supply Planning on Custom

Workflows

You can now use the Exclude from Supply Planning field as a parameter in SuiteFlow workflows. This field determines whether a transfer order should be excluded from supply planning, giving you more control over your workflow processes. To access this feature, enable SuiteFlow by navigating to Company > Features > SuiteCloud > SuiteFlow.

Then, create a new workflow by navigating to Customization > Workflow > Workflows > New, selecting

Transfer Order as the record type. You can find the Exclude from Supply Planning field under the Actions tab when creating a new action in the workflow. For more information, see the help topic Creating a Workflow. Filter by Available Quantity on Replenish Location by Transfer

Order

The Create Transfer Order Based on Available Quantity box has been added to the Planned Orders tab on the Replenish Location By Transfer Order page. This option lets users filter transfer orders and focus on orders with sufficient on-hand quantity. This feature helps simplify the replenishment process and increase the efficiency in managing inventory transfers. For more information, see the help topic Replenish Location by Transfer Order. Enhanced Supply Plan Definition Saved Search with Automated

Email Notifications

When you use the Supply Plan Definition Search, you can now specify the criteria to better manage Material Requirements Planning (MRP) runs. This feature is helpful when you want to receive automated email alerts for any issues, such as failed MRP runs. New Expedited Option on Planned Purchase Orders and Order

Items Pages

From the Planned Purchase Orders and Order Items pages, you can now check the To Be Expedited box

to prioritize critical orders. This feature helps you identify and manage high-priority orders that require urgent attention.

Supply Planning Data Now Available in SuiteAnalytics

You can now create SuiteAnalytics datasets and workbooks using Supply Planning Data. This enhancement provides greater visibility into supply orders and demand forecasts to help you make data- driven decisions. The following record types are now available:

Planning Engine Cycle
Planning Engine Message
Planning Engine Pegging
Planning Engine Result
Planning Repository Allocation
Planning Repository Bill of Materials
Planning Repository Item Location Properties
Planning Repository Source
Planning Engine Result

Supply Allocation Enhancements

View the Supply Allocation Enhancements 2025.2 New Feature Preview (Article available only in English). Earliest Availability Popup Window for Kit Items on Sales

Orders

On sales orders, you can now access the Earliest Availability popup window for kit items. This feature

provides the earliest available date of the kit item, based on the combined availability of its components and the specified allocation strategy.

Default Allocation Strategy on Items

The Default Allocation Strategy field on the item record introduces a refined logic for order fulfillment to help ensure efficient sales order processing. This feature lets you take a granular and flexible allocation approach to prioritize customer-specific and item-specific strategies over a general strategy. This feature ensures that the most relevant allocation strategy is applied to each sales order line.

Lead Time Calculations on Transfer Orders

The new Override Lead Time (In Days) field is now available, so that you can control the expected receipt date calculation on Transfer Orders and Intercompany Transfer Orders. By specifying a custom lead time, you can accurately determine the receipt date and projected inventory availability balance at the receiving location. You can use this feature when cross-location transfer lead times vary due to unique circumstances.

Items Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Lot Auto Numbering Enhancement

Manufacturing Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

BOM Revision Components System Notes

Before NetSuite 2025.2, it was not possible to access the history of all changes made within an Advanced BOM revision.

Now, for each component related to the Advanced BOM revision, there is a History link that opens a table

with the list of all changes made including information such as date, username, old and new value. To access the history, follow the steps below:

Go to Lists > Supply Chain > Bill of Materials.
Click View beside the BOM.
In the Revisions subtab, click the name of the BOM revision for which you want to view the history.
In the newly opened window, in the Components subtab, you will see a list of components related to the Advanced BOM Revision and a new History link. Note: If the component has been deleted, its history will no longer be available.

Relation Between Build and Unbuild Transactions

Before NetSuite 2025.2, it was not possible to determine if there were Assembly Unbuilds related to a Work Order or an individual Assembly Build. Additionally, on the Assembly Unbuild page, there was no information about which specific Assembly Build it originated from.

Now, you can find this information in the following ways:

On the Assembly Build page, there is a new Related Records subtab with a list of all related Assembly Unbuilds. If applicable, a new Unbuilt field is also displayed, showing the total quantity unbuilt from all Assembly Unbuilds created from this Assembly Build.
On the Work Order page, a new Unbuilt field is displayed showing the total quantity unbuilt from all Assembly Unbuilds created from all Assembly Builds related to this Work Order.
On the Assembly Unbuild page, there is a new Created From field that contains a link to the related Assembly Build.

Outsourced Manufacturing Enhancements

Before NetSuite 2025.2, changes to the price of an Outsourced Manufacturing item in a Purchase Order were not reflected in the related Assembly Build or the final production cost. Now, the price is automatically updated in the following cases:

When the Rate field is changed on the Purchase Order page
When the Rate field is changed on the Item Receipt page. This update is reflected in the related Assembly Build if the new Generate Accruals preference is selected for the Outsourced Manufacturing item. The new Generate Accruals preference can be enabled by following these steps:

Follow the steps 1-9 in the Creating an Outsourced Manufacturing Item Help Topic.
On the Preferences subtab, check the Generate Accruals box.

It is now also possible to change the location for receiving the final product on the Item Receipt page. An

Inventory Transfer is automatically created. If the To Location field is changed to the original location, the Inventory Transfer is deleted. In addition, if an Assembly Build does not have a set transaction date and posting period, these fields are automatically synchronized with the Date and Posting Period fields on the Item Receipt page. Finally, you can now apply custom Purchase Order and Work Order forms for automated outsourced transactions. To select a preferred form:

Go to Setup > Manufacturing > Manufacturing Preferences.
In the Outsourced Manufacturing subtab, select Purchase Order and Work Order forms from the list.

Order Management Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated September 8, 2025.

SaaS Metrics Reporting

We’re excited to introduce SaaS Metrics Reporting, a new feature designed to simplify and enhance your

Software as a Service (SaaS) revenue reporting. With SaaS Metrics Reporting, you can now automatically

track key metric impacts, such as new sales, upsells, downsells, and churn, across your transactions and subscriptions.

These metrics are easily accessible in the SaaS 360 Dashboard SuiteApp, SuiteAnalytics, and NetSuite

Analytics Warehouse (NSAW). They provide clear insights into your monthly recurring revenue (MRR) and annual recurring revenue (ARR) throughout NetSuite.

SaaS Metrics Reporting brings all your recurring revenue data into a single, comprehensive view. It

pulls information from multiple sources and standardizes it, so you get consistent and reliable recurring revenue amounts. You can even import non-NetSuite records using CSV files, ensuring all your data is captured. The SaaS 360 Dashboard SuiteApp takes the guesswork out of calculating essential SaaS metrics. By reducing the complexity of revenue calculations, and normalizing different types of bookings, SaaS

Metrics Reporting delivers meaningful metrics, no matter the data source. Plus, this feature is built with

performance and scalability in mind, making reporting in NSAW, as well as SaaS revenue forecasting in NetSuite Planning and Budgeting (NSPB), faster and easier. With the SaaS 360 SuiteApp, you’ll get unified SaaS metrics, reports, and Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) to help you evaluate business performance and make informed decisions. After you’ve set up an item for analysis, our nightly bulk processing job takes over, handling large volumes of data and scaling as your data grows. This process creates Analytical Impact and SaaS Metrics records from source systems, including:

subscriptions
sales orders with billing schedules
contract renewals
standalone sales orders
invoices
cash sales You can also generate downsell events for return authorizations, credit memos, and related cash refunds. SaaS Metrics Reporting automatically generates events based on the details of each source transaction. Each event is categorized with an impact category, subcategory, and monthly impact amount. If you make changes to the original data, such as line amounts, dates, or linked records, those updates are automatically reflected in your metrics. You also have the flexibility to customize reporting. Reclassify impacts, split amounts for specific scenarios, or exclude records you don’t need, including deleting imported entries. This ensures your reports are tailored to your business’s unique needs. Adjust Min/Max Commitment In-Arrears Behavior in

SuiteBilling

A new subscription line preference, Charge Commit On Usage, is now available. With this option, you can continue to charge for usage throughout the period. You can then bill any remaining commitment quantity or the price plan header minimum at the end of the subscription pricing period. This means you no longer need to charge the entire commitment quantity or the full minimum amount upfront on the first usage record. Instead, minimum commitments are billed only at the end of the pricing period, offering greater flexibility in how you manage subscription billing. Next Bill Date from Sales Order Billing Schedule Now

Available in Report Builder

The Report Builder now includes the Next Bill Date field from sales order transactions. This enhancement lets you track upcoming billing dates based on attached billing schedules to provide better visibility and reporting. For information about report customization, see the help topic Adding, Removing, or Reordering Report Columns.

Projects Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Visit https://docs.oracle.com/en/cloud/saas/netsuite-suiteprojects-pro/online-help/

preface_156596732275.html for the most up-to-date SuiteProjects Pro release notes.

Access Revenue Plans from Project Records

You can now access the Revenue Plans tab for a specific project directly from the project record. Go to Financial > Revenue Plans to display a list of actual and forecast revenue plans relevant to the project you are viewing.

New Project Manager Role

Purchasing Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Bill Capture Enhancements

Improvements to Matching Logic

NetSuite’s Display Name is now included in the matching logic that NetSuite uses to match items from the scanned file with item records in the system.
Service addresses extracted from the file are now included in the matching logic that NetSuite uses to match to location records in the system.
Location records are now included in the matching logic that NetSuite uses to suggest the subsidiary value.

New Bill Capture Preference

You can now default payment terms to be sourced from the vendor record when they can't be extracted from the scanned file. Previously, you had to select sourcing from either the scanned file or vendor record. For permission details, see Bill Capture Preferences > Review Page Field Sourcing > Payment Terms.

SuiteAnalytics Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteAnalytics is a feature area that includes NetSuite Analytics Warehouse, Connect, Workbook, Searches, Reports, and Dashboards. Connect Upcoming Removal of the Outdated SuiteAnalytics Connect

NetSuite.com Data Source

As part of the removal process of the outdated NetSuite.com data source, support for the NetSuite.com data source ended in 2025.1 and will be removed as of NetSuite 2026.1. After accounts are upgraded to 2026.1, the NetSuite2.com data source will be the only data source for SuiteAnalytics Connect users and queries run through the NetSuite.com data source will no longer work. To avoid disruption when the NetSuite.com data source is removed, an intensive notifications campaign has started to notify all Connect users that they should transition to the NetSuite2.com data source as soon as possible. Note: Connect users that have not accessed the NetSuite.com data source for an extended period have been notified that they can benefit from an early removal of the NetSuite.com data source. As part of this first batch of accounts for which the NetSuite.com data source is being removed, they are excluded from receiving the notifications in the upcoming months. For information about how to transition to the NetSuite2.com data source, see the help topic Changing from NetSuite.com to NetSuite2.com. Roles in Audience Tabs Now Split into External and Internal

Roles

When you work with saved searches, reports, and KPI scorecards, you can choose the audience that has access to them. Until now, you could find the available roles in the Roles option. Now, to differentiate between users inside and outside of your organization, the role option is split into two different role types: Internal and External. To understand how you can choose the audience for each tool, see the following topics:

Defining Audiences for Saved Searches
Sharing Custom Reports with Other Users
Sharing a Custom KPI Scorecard SuiteApps (Bundles) Released by NetSuite

Accounting SuiteApps

This release note was updated August 25, 2025. Following are the 2025.2 accounting enhancements to SuiteApps:

Account Matching Report Now Available

Account Matching Report SuiteApp version 1.0.0 is now available for installation in the SuiteApp

Marketplace as a free and managed SuiteApp. For more information, see the help topic Installing the Account Matching Report SuiteApp. The Account Matching Report SuiteApp lets you view a transaction's General Ledger (GL) account data alongside matching transaction details. This SuiteApp integrates GL information with the built-in payment application data in NetSuite, enabling you to reconcile account balances and identify unapplied amounts. Each transaction line in the report has several columns sourced directly from GL account data, such as debit or credit amounts. Additionally, you can review related transaction details, including matched amounts and the dates when transactions were matched. For more information, see the help topic Account Matching Report SuiteApp. Administration SuiteApps

Following are the 2025.2 administration enhancements to SuiteApps:

Compliance 360 SuiteApp Enhancements
Changes to the Personal Information Access Logs Workbook in the Compliance 360 SuiteApp Compliance 360 SuiteApp Enhancements Compliance 360 SuiteApp Version 2.1.0

CSV Import for Audit Templates

You can now import audit template CSV files using the Import Assistant. For more information, see the help topic Importing Audit Templates as CSV files.

Changes in the Total Activity Trend Portlet

The Total Activity Trend portlet displays the percentage change versus the previous month when you hover over the graph points. Previously, this percentage was shown at the bottom of each KPI meter tile in the KPI portlet. When you click on a particular month to view its daily trends, hovering over a daily point also shows the percentage change compared to the previous day.

Email Notification for Activity Log Purging Date

The Compliance 360 activity log retains data for up to 12 months. Starting with version 2.1.0, users with Administrator or Compliance Officer roles receive automated email notifications reminding them to download activity logs before they are purged. Purging of data happens on the 1st day of the month. For example, all activity logs from July 2024 will be purged on August 1, 2025. Three notifications are sent prior to the scheduled purge date, specifically on the 1st, 15th, and 25th of the month before the purging date.

Actions Performed Using SuiteFlow in Activity Log

The activity log now records actions performed through SuiteFlow. When a user with an Administrator role initiates a workflow on a record containing sensitive customer information, this action is now captured in the activity log.

Compliance 360 SuiteApp version 2.0.0

The Compliance 360 SuiteApp version 2.0.0 contains the following enhancements:

Audit Templates
Audit Templates List
Updates to the Audits List
Printing Audits

Audit Templates

Audit templates are reusable templates that have pre-saved sets of audit controls. You can now create audit templates and import them when creating new audits.

Audit Templates List

You can manage the created audit templates in the Audit Templates list, which is filterable and sortable. The Audit Templates list includes an Action column that displays the following buttons corresponding to each audit template:

Edit – To edit the audit template.
Delete – To delete the audit template.
Export as CSV – To export the audit template as a CSV file.

Updates to the Audits List

The updated Audits list now displays the Action column that shows the following buttons corresponding to each audit:

Edit – To edit the audit.
View – To view the audit.
Print – To print the audit as PDF file. You can also save the audit as PDF by clicking this icon.

Printing Audits

The new version of the SuiteApp now lets you print an audit. On the Audits list page, on the Actions column, click the Print icon on the audit row. You can also save the audit as a PDF file before printing it. For more information, see the help topic Compliance 360 SuiteApp. Changes to the Personal Information Access Logs Workbook in the Compliance 360 SuiteApp The Personal Information Access Logs workbook can now track actions performed using SuiteFlow. When you initiate a workflow on a record that contains sensitive customer information, this action is added to the access logs. For more information about how SuiteFlow actions are recorded into the access logs, see the help topic Viewing Logs for Actions Performed Using SuiteFlow.

Banking SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 1, 2025.

Following is the 2025.2 banking enhancement to SuiteApps:

Australia Bank Feeds Enhancements
Format Profile Updates
Order Billing Lead Time and Improved Cash Forecasts with Sales and Purchase Orders in Cash 360

Australia Bank Feeds Enhancements

The following are the enhancements to Australia Bank Feeds SuiteApp version 2.0.6:

Changes to Import of Transactions Transactions are imported based on the ID number of the last imported transaction. For example, if your most recent import of transactions has the last ID number of 01002, only subsequent transactions starting at ID 01003 will be included in the next import. This prevents duplicate transactions from being imported. Transactions that have updates or changes, regardless of the ID number, are also imported.
Email Notification for New and Terminated Connections An email notification is now sent for every new and terminated bank feeds connection. For more information, see the help topic Australia Bank Feeds SuiteApp.

Format Profile Updates

and Canada Accounts (MX). This new format profile enables connections to a wider range of financial institutions in the U.S. and Canada. It uses the Account Information Service Provider (AISP), MX Technologies, Inc., which offers secure Open Authorization (OAuth) connections. OAuth provides a more stable connection and reduces the frequencce of re-authentication. Note: This new provider is an alternative way to connect to your bank. Use of this new format profile is optional. For more information, see the help topic Connecting a U.S. or Canada (MX) Financial Institution to NetSuite.

Renamed Format Profile Labels – The following format profiles are renamed: Old Format Profile Name New Format Profile Name U.S. and Canada Accounts U.S. and Canada Accounts (Yodlee)

Regulated Europe Accounts (Preferred) Regulated Europe Accounts (Salt Edge)

Nonregulated Europe Accounts Nonregulated Europe Accounts (Salt Edge)

Old Format Profile Name New Format Profile Name

Accounts in Other Countries Accounts in Other Countries (Salt Edge) Order Billing Lead Time and Improved Cash Forecasts with

Sales and Purchase Orders in Cash 360

Cash 360 SuiteApp version 1.3.3 includes support for order billing lead times and improves cash forecasts

with the inclusion of sales orders and purchase orders. This release enables automatic calculation and display of order billing lead times for sales orders and purchase orders, provides an option for manual entry, and allows you to include and analyze sales and purchase orders in your cash forecasts.

The system automatically calculates the order billing lead time for fully billed and closed sales and purchase order records for the past 12 months, displaying the value in customer and vendor records, respectively.
If there are no customers or vendors with closed sales or purchase orders for a subsidiary, you can manually enter the order billing lead times.
Forecast dates for sales and purchase orders are calculated using the order billing lead time, transaction date, and payment terms.
You can now include sales and purchase orders in cash forecasts, as shown in the Forecast Details table and the Cash 360 dashboard.
You can also now drill down into detailed views of the sales and purchase order included in the cash forecast. For more information, see the help topic Cash 360. Integration SuiteApps

Following are the 2025.2 integration enhancements to SuiteApps:

New NetSuite AI Connector Service Inventory Management SuiteApps

Following are the 2025.2 inventory management enhancements to SuiteApps:

SCM Mobile Enhancements
Quality Management Enhancements SCM Mobile Enhancements

Resyncing Printer Connection

If you use Mobile Printing, you can manually run the scheduled script to resync printers used for labels and documents. In the NetSuite UI, the Resync Printers option enables you to connect to existing and new active printers available in your PrintNode client. You can resolve issues due to disconnected, offline, or inactive printers, without waiting for the script deployment that runs every 15 minutes. For instructions, see the help topic Setting Up Your Printers.

Display of NetSuite Account Details on Mobile Apps

On the Options Menu of a mobile app, you can view your NetSuite account ID and name below the menu links.

Time Entry for Dates

You can now specify the time within mobile processes that display a date on a mobile page. You can select or enter a time in 24-hour UTC format, HH:mm. When you configure or customize a Date page element, you can show or hide the time field. Showing it includes additional settings to make it required and to specify the earliest or latest possible time. For more information, see the help topic Customizing Mobile Page Elements.

Tailored Loading Text for Mobile Actions

For mobile actions of custom processes only, you can specify a static loading text that you want to appear

on the app. Except for the following mobile action types, you can set up loading text for the Click Action of the associated page element: Restlet, Saved Search, and Push to State. For more information, see the help topic Customizing Mobile Actions.

Quality Management Enhancements

In NetSuite 2025.2, Quality Management SuiteApp begins support for the following enhancement:

Alert on Finish Inspection for Missed Inspections
Percentage and Fixed Sample Counts on Statistical Sampling Templates

Alert on Finish Inspection for Missed Inspections

When any inspections are missed in the batch for lot or serial numbered items, and you try to complete the activity by clicking Finish Inspection, the SuiteApp displays an alert message on missed inspections. For more information, see the help topic Alert on Missing Inspections for Lot and Serial Items.

Percentage and Fixed Sample Counts on Statistical Sampling Templates

The Statistical Sampling Template now supports setting up the sample inspection rate in two different ways. Following are the two sample inspection types:

Percentage of Samples: In this method, you can provide a percentage for the total number of samples.
Number of Samples: In this method, you can provide the quantity of samples that needs to be inspected. You now have more flexibility to configure sampling requirements based on your operational or regulatory needs. This ensures better control of inspection planning and aligns with scenarios where a precise number of samples are required instead of a calculated percentage.

For example, using the percentage of samples method, setting the sample rate as 10 generates the

number of samples that equals 10% of the associated quantity. Using the number of samples method, setting the sample rate as 10 generates 10 samples for an inspection. For more information, see the help topics The Statistical Sampling Workflow and Enable sample rate calculation based on sample number:.

Lot Based Statistical Sampling in the QM Parameters

In Quality Management, you can now calculate the sample size for each lot instead of using the total quantity at the queue level. To calculate the sample rate (number or percentage) based on lot-level quantity, check the Enable Lot based Sampling box added in the Lot Based Sampling parameter. For more information, see the help topic Lot Specific Sample Rate Calculation. Item Record Management SuiteApps

Following are the 2025.2 item record management enhancements to SuiteApps:

Lot Auto Numbering Enhancement Lot Auto Numbering Enhancement Define Sequence Number in Item Record for Serial Number

Generation

The Lot Auto Numbering SuiteApp version 2.1.0 now supports sequence numbering to generate serial numbers as per the required needs. The following fields and settings are added to the serial item record to let you configure sequence numbering:

Set Serial Sequence Automatically- Check this box to automatically generate sequence numbering for serial items based on the sequence number order.
Initial Sequence Number- Enter the initial sequence number you want to use for the serial item.
Increase Serial Sequence By- Enter the value you want each new serial number to increase by. For example, enter 1 to increment by one each time or 5 to increment by five for each new serial number.
Last Serial Sequence Number- Shows the last serial number generated for a serial item. For more information, see the help topic Lot and Serial Numbering Subtab.

Localization SuiteApps

This release note was updated August 25, 2025.

Following are the 2025.2 localization enhancements to SuiteApps:

Accounts Receivable Automation for Brazil Banking Integration
Brazil Localization Enhancement
Brazil Reports Enhancements
New DATEV Connector Role SuiteApp
New Denmark Tax Reports
Denmark Tax Reports Enhancements
France Localization Enhancements
Germany Localization Enhancements
Germany Central Bank Reports Enhancements
Japan Consumption Tax Form and Invoice Summary Enhancements
Malaysia Electronic Invoicing Enhancements
North America Electronic Invoicing Now Available
North America Electronic Invoicing Enhancements
Norway Tax Reports Enhancements
Portugal Localization Enhancements
New SAF-T Reporting Framework SuiteApp
SAF-T Reporting Framework SuiteApp Enhancements
Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing Version 6.0.0
US Sales Tax Reports SuiteApp Enhancements Accounts Receivable Automation for Brazil Banking

Integration

In NetSuite 2025.2, Brazil Banking Integration now enables you to receive payments with bank slips and Pix. The SuiteApp eliminates the need to exchange payment files with Banco do Brasil to receive electronic bank payments through these methods. Brazil Banking Integration is only available for installation on authorized accounts. For more information, see the help topic Accounts Receivable Automation for Brazil.

Brazil Localization Enhancement

In NetSuite 2025.2, you are able to choose whether you want to generate bank slip files with Brazil

Localization. Previously, when generating CNAB 400 delivery files with the SuiteApp, NetSuite

automatically generated the bank slips PDF files as well. Now, if you check the Disable Bank Slip Generation box in the bank in Brazil record, the system no longer generates the PDF. For more information, see the help topic Creating Bank Records for Brazil. Brazil Reports Enhancements

Discounts, Shipping Costs, and Expenses in Statutory Reports for Brazil

The following statutory reports for Brazil now include discounts, shipping costs, and expense amounts in their SPED files: Statutory Report Records Fields EFD Contribuições A100, A170 VL_DESC C100, C170, C175, C870 VL_FRT F550 VL_OUT_DA EFD ICMS IPI C100, C170, C800, C850 VL_SEG

D100, D500

For more information about SPED files, see the help topic Available Statutory Reports for Brazil.

Support for the Multi-Book Feature

If the Full Multi-Book Accounting feature is enabled in your account, you can select the accounting book from which to retrieve the transactions for the following reports:

ECD
ECF
EFD Contribuições

New DATEV Connector Role SuiteApp

The DATEV Connector Role SuiteApp version 1.0.0 has been released to the public. The DATEV Connector Role SuiteApp creates a role supporting data exchange between NetSuite and

DATEV through Digitastic DATEV Connector. The key benefits include:

Role supporting bidirectional data transfer between NetSuite and DATEV
Automated role setup
Effortless Digitastic DATEV Connector setup For more information, see the help topic DATEV Connector Role.

New Denmark Tax Reports

The Denmark Tax Reports SuiteApp version 1.0.0 has been released to the public. Denmark Tax Report lets you generate the Denmark Standard Audit File for Tax (SAF-T) report.

SAF-T (Standard Audit File for Tax) is an international standard format for exchanging electronic

accounting data, developed by the OECD (Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development). It is designed to facilitate efficient tax audits and ensure compliance with local tax regulations.

Effective January 1 2025, the new requirements apply to businesses operating in Denmark, mandating the

submission of SAF-T files as part of regular tax reporting. Denmark's SAF-T follows the OECD SAF-T version 2.0 standard. You can download the Denmark Tax Reports from the SuiteApp Marketplace. It is only available for accounts without SuiteTax. You can generate the Denmark SAF-T report through Country Tax Reports. For more information, see the help topic Denmark Tax Reports

Denmark Tax Reports Enhancements

The new version of Denmark Tax Reports, 1.2.0, has been updated to be compatible with the new version of SAF-T Reporting Framework SuiteApp Enhancements. The following features and enhancements have been implemented in version 1.1.0 of Denmark Tax

Reports:

Discount Support – Discounts are now supported in Sales Invoice lines and GL Entries. The Settlement node in payments will display the total discount amount, except in cases where the discount equals the payment amount. In this case the payment will show no lines.
Payment Section – A payment section has been addedd to the SAF-T report.
Error Messages – New error messages have been implemented for the GL accounts section, GL entries section, and the Company Registration Number and Company Tax Registration Number fields.
SAF-T Format Validations – New validations for some fields have been implemented to ensure they are in the correct SAF-T format. This allows submission of a complete file to the Danish Business Authority.
Text Field Trimming – Text fields that exceed the character limit will be automatically trimmed in the SAF-T report, preventing potential errors.

France Localization Enhancements

This update improves performance of the FEC Generation.

EcritureLib Field Update The value of the EcritureLib field is now automatically set to Transaction type, transaction number, and the entry in the Memo field (from the Primary Information subtab) for all transactions.
Mass Update Script for Transactions A new Mass Update script has been added to efficiently update the EcritureLib field on a selected subset of transactions. Transactions to update can be selected using search criteria.
Dynamic Period End Journals Generating Adjustment In this version, the option for including the closing income statement entries in the FEC file has been removed. For more information, see the help topic France Localization.

Germany Localization Enhancements

In this version, the GoBD Data Extract includes a new Fixed Assets report file. To generate the Fixed Assets report file, you must have the Fixed Assets Management SuiteApp installed in your account. This update optimizes the GoBD Data Extract report generation process to ensure reliable completion, even with large data volumes. The report generation now takes longer, but you can generate comprehensive reports with improved stability and without risk of crashes or interruptions. For more information, see the help topic Germany Localization.

Germany Central Bank Reports Enhancements

In this version, the reporting threshold for service-related payments has increased from €12,500 to €50,000. For more information, see the help topic Germany Central Bank Reports. Japan Consumption Tax Form and Invoice Summary

Enhancements

The Consumption Tax Form now supports compliance to the format prescribed in the Qualified Invoice

System:

The options for printing the Consumption Tax Form are renamed: ▬ Print All is renamed to Print Including Previous Rate – Selecting this option displays or prints Tables 1, 2, 1-1, 1-2, 2-1 and 2-2 in the tax form. ▬ Print New Tax Rates is renamed to Print Current Standard Rate and Reduced Rate Only – The default option. Selecting this option displays or prints Tables 1 and 2, and the new Tables 1-3 and 2-3 in the tax form. If you have a OneWorld account, you can access the renamed print options on a Japan subsidiary.

On the Japan Localization Setup subtab, under Invoice Summary, click Consumption Tax Form

Print Option. For accounts without OneWorld, go to Setup > Company > Company Information and access the options on the Japan Localization Setup subtab. For more information, see the help topic Setting Print Option for Japan Consumption Tax Form.

The Consumption Tax Form now includes two new tables, Table 1-3 and Table 2-3. You can include these tables when you print the Consumption Tax Form by selecting the print option Print Current Standard Rate and Reduced Rate Only. For more information, see the help topics Roles for Setting Up Japan Consumption Tax, Japan Consumption Tax Overview, and What goes into each box – Japan Consumption Tax Form.
New tax classifications are available on the tax code, which you can view in Setup > Accounting > Tax Code > Tax Classification: ▬ Consumption Tax 10% 非非非非非非非非非非非非非非非10% (非非) ▬ Consumption Tax 8% 非非非非非非非非非非非非非非非 8%(非非) ▬ Consumption Tax 3% 非非非非非非非非非非非非非非非 3%(非) ▬ Consumption Tax 5% 非非非非非非非非非非非非非非非 5%(非) ▬ Consumption Tax 8% 非非非非非非非非非非非非非非非 8%(非) For more information, see the help topic Tax Classifications for Japan.
Deleting an Invoice Summary You can now delete invoice summaries even if the accounting period is closed, provided that it has no AR adjustment or is not linked to an AR adjustment. For more information, see the help topic Deleting an Invoice Summary and Reversing its AR Adjustment Item. By default, only the Administrator, Accountant, and CFO roles can delete an invoice summary. The administrator can grant more roles the permission to delete an invoice summary, with the following steps:

Go to Customization > Scripting > Script Deployments.
Edit the script deployment with ID: customdeploy_japan_loc_invsummary_ue.
On the Audience subtab, select the roles you want to assign the permission. For more information, see the help topic Granting Permission to Delete Invoice Summaries. Malaysia Electronic Invoicing Enhancements Malaysia Electronic Invoicing Version 1.6.0

Support for Withholding Tax

Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp version 1.6.0 now supports Withholding Tax. The generated e-

documents will exclude any information related to withholding tax in compliance with IRBM. Note: Withholding tax is not supported for consolidated invoices.

Support for Expense Details for Self-billed Transactions

The SuiteApp version 1.6.0 includes expense details when generating e-documents for the following self- billed transaction types:

Self-billed Invoice
Self-billed Credit Memo
Self-billed Debit Note

MyInvois Compliance Update for Phone Number Format

MyInvois e-Invoicing has revised the validation for phone number format according to the E.164: The international public telecommunication numbering plan compliance standard.. The Malaysia country’s phone number you add in your subsidiary record must start with the country code +60 to meet this compliance standard. For example: +60 123456789

Enhanced Error Messaging

Error messages displayed when generating e-documents are now more descriptive, making it easier to identify and resolve issues. Malaysia Electronic Invoicing Version 1.7.0

Enhanced Certified PDF Details

Certified PDF now includes issued date and time and submission date and time information provided by Avalara.

Support for Zero Quantity Items

You can now add zero quantity items in all the transactions supported by Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp.

Removal of Malaysia Reference Number Validation

The validation check for the Malaysia reference number in self-billed transactions is now removed.

Support for Only Expenses in Self Billed Transactions

You can now create self-billed transactions containing only expenses without any items. Malaysia Electronic Invoicing Version 1.8.0

Support for SuiteTax Accounts

The Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp now supports SuiteTax accounts

Ability to Store Malaysia TIN Number

A new Malaysia TIN Number field is now added to the subsidiary record to store the TIN number.

Bug Fixes and Optimizations

This release includes various fixes and performance improvements to enhance the overall user experience.
Error messages displayed when generating e-documents are now more descriptive, enabling quicker identification and resolution of issues. For more information, see the help topic Malaysia Electronic Invoicing.

North America Electronic Invoicing Now Available

North America Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp version 1.0.0 is now available for installation as a managed

SuiteApp. You can install the North America Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp from the NetSuite SuiteApp Marketplace. The North America Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp helps NetSuite users in North America with exchange of electronic documents between suppliers and buyers (e-documents) for invoice transaction. E-documents are exchanged on the Digital Business Network Alliance (DBNA) network through Avalara access using the North America Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp. For more information about North America Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp, see the help topic North America Electronic Invoicing.

North America Electronic Invoicing Enhancements

North America Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp version 1.1.0 has the following enhancements:

Support for Outbound Credit Memo Transactions
Support for Legacy Tax Accounts
Bug Fixes and Optimizations

Support for Outbound Credit Memo Transactions

The North America Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp now supports generating and sending of outbound credit memos.

Support for Legacy Tax Accounts

The SuiteApp now supports the accounts that have legacy tax for invoice and credit memo transactions.

Bug Fixes and Optimizations

This release includes various fixes and performance improvements to enhance the overall user experience. For more information about these enhancements, see the help topic North America Electronic Invoicing.

Norway Tax Reports Enhancements

The following features and enhancements have been implemented in version 1.15.0 of Norway Tax

Reports:

Norway SAF-T Compliance Update: The SAF-T report has been updated to align with the latest technical requirements from the Norwegian Tax Authority (Skatteetaten) and is now compatible with version 1.30 of the SAF-T specification.
Standard Chart of Accounts Mapping Removed: The option to map General Ledger accounts to the Standard Chart of Accounts has been removed, as this type of mapping is no longer accepted by the Skatteetaten. Instead, mapping to the business (income) statement using Grouping Code and Grouping Category is supported.
New Mapping Category: A new custom TAF Mapping Category called "NO-SAFT: Income Statement 1.30" has been added to support Norway SAF-T version 1.30. This category includes the updated official list of Grouping Codes and Grouping Categories compliant with version 1.30. You need to remap your GL accounts within this new category to produce a compliant report.
Enhanced Masterfile Structure: A new Balance Account Structure has been introduced OpeningDebitBalance/OpeningCreditBalance and ClosingDebitBalance/ClosingCreditBalance.
Existing Elements Replaced: In the Tax Information Structure, the Tax Amount element is replaced with Debit Tax Amount and Credit Tax Amount.

Portugal Localization Enhancements

new certification step, updating the previous process. The Document Series field is no longer required when creating a transaction, but it is required for transaction finalization. Before you start finalizing your Portugal transactions, see the help topic Portugal Transaction Finalization.

Automatic Finalization of Portugal Transactions: This version introduces a new Auto-Finalize

Transaction box on the Portugal Transaction subtab, which is checked by default. If you leave the box

checked, every transaction will be automatically finalized upon creation. If you clear the box, you must click the Finalize button on the transaction record to complete its certification.

Locking of Finalized Transactions: After you finalize one of the following transaction types, it is locked and you can no longer edit it: Sales Order, Invoice, Credit Memo, Customer Payment, Cash Sale, and Cash Refund. If you try to edit a locked transaction, you will be redirected to the view-only page.
Introduction of the Transaction Code Field: This version introduces a new Transaction Code field on the Portugal Document Series page. When you create a document series, the new Transaction Code field will be automatically filled after you select the transaction type. There is a default code for each transaction type, but some types allow you to change it.

While the field is not required by default, it must be filled when creating or editing a document series

that was not used for certification, or when doing so via script. For the document series created before this implementation, this field is left blank. However, if you edit any such document series in the future, the Transaction Code will be automatically filled for you. The new Transaction Code field is also used for generating the Portugal Transaction ID, QR codes, and Portugal SAF-T reports, ensuring all outputs reflect the correct transaction type as required by Portugal regulations. For more information about these enhancements in the Help Center, see the help topic Portugal Localization.

New SAF-T Reporting Framework SuiteApp

The SAF-T Reporting FrameworkSuiteApp version 1.0.0 has been released to the public. The SuiteApp provides a base for generating SAF-T version 2.0 reports. It works together with country-specific localization SuiteApps that build onto the framework to generate reports that are compliant in their respective countries. The key features of the SAF-T Reporting Framework SuiteApp version 1.0.0 include:

Generation of the SAF-T version 2.0 reports in accounts without SuiteTax
Provision of the default structure of the SAF-T version 2.0 reports
Provision of extensibility and modification of the generated default data
Configuration of the generated report
Compliance with the current requirements for computer-generated SAF-T version 2.0 reports as defined by the OECD SAF-T Reporting Framework SuiteApp Enhancements discounts.
Inclusion of Payments in SAF-T Reports – In this version, the generated SAF-T reports include payments. You can find payment information in the SourceDocuments node of your generated XML file.
Introduction of Danish Translation of the SuiteApp – In this version, the SAF-T Reporting Framework SuiteApp is also be available in Danish. (currently only available for Denmark):
SuiteTax support – SuiteTax accounts are now supported in SAF-T Reporting Framework.
Tax Registration Number reporting – In SuiteTax accounts, Tax Registration Number is now sourced from the Tax Registration subtab. To generate the report successfully, the entire reporting period must be covered by a single tax registration number from the start to the end of the period.
Tax Code reporting – The reporting of tax codes has been configured to comply with the Denmark

Tax Authority requirements that allows only one tax rate per a tax code. Therefore, in SuiteTax

accounts, if a tax code has multiple tax rates within the reporting period, the report will show only the tax rate that was valid on the start date of the report.

Version 1.3.0 of the SAF-T Reporting FrameworkSuiteApp introduces technical enhancements that

improve the handling of unmatched double quotes in CSV files, increasing the robustness of the parser. These improvements reduce parsing errors and ensure more reliable and accurate data processing. For more information, see the help topic SAF-T Reporting Framework. Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing Version 6.0.0

Removal of EInvoice.SG Access Point

The Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing SuiteApp version 6.0.0 removes support for eInvoice.sg access point and its relevant templates for customer and vendor accounts. The eInvoice.sg access point registration method, access point details, and eInvoice.sg templates in the e-document templates list are removed. To exchange e-documents with your Singapore customers and vendors using the SuiteApp, you must register your company with another access point (DataPost) available in the SuiteApp to ensure uninterrupted services. For more information, see the help topic Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing.

Southeast Asia Localization Enhancements

In NetSuite 2025.2, updates to the Southeast Asia Localization SuiteApp version 7.1.0 include the following:

Non-VAT Sales Invoice Template
Philippines Discount Classification for Sales Transactions
Warning Message for Transactions with Withholding Tax and Line-Item Discounts Non-VAT Sales Invoice Template

Non-VAT taxpayers can now:

Create and print non-VAT sales invoices for transactions that include both tax-exempt items and items subject to percentage tax.
Define a tax code as percentage tax for more detailed sales breakdown and reporting. For more information, see the help topics BIR-Required Details and Creating a Percentage Tax Code.

Philippines Discount Classification for Sales Transactions

You can now create discount items for the following discount types in Philippines sales transactions:

Senior Citizen
Person With Disability
National Athlete
Medal of Valor Recipient
Solo Parent For more information, see the help topic Creating Discount Items for Philippines Invoicing. Warning Message for Transactions with Withholding Tax and Line-Item

Discounts

NetSuite displays a warning message if you try to save a transaction that includes both withholding tax

and line-item discounts. Combining withholding tax and line-item discounts can cause calculation conflicts in a transaction and may result in incorrect totals. When you see this warning message, carefully review your transaction’s line items. Adjust either the withholding tax or the discounts to resolve or avoid probable calculation issues before saving. For more information, see the help topic Discount Details.

US Sales Tax Reports SuiteApp Enhancements

The Tax Item column in the Sales Tax Liability by Tax Item report is removed. Instead, the

Jurisdiction Level and Tax Authority columns are now added in the Sales Tax Liability by Tax

Item report. The column values are now retrieved from the Imposing Tax Authority Level and Imposing Authority Name fields on the tax code record.

In this version of the SuiteApp, the liabilities on this report are grouped by the imposing tax agency. This enhancement applies to credit memos, cash sales, cash refund, and invoice transactions.
Changes to Sales Tax Liability by Tax Agency Report:
- The Tax Agency column value is retrieved from the Reporting Tax Authority Name field on the tax code record. This enhancement applies to credit memos, cash sales, cash refund, and invoice transactions.
- In this version of the SuiteApp, the liabilities on this report are grouped by reporting tax authority name.

Manufacturing SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 22, 2025.

Following are the 2025.2 manufacturing enhancements to SuiteApps:

Manufacturing Mobile Enhancements
Manufacturing Task Scheduler Moving to a New SuiteApp

Manufacturing Mobile Enhancements

In NetSuite 2025.2 Manufacturing Mobile SuiteApp begins support for the following enhancements

Automatically Generate New Serial Numbers for Serial Items

Automatically Generate New Serial Numbers for Serial Items

In NetSuite 2025.2, the Manufacturing Mobile SuiteApp begins support for automatic generation of new serial numbers for serial items. To use this capability, you must have the Lot Auto Numbering SuiteApp installed in your account and check the Enable Auto Serial Numbering preference in the Manufacturing Mobile > Preferences > Mfg Mobile - Preferences page. For more information, see the Manufacturing Mobile Preferences.

Manufacturing Task Scheduler Moving to a New SuiteApp

This change applies only to the Manufacturing Task Scheduler feature within the Supply Chain Management SuiteApp and introduces the new Manufacturing Scheduler SuiteApp.

Access to Manufacturing Task Scheduler is being updated. The feature will be removed from the Supply

Chain Management SuiteApp and is now available as a new SuiteApp named Manufacturing Scheduler

SuiteApp. No other features in the Supply Chain Management SuiteApp are changing. The Manufacturing Task Scheduler feature within the Supply Chain Management SuiteApp will remain available through October 7, 2025. After that date, all roles and views will be permanently deleted. To avoid losing important information, migrate your existing roles and views to the new SuiteApp before October 7, 2025. For more information, see the help topics Creating or Customizing Roles and Permissions to Use Manufacturing Scheduler and Operation View.

Installing the Manufacturing Scheduler SuiteApp before October 7, 2025 helps ensure continuity of the

functionality and provides access to ongoing fixes and enhancements. For more information, see the help topic Installing Manufacturing Scheduler. If the Manufacturing Scheduler SuiteApp is not installed after October 7, 2025, you won't be able to access the Manufacturing Task Scheduler feature. For installation steps and details, see the help topic Manufacturing Scheduler.

Order Management SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 8, 2025.

Following are the 2025.2 order management enhancements to SuiteApps:

NetSuite Ship Central Enhancements
Electronic Invoicing Enhancements
NetSuite Electronic Business Enhancements
SaaS 360 Dashboard NetSuite Ship Central Enhancements packed cartons rule:

Printing Pallet Labels and Documents

On the app, you can now print pallet labels and documents outside of the pallet transfer process flow. If

you don't use PrintNode integration, you can save and access soft copies from your file cabinet. For more information, see the help topic Printing Multiple Packing Labels and Documents. To activate the system rule for pallets, see the help topic Configuring Ship Central Rules.

Scheduling Pickups with Carriers of your Shipments

The Options Menu on the app now includes the Schedule Pickups and Manage Pickups links. You can search for multiple shipping labels, and then specify the contact details, date, and time of your pickup. You can also manage existing confirmed pickups by reviewing the details or canceling them.

Generating Return Labels from an RMA

Through the NetSuite UI, when you create customer returns from an order, you can generate return

labels and send them via email. You can generate return labels whether or not you use the app to ship the orders. Orders for the return must use a shipping method associated with a Ship Central shipping item. If you change the shipping method for the return, the one you select must also be associated with a Ship Central shipping item. You cannot generate labels for standalone returns through Ship Central. You can void labels that have not been used to return ordered items. If you delete an RMA, Ship Central voids associated return labels automatically. It sends email notifications for either or both cases.

Bulk Generation of Shipping Labels

If you enable Mobile Printing, you can generate labels and documents for multiple packed orders that you want to process for shipping. After you print or save them, the app updates the associated fulfillments to Shipped status. This option doesn't include additional capabilities that you enable for the shipping process flow on the app. Also, you can generate bulk labels for sales orders only.

Address Validation Setting on the App

On the app, you can change the default address validation preference for specific shipments before you print a label. For more information about standard address validation, see the help topic Shipping Address Validation.

No Tax and Importer of Record Options for Charge Tax To Field

On the Ship Central Preferences record, you can now select Importer of Record in the Charge Tax To

field for international shipments. If you have no tax identifiers to apply to your shipment, you can select No tax instead. With this option, verify with your carrier if they can accept the package.

Your default setting applies to all associated shipments, but you can change it for specific ones on the

app. For more information, see the help topic Tax Setup for International Shipments. For more information about the new shipping capabilities, see the help topic Ship Central Shipping. Electronic Invoicing Enhancements

Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp includes enhancements for the following versions:

Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Version 9.10.0 Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Version 9.10.0

License Check for Custom Transaction Types

The SuiteApp now performs Electronic Invoicing license checks when generating, certifying, and sending e-documents for custom transaction types. Note: License checks for these actions are already in place for standard transactions (such as invoices). Now, custom transaction types will have the same license checks. If you use custom transactions for the same subsidiary as standard transactions, this change does not affect the processing of custom transaction types.

Support for Generation and Sending Transaction Responses

The SuiteApp now supports generating and sending new transaction response types from a transaction response record to third-party systems such as Avalara through OBN or the transaction response sending method. The new response types are:

Request Further Objection
Continue Generation The SuiteApp also supports sending of the Acknowledged transaction response type to Avalara.

Volumetric Check for Transaction Responses Sent to Avalara

Starting this version, to send transaction response content to Avalara, you must have sufficient license volume (number of licenses) and an active Avalara Processing for NetSuite Electronic Invoicing Cloud Service license. Note: This check applies only if you use Avalara services for Electronic Invoicing.

Builder Kit Functionality

Builder Kit, enables you to meet the e-invoicing compliance requirements in countries supported by

Avalara, where NetSuite does not currently provide localization support. Builder Kit provides sample

outbound and inbound templates, along with default data sourcing plugin implementations which can be customized using SuiteScript. Note: To use Builder Kit, you must purchase both the NetSuite Electronic Business and Avalara Processing for NetSuite Electronic Invoicing licenses. Prerequisite skill sets are also required. For more information, see the help topic Electronic Invoicing Builder Kit.

NetSuite Electronic Business Enhancements

NetSuite Electronic Business SuiteApp includes enhancements for the following versions:

NetSuite Electronic Business SuiteApp Version 1.4.0 NetSuite Electronic Business SuiteApp Version 1.4.0

Sandbox Refresh

Starting this release, the SuiteApp supports sandbox refresh activities, enhancing your ability to replicate and validate configurations in test environment. This support is not limited to Avalara E-Invoicing, and you can leverage sandbox refresh for SuiteProcurement. Note: You need to perform additional steps to test Electronic Invoicing after a sandbox refresh

Avalara Provisioning and Company Creation in Sandbox

You will now be able to access Avalara Provisioning and Company Creation features directly in your

NetSuite sandbox environment. You can go to Avalara Provisioning to perform provisioning or view

Avalara provisioning details. And you can use Avalara Company Creation to establish a company in the Avalara sandbox or review company information.

SaaS 360 Dashboard

The SaaS 360 SuiteApp is not yet available.

SuitePeople SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 1, 2025.

Following are the 2025.2 SuitePeople enhancements to SuiteApps:

Support for Delaware Paid Family and Medical Leave Employee Reclassification
SuitePeople Workforce Management Enhancements Support for Delaware Paid Family and Medical Leave Employee

Reclassification

SuitePeople U.S. Payroll now supports the reclassification of employees for Delaware’s Paid Family and

Medical Leave (PFML) program. Under Delaware’s PFML requirements, eligible employees can participate and contribute even if they earn wages outside the state. To support this change, the Payroll Compliance SuiteApp version 1.01 introduces the Reclassify for

Paid Family and Medical Leave box on the employee record under the Payroll subtab. Check this box

for employees who meet Delaware PFML eligibility criteria and have out-of-state wages that should be reported as subject wages for the Delaware PFML fund. This enhancement also supports both in-state and out-of-state wage reporting for employees performing services in Delaware and other states, ensuring compliance with agency requirements. For more information, see the help topic Paid Family and Medical Leave Contributions for Employees.

SuitePeople Workforce Management Enhancements

As of 2025.2, the following enhancements are available with the SuitePeople Workforce Management (WFM) SuiteApp:

Enhanced Timesheets Using WFM Wage Rules
Workforce Management Updates to Automatch and Windows Time Clock Settings
Workforce Management Updates to Automatch and Windows Time Clock Settings

Enhanced Timesheets Using WFM Wage Rules

WFM customers can use the Enhanced Timesheets Using WFM Wage Rules feature to view automatic

calculations of regular and overtime hours and configure time entry options on weekly timesheets. The feature minimizes the need for manual entry and streamlines payroll processing for employees. It is available for accounts where:

The SuitePeople Workforce Management SuiteApp is installed.
The New Weekly Timesheets Interface feature is enabled.
SuitePeople U.S. Payroll is part of the implementation.
- Require employees to enter times on new weekly timesheets
- Set default shift values so employees only need to enter times when they differ
Changes to the New Weekly Timesheets Interface – Expect the following:
- Employees can enter time using the new fields: Shift Start Time, Shift End Time, Break Start Time, and Break End Time.
- When entering hours manually, employees can see the breakdown and total counts of regular and overtime hours in the Hours Breakdown section.
- When approving time entries on Weekly Timesheets, managers can also see the breakdown of regular and overtime hours for each employee. For more information, including UI changes related to the feature, see Enhanced Timesheets Using WFM Wage Rules. Performance and Security Updates and Upcoming Automatic Update for the Workforce Management Mobile App The NetSuite Workforce Management mobile app version 2.8.0 is now available in for WFM customers in Google Play and Apple App stores. This upgrade introduces bug fixes, performance improvements, and security updates. Also, starting August 5, 2025, the WFM apps that are not using the latest version will automatically be updated. To safely upgrade to version 2.8.0 and avoid interruptions later, complete the required action before August 5, 2025. For more information, see Action Required: Upcoming SuitePeople Workforce Management Mobile App Version Release and Automatic Update (SuiteAnswers ID 1020938). Workforce Management Updates to Automatch and Windows Time

Clock Settings

The following enhancements are available to SuitePeople WFM customers through the WFM SuiteApp and the stand-alone website, see.adiinsights.com:

Paid Break Option in Automatch Settings
Installer Hash for Windows Time Clock Paid Break Option in Automatch Settings location approvals or bulk approvals:
Expanded break options
- Settings that are shown in the Break section are moved to the new Unpaid Meal Break section.
- A new Paid Rest Break section is added to the automatch settings.
Paid rest break handling
- The Paid Rest Break section includes the Treat paid rest breaks as time worked option. When checked, this setting allows employees to include timesheets with paid rest breaks in automatic approvals.
- Only timesheets that meet all the criteria set on the Automatch and rounding settings page are approved.
- If rounding is enabled, managers may need to manually approve a shift with a paid rest break, depending on the break conditions.

Installer Hash for Windows Time Clock

With this update, customers downloading the Windows Time Clock can now view the installer hash code in the download window. You can use this code to verify the validity of the installer and ensure that you are downloading a secure file. For more information, refer to the following help topics:

Automatch and Rounding Settings in WFM
Approving Shifts with Automatch
Installing SuitePeople Time Clock Components for Windows Taxation SuiteApps Following are the 2025.2 taxation enhancements to SuiteApps:

SuiteTax SuiteApps

US Statewide Item Tax Exceptions

Legacy Tax SuiteApps

Withholding Tax Enhancements SuiteTax SuiteApps

US Statewide Item Tax Exceptions

The SuiteTax Engine (STE) SuiteApp version 2.00.73 lets you create an exception from the general taxation for the relevant items in US nexuses. With this update, you will be able to do the following:

define specific taxation for respective items that will apply in the defined nexus
set a limited validity period for your taxation exceptions. To do this, you must indicate the "Valid From" and/ or "Valid Until" date. The created exception is automatically considered during the tax determination. The suggested taxes are then automatically applied. Previously, items in the US were either taxed as the general tangible property or you could mark your items as exempt. For more information about this feature, see the help topic Setting up US Item Tax Exceptions Legacy Tax SuiteApps

Withholding Tax Enhancements

To meet an EOPT compliance requirement, Withholding Tax SuiteApp version 1.49.0 now includes journal entries that reflect accruals in the following reports:

Certificate of Creditable Tax Withheld at Source (2307)
Monthly Remittance Form of Creditable Income Taxes Withheld (Expanded) (0619-E)
Quarterly Remittance Return of Creditable Income Taxes Withheld (Expanded) (1601-EQ)
Summary Alphalist of Withholding Tax Agents/Payors of Income Payments subjected to Creditable

Withholding Tax at Source (SAWT)

Annual Alphalist of Payees (1604E)
Quarterly Alphalist of Payees (QAP) or Monthly Alphalist of Payees (MAP) A new custom journal form, named PH WHTax Form, provides the necessary fields for including journal entries in withholding tax reports. For instructions, refer to Specifying Withholding Tax Settings for Journal Entries.

SuiteApps Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteApp distribution includes SuiteBundler, SuiteApp Marketplace, and SuiteApp Control Center capabilities that you can use to distribute customizations to accounts.

Bundle Support During Release Phasing

Bundle support during phasing of 2025.2 is consistent with the support provided during previous

releases. During phasing of 2025.2, some accounts continue to use 2025.1 at the same time that other accounts are upgraded to 2025.2. Therefore, you may be using a different version than some of the accounts where your bundles are installed. Review the following descriptions for a reminder of how bundles from different versions are handled during release phasing:

Bundles developed with 2025.1 can be installed in accounts that are already using 2025.2.
Bundles developed with 2025.2 can be installed in accounts that are still using 2025.1, but with the following limitations:
- When a user in a 2025.1 account installs a bundle from a 2025.2 account, the bundle installation stops if there are object types in the bundle that are not supported in 2025.2.
- A bundle with a script that uses a new API available only in 2025.2 can be installed into a 2025.1 account, but the script may not function correctly because 2025.1 does not support the API.

SuiteBuilder Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Apply Custom Segments to Custom Records with

Classification Filtering

The behavior of custom segments on custom record instances has changed. You can now apply custom segments to custom records and standard records when you select filtering by classification. Classifications include class, department, location, and subsidiary. This enhancement makes it easier to use custom segments because it supports more flexible filtering options. This change is automatic and you don't have to configure anything. The filtering settings are based on the existing Filtered by field in the main section of the Custom Segments configuration page. Previously, when filtering by classification, custom segments could be applied only to standard records, but not custom records. With this change, you can now apply custom segments to custom record types, custom segments, and standard records, even when filtering by classification is selected. A new read-only column has been added to the Custom Segment configuration page. The Filter By column displays the custom segment filter that is applied to the custom record instance. For more information about custom segments and filtering, see the help topics Setting Up Filtering for a Custom Segment and Filtering Segments by Class, Department, Location, or Subsidiary.

SuiteCloud Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF) is a development framework and deployment mechanism.

Customers and partners can use SDF to create customization projects for internal use within their

organizations or for commercial distribution. For more information about SDF, see the help topic SuiteCloud Development Framework. For a complete list of custom records and customizations that are supported by SDF, see the help topic Customizations Supported by SuiteCloud Development Framework. This release note was updated September 15, 2025. Accelerate Your Development with NetSuite Developer

Resources

We're excited to announce the launch of the NetSuite Developer Resources hub, which helps NetSuite

developers extend NetSuite with a range of tools and technologies. The hub is full of helpful resources, like links to code samples and detailed help topics, so you can get the most out of SuiteScript, SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF), REST APIs, and more. The NetSuite Developer Resources hub is organized into several key sections, each tailored to a specific aspect of NetSuite development:

Get Started – This section provides essential information for new developers, including setup instructions for a developer environment and basic information about getting started with NetSuite.
Learn – Here, you'll find "Hello World" samples and tutorials that demonstrate the fundamentals of scripting with SuiteScript and building extensions with SuiteCommerce. It's perfect for those looking to get hands-on experience with these features.
Develop – This section delves into the various ways to develop for NetSuite, covering SuiteScript, SDF, REST integration, SuiteAnalytics, and SuiteCommerce, offering a deep dive into the tools and technologies available.
Low and No Code – Designed with non-developers in mind, this section explores ways to customize NetSuite with minimal coding required. A highlight of the NetSuite Developer Resources hub is the Code Samples area, which lets you explore code samples and get ideas for your own applications. You can browse and filter samples by script type, difficulty level, sample type, and SuiteScript module. You can also visit a dedicated GitLab repository with full code samples that include unit tests and SDF project structuring. To access the hub, visit NetSuite Developer Resources.

New Copy to Account Enhancements

You can now copy custom objects and their dependencies to another account without restriction. Previously, referencing Translation Collections would block the Copy to Account process. Copy to Account now gives more detailed, actionable error and warning messages to improve the troubleshooting experience. With this update:

Error messages provide more details about the issue and solution.
Error messages appear in a red pop-up for better visibility.
The Next button is disabled until the error is resolved.
A warning will appear during the Fetch Dependencies step if any objects reference a Translation

Collection. This warning lets you know that the TC strings will not be copied and only the default string

will be transferred. Any additional translation strings must be manually added if needed.

Support for Custom Transaction Type Locking

SDF now supports deploying locked custom transaction types. Prior to this update, deploying with or

updating locked custom transaction types would result in deployment errors. This update allows you to lock custom transaction types and in SDF projects and deploy without error.

New parentrolescriptid attribute for custom roles in SDF

When using SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF) to create a custom role, you must now include the new parentrolescriptid attribute in the role definition file. The change to require the parentrolescriptid attribute supports parent-child relationships between roles in SuiteApp deployments. The parentrolescriptid attribute represents the script ID of the standard role the new role is based on. You can add the parentrolescriptid attribute in the customrole XML file as part of your SDF project. For more information, see the help topic Custom Roles as XML Definitions

New SDF Custom Object for Custom Tools

The SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF) now supports the tool custom object, which enables you to define custom tool scripts as part of your SuiteCloud projects. Custom tool scripts let you build NetSuite tools, which external AI clients can invoke through the NetSuite AI Connector Service using the

Model Context Protocol (MCP)

For more information, see the Custom Tool Scripts as XML Definitions.

SuiteCloud SDK Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteCloud Software Development Kit (SuiteCloud SDK) is a set of tools you can use to develop SuiteCloud

projects. These tools are the SuiteCloud IDE plug-ins and extensions, and the command-line interfaces. 2025.2 SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js Is Now Available SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js is now available for download. For more information, see the help topic Installing SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js. SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code Is Not

Included in This Release Cycle

This year, SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code is not part of the August release. Check this space for further announcements.

SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm Is Not Included in

This Release Cycle This year, SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm is not part of the August release. Check this space for further announcements. SuiteCloud CLI for Java Is Not Included in This Release

Cycle

This year, SuiteCloud CLI for Java is not part of the August release. Check this space for further announcements.

SuiteScript Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated September 15, 2025. Refer to the following sections for details on SuiteScript updates for NetSuite 2025.2:

New NetSuite AI Connector Service
NetSuite Developer Resources
New N/machineTranslation Module
New Type Supported for Signer.update(options) Parameter
2025.2 SuiteScript Record Exposures

New NetSuite AI Connector Service

Starting August 2025, you can connect your NetSuite account to an external AI client using the NetSuite

AI Connector Service. You can use this integration to:

Invoke the tools from the AI client using natural language prompts
Build AI tools with the custom tool script type
Deploy these tools to your NetSuite account using SuiteCloud projects and SDF You can find sample implementations of custom tools in the MCP-Sample-Tools directory of the SuiteCloud Project Repository on Oracle Samples GitHub. For more information, see:
NetSuite AI Connector Service
SuiteScript 2.1 Custom Tool Script Type
Creating Custom Tools for the NetSuite AI Connector Service

NetSuite Developer Resources

We're excited to announce the launch of the NetSuite Developer Resources hub, which helps NetSuite

developers extend NetSuite with a range of tools and technologies. To learn more, see Accelerate Your Development with NetSuite Developer Resources.

New N/machineTranslation Module

The N/machineTranslation module lets you translate documents into other languages using SuiteScript. You can provide a set of documents, and the module sends a request to the Oracle Cloud Infrastructure (OCI) Language service and returns the translated documents for you to use in your scripts. For more information about this service, see Language in the OCI documentation. the language of the document, or you can let the module detect the language automatically based on the content of the document. For more information, see the help topic N/machineTranslation Module.

New Type Supported for Signer.update(options) Parameter

The Signer.update(options) method in N/crypto/certificate Module now accepts https.SecureString as value for the options.input parameter. For more information, see the help topic Signer.update(options). 2025.2 SuiteScript Record Exposures Record Type Newly Exposed or Notes

Updated

Budget Category Newly exposed The Budget Category record is available when the Multiple Budgets feature is enabled. The Budget Category record is scriptable in both client and server SuiteScript. The Budget Category record is fully scriptable. It can be created, read, updated, deleted, and searched using SuiteScript.

SuiteTalk Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

New REST GovernanceLimits Operation

With the new REST governanceLimits operation, you can check the available concurrency limit for a specific integration. The information returned by this operation includes the account concurrency limit, the unallocated concurrency limit, and the limit type (integrationSpecific, accountLimit, or internal). This operation helps you avoid exceeding the number of available threads that send requests to NetSuite. This operation returns results only if you're logged in as an administrator. Learn more about the GovernanceLimits Operation.

New REST ServerTime Operation

With the new REST serverTime operation, you can check the NetSuite server time in UTC, regardless of your user time zone. With this operation, when you write synchronization procedures, you don't have to rely on client time, which may not be synchronized with the NetSuite server time. Any user can call this operation. Learn more about the ServerTime Operation.

REST Web Services Supported Records in 2025.2

In 2025.2, the following records became fully supported in REST web services.

Record Type Notes

Analytical Impact For working with this record, you must enable the SaaS Metrics feature. Budget Category Budget categories are available only when the Multiple Budgets feature is enabled. Multiple Budgets are on the Enable Features page at Setup > Company > Setup Tasks > Enable Features (Administrator). Gift Certificate Before you work with gift certificates, you must enable the Gift Certificates feature. HCM Job For working with this record, you must enable the Job Management feature. Impact Subcategory For working with this record, you must enable the SaaS Metrics feature. Payroll Item For working with this record, you must enable the Payroll feature. Period End Journal Entry The Period End Journal Entry feature is only available in NetSuite OneWorld accounts. You must enable the Accounting Periods feature to enable this feature. For a list of every supported record, see the help topic REST Web Services Supported Records. You can also see the list of supported records in the REST API browser. For more information about working with the browser, see the help topic The REST API Browser. SOAP Web Services Version 2025.2 SOAP web services version 2025.2 is not yet available. When SOAP web services version 2025.2 becomes available, version 2018.2 will be retired. For information about the supported generally available versions, see the help topic Support for Existing WSDL Versions.

Araxis Merge Diff File for the 2025.2 Endpoint

The Araxis Merge diff file highlights the schema changes between the 2025.1 and 2025.2 endpoints. The Araxis Merge diff file is not yet available, but this section provides details about the types of information it will include.

About the Araxis Merge Diff File
Using the Araxis Merge Diff File

About the Araxis Merge Diff File

NetSuite publishes an Araxis Merge diff file for every new endpoint. Depending on the scope of the release, changes described in the Araxis Merge diff file may include:

New record types
Elements (fields) that have been added, removed, or changed
New sublists (lists)
New joins
New search filters and search return columns
New platform operations Using the Araxis Merge Diff File Important: The screenshots in this section are for illustrative purposes only. They do not reflect changes related to any specific endpoint. The Araxis Merge diff file is generated using Araxis Merge. When you click the Araxis Merge diff file link (when it is available), a page appears that offers an overview of all schema changes. The following screenshot shows how this summary page looks. In this example, the highlighted rows indicate that an XSD has been modified. The integers at the center indicate the number of changed lines in the file. To see the exact differences, click the report link in the column on the right or click the name of the file in either column. When you click any of these links, the Araxis Merge diff file shows a page with two columns. The previous version of the file is displayed on the left and the new version is displayed on the right. Changed elements are highlighted. For example, the following screenshot shows an excerpt from the report on platform.commonTypes.xsd. Notice the addition of two values to the PermissionCode enumeration: _accessPaymentAuditLog and _advancedPDFHTMLTemplates. The Araxis Merge diff file also shows changes to data types. The following screenshot is a snapshot of transactions.sales.xsd. Notice that the chargeType element changed from an enumeration to a RecordRef. 2025.2 SOAP Schema Browser The 2025.2 SOAP Schema Browser is not yet available.

Taxation Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Invoicing Preferences for Billable Items in SuiteTax
- US Statewide Item Tax Exceptions
- New DATEV Connector Role SuiteApp
- France Localization Enhancements
- Germany Localization Enhancements

Germany Central Bank Reports Enhancements

Norway Tax Reports Enhancements
Legacy Tax
- Withholding Tax Enhancements

Invoicing Preferences for Billable Items in SuiteTax

Starting from 2025.2, the following preferences will be supported in SuiteTax to enable finance users to simplify the presentation of items on transactions:

Combine expense items on invoices: this preference will group expense items that have the same category on invoices.
Combine billable items on invoices: this preference will combine billable items into one total on invoices. Previously, these preferences could not be enabled together with the SuiteTax feature. It was not possible to combine items lines into one line on transactions based on the same category.

UI Updates in NetSuite 2025.2

Mon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated August 18, 2025.

Text Enhance Translations

Text Enhance Translations is a new capability of Text Enhance that lets you translate content into

supported languages. This feature helps you collaborate across multilingual global teams and communicate more clearly with customers. With Text Enhance Translations, you can translate content into any supported language. By selecting the

Translate to action and then a target language, you can translate everything in a field with Text Enhance

or only the text you highlight. Text Enhance Translations automatically detects the source language for you. For more information, see the help topic Text Enhance.

Text Enhance Translations is available by default for all accounts with Text Enhance. If you're a user with

an Administrator role, you can manage preferences, such as the target translation languages. For more information, see the help topic Manage Text Enhance Translations Preferences.

Enhancements to the Redwood Experience Theme

The Redwood Experience theme is now available for the following NetSuite functions:

API Secrets Intercompany Balance Overview Retirement Plan

Auto Cash Application Keys Single Page Applications Dashboard

Bank Import Manage Translations Subsidiary Settings For Feature

Bank Import History Match Bank Data Subsidiary Settings Manager

Cache Invalidation Tool Matching Rules Suite App Marketplace

Certificates Netting Statement List SuiteApp Control Center Copy to Account Payrol Batch Items System Notes Domain Types Performance Review Talent Overview

Email Preview PI Removal, Timeline

Expense Import Prompt Studio Update Time Entries Expense Report Policies Reconcile Account Statement WBS Templates Goals Reconciled Statements Workbench

Hierarchy Manager Records Catalog -

The Security Questions page now uses the Redwood Experience theme by default. For more information, see the help topic Personal Preferences for Appearance.

NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers Is Available Everywhere

In the past, NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers was only available in accounts hosted in data centers in the Canada and the U.S. As of July 2025, no matter where your account is hosted, you have access to NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers. We encourage you to give NetSuite Expert a try. NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers was designed to make your searches more powerful. Sometimes, keyword searches bring up too many results to be helpful. NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers lets you ask your question in plain English and gives you a focused answer. NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers incorporates a re-ranking system that makes the results you get more relevant and appropriate.

NetSuite Expert lets you search SuiteAnswers using natural language. In plain English, you can ask a

question, or enter a phrase in the search bar. NetSuite Expert searches the NetSuite documentation, retrieves information from relevant help topics and SuiteAnswers articles, and generates a focused summary of the answer. The summary includes links to the documentation sources used to create the summary. If you aren't familiar with NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers, the following list gives you an overview.

NetSuite Expert:

Has access to documentation content, including NetSuite Help Center topics and SuiteAnswers knowledgebase articles.
Lets you search using natural language. You can ask a question in plain English or enter a phrase of three words or more in the search bar.
Searches the documentation to find information from relevant help topics and SuiteAnswers articles.
Generates a focused summary of the answer. The summary appears in a few seconds and includes links to the documentation sources. Note: NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers is a feature that uses retrieval-augmented generation (RAG). Generative AI features can be creative in their responses. You should always validate the generated summary for accuracy and quality. You can verify the information against the original source articles cited in the summary. If you like the summary and find it useful, click thumbs-up. If you don't get the answer you expect, click thumbs-down and let us know what's missing. For more information about NetSuite Expert, see the following:
Using NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers.
FAQ: NetSuite Expert in SuiteAnswers. Important: The summarized content is generated using AI. The information provided may not be entirely free of errors or accurate. You should verify the accuracy of the summary by reviewing the source articles. You can also ask NetSuite Customer Support for information about security, access permissions, and similar topics. Oracle NetSuite does not assume any responsibility or liability for the use or interpretation of the content in the summary.

Sublist Headers Remain Visible While Scrolling

Sublist headers now remain fixed at the top of the page as you scroll through a sublist. This ensures that column names are always visible.

Account Setup Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Updates to AI Preferences

The AI Preferences page enables users with the Administrator role to manage settings for Text Enhance and for SuiteScript.
The Text Enhance Preferences page was removed. You can now manage Text Enhance preferences at Setup > Company > AI > AI Preferences.

Accounting Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Enhancements to Merge Revenue Arrangements

Retrospective merges of revenue elements with different effective start dates are no longer supported.

All revenue elements included in a retrospective merge must have the same effective start dates. The

effective start dates can either be empty or have a value, but they must be consistent across elements. If the elements have different effective start dates, an error message appears when you attempt to preview or merge the arrangements.

Change

Additionally, retrospectively merged revenue arrangements can no longer be reverted. You can only

revert a change order if the revenue arrangement was created from a prospective merge. Previously, it was possible to revert retrospectively merged arrangements using a URL. For more information about retrospective merges and reverting change orders, see the help topics Combined Revenue Arrangements and Prospective Merges.

Authentication Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Outbound Single Sign-on (SuiteSignOn) End of Support in

NetSuite 2025.1 As of NetSuite 2024.1, support for the Outbound Single Sign-on (SuiteSignOn) feature ended in non- production accounts, such as sandbox accounts. As of NetSuite 2025.1, this feature will no longer be supported in production accounts. If you want to keep your integrations working, you must replace them with new integrations using the NetSuite as OIDC Provider feature. This feature is more secure, modern, and a more reliable authentication method. For more information, see the help topic NetSuite as OIDC Provider. Consider switching to the NetSuite as OIDC Provider feature as soon as possible.

End of Support for RSA PKCSv1.5 Scheme for OAuth 2.0

As of March 1, 2025, the RSA PKCSv1.5 scheme in algorithms for token signing for the OAuth 2.0 client credentials flow will no longer be supported for security reasons.

Update your integrations to use the RSA-PSS scheme, if you want to keep them working. The length of the

RSA key must be 3072 bits, or 4096 bits. Alternatively, you can use an EC key instead. The length of the EC key must be 256 bits, 384 bits, or 521 bits.

Change

If you use any integrations provided by a third party, you must inform the third party to update the integrations to use the RSSA-PSS scheme, or the EC key. For more information and examples, see the help topic OAuth 2.0 Client Credentials Setup.

Banking Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Changes to Auto-Create Rule Behavior

When the criteria for an auto-create rule are met, the system no longer creates an auto-create rule by default. Previously, the Make Auto-Create Rule From Selected Transactions box on the Match Bank

Data page was automatically checked when it became active. Consequently, if you were unaware the box

was checked, unwanted transaction creation and matches could occur. To prevent this, the system now only creates an auto-create rule if you check the box. When an auto-create rule is created, NetSuite automatically creates corresponding transactions from imported bank lines that fulfill certain conditions and then matches them. For details, see the help topic Rules for Automatically Creating Transactions. If you want to create an auto-create rule to achieve automatic transaction creation and matching, you must now always check the Make Auto-Create Rule From Selected Transactions box. For more details, see the help topic Generating Auto-Create Rules. To access the Match Bank Data page, go to Transactions > Bank > Match Bank Data. For permission details, see the help topic Permissions for Banking Features.

Commerce Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

SC/SCMA/SCA — SuiteCommerce Solutions

The 2025.1 release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced will be available in a future release. For information about the current release, see the help topic 2024.2 Release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced.

Commerce Themes

Complete release notes on the latest themes for your SuiteCommerce and SuiteCommerce Advanced site are available here: Commerce Themes Release Notes.

Commerce Extensions

Complete release notes on the latest extensions for your SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced site are available here: Commerce Extensions Release Notes.

SuiteCommerce InStore

Release Summary

SCIS 2025.1 provides improvements and fixes for processing that occurs in the background. The release

has no new features or functional changes that are visible at the point-of-sale (POS).

CRM Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Change

Changes to Performance Metrics for Support Cases
Advanced Partner Center Role Permission Updates
Use Customer 360 to View Additional Metrics Security Enhancements to External Case Response Page in

Case Management

As of NetSuite 2025.1, access to the External Case Response Page is provided only through time- limited links. These links are automatically generated and sent to users whenever their support cases are updated. You can adjust the validity period of the links by the External Link Validity Period preference in Support Preferences. Allowed values range from two to eight weeks. The default value is two weeks. Users who open an expired link will be automatically prompted to generate a new time-limited link. You can review the current validity period of a specific link in the External Link Expiration Date field on an associated support case record. Note: Users logged into NetSuite continue to have access to support cases without a change. For more information, see the help topic Setting Customer Service Preferences.

Changes to Performance Metrics for Support Cases

As of NetSuite 2025.1, all timestamps in performance metrics for support cases display a date and time format that corresponds to the time zone set in your account. Note: If you have created a custom report, the change will not apply to it. You must create a new report for the change to take effect. For more information, see the help topics:

Performance Metrics for Support Cases
Report Customization

Advanced Partner Center Role Permission Updates

The permissions and levels on the standard Advanced Partner Center (APC) role have been updated. This update ensures that users with the assigned standard and customized APC roles have access to appropriate pages and tasks in your NetSuite account. If a customized APC role is edited, any permission changes related to this update will be applied to the customized role. For the full list of permissions and levels, see Updates to Advanced Partner Center Role Permissions in 2025.1, SuiteAnswers ID 1019628.

Use Customer 360 to View Additional Metrics

As of 2025.1, several new metrics have been added to Customer 360 to provide a more comprehensive view of customer interactions and business opportunities.

Change

The enhancements include:

On the Overview page:
- Recent Transactions has been updated to Recent Activities:The Recent Activities section now includes a broader range of transaction types such as Customer Deposit, Customer Refund, Statement Charge, Purchase Order, Work Order, Cash Refund, Check, CC Refund, Bills, Bill Payment, Bill Credit, Vendor Return Authorization, Item Fulfillment, and Fulfillment Request.
- Product Recommendations: The recommended products now include pricing details and highlight frequently bought items. You can also add recommended items to new sales orders, Opportunities, and estimates more easily.
- Sales Performance has two new tabs: Sales This Year and Customer Lifetime Value: ▬ Sales This Year tab: View dynamic headline with a chart comparing sales from this year and last year (Jan-Dec). When you hover over a data point, a tooltip will display additional information and details about it. Use the View Report link to access Analytics for deeper filtering and analysis of current customer data. ▬ All-Time Sales has been updated to Customer Lifetime Value: Customer Lifetime Value shows the total of all sales made to the customer since the first ever transaction, in US dollars. ▬ The Customer Profitability tab has been removed.
Opportunities and Estimates tab: This new tab allows you to track opportunities and estimates with metrics like Projected Total, Weighted Total, and Opportunities Won.
Orders and Returns tab: This new tab allows you to monitor order statuses, returns, and average order value. You can filter orders by type and status. The Customer 360 page can be accessed in the following ways:
By clicking the View Customer 360 link on Customer record.
By Clicking the Switch to Customer 360 View link on Customer Dashboard.
By clicking the icon located next to the customer dashboard on the left. For details, see the help topic Customer 360.

CSV Import Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Newly Supported Record Types for CSV Import Record Type Newly Exposed or Updated Item Fulfillment Newly exposed Item Receipt Newly exposed

Audience Redesign Impact on Sharing Saved Imports

The redesign of the Audience tab in NetSuite 2025.1 has also triggered changes in CSV Import, specifically the Share Import dialog.

When available, you can check the Public box to make the import map available to internal users only.

Change

The Roles field has been renamed to Internal Roles and includes only internal roles for selection.
When you check the Select All box for the newly named Internal Roles field, the saved import is made available to all internal roles.

Employee Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Download Form W-2 and Form W-2 C

For all users:

In NetSuite 2025.1, SuitePeople U.S. Payroll employees can now download their Form W-2 and Form

W-2 C for the current year as a password-protected PDF document. The PDF document can also be

downloaded without a password. Employees need to access the Employee Center role to be able to download the Form W-2 and Form W-2 C. Note: The Form W-2 and Form W-2 C will be available for download effective from the financial year of 2024 onward. The forms for 2024 will be available for download from the Employee Center at a later date. If you want to download the forms for 2024 before that date, contact your payroll team. For users with Administrator permissions in NetSuite:

Change

In NetSuite 2025.1, SuitePeople U.S. Payroll administrators can now download Form W-2 and Form W-2 C for employees. The forms can be downloaded as a password-protected PDF document from the Employee record. The PDF document can also be downloaded without a password. Note: The Form W-2 and Form W-2 C will be available for download effective from the financial year of 2024 onward. To download the forms for previous years for employees, contact NetSuite Support. To download the forms for employees for 2024, follow the current process of downloading the forms from the secured folder when notified by NetSuite Support.

Inventory Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Warehouse Management Enhancements processing: Note: Use of NetSuite WMS requires that you install two SuiteApps in the following order: (1) SCM Mobile and (2) Oracle NetSuite WMS.

Pick Task Decomposition Preference

You can set the Allow Pick Decomposition on Waves preference as your default preference for waves. It automatically checks the Apply Pick Decomposition setting for waves created through the NetSuite UI.

On scheduled wave releases and waves generated for single unreleased orders on the app, you can check

the same setting for pick decomposition. For more information, see the help topic Setting Warehouse Management Preferences. You can configure a base unit and at least one of its convertible units that you want to use on a Units for Pick Decomposition record. The sets of units you configure apply to regular inventory or lot items that use the base unit. On item records, you can assign a specific set of units per item.

Based on your configured set of units, NetSuite WMS generates one pick task for each unit used to

decompose the quantity on a wave’s order line. Considering the largest unit first, it chooses one or more units that are larger than the unit on the order line. Otherwise, quantities that could not be decomposed continue to use the order line unit.

Option Not to Update Quantities of Re-released Lines

Previously, NetSuite WMS creates new waves for re-release lines with backordered quantities only if you have started to pick the items. Now, you can disable the Update Quantity of Re-released Pick

Task Lines preference to always create new waves for re-released backordered quantities. For more

information, see the help topic Re-releasing Lines with Backorders or Setting Warehouse Management Preferences. Change

Partial Pick Reversal

When you reverse pick tasks on the app, you can now enter the quantity you want to reverse per pick task line. For lot items, you can also specify the quantity to reverse per lot number. NetSuite WMS adjusts the picked quantities on associated pick tasks, item fulfillments, and orders. For more information, see the help topic Pick Task Reversal.

New Replenish via Cart Process

On the app, you can now choose the Replenishment via Cart process from the Inventory submenu. It

enables you to add items to a cart from different bins. Then, you can transfer them at the same time to the bin you want to replenish. For more information, see the help topic Replenishment.

Item Label Printing During Bin Replenishment

Before you complete a replenishment, you can print labels for regular inventory, lot, or serialized items. For more information, see the help topic Mobile Printing for NetSuite WMS.

Adjustment Reasons for Create Inventory Process

You can activate the Entry of additional details rule to require a reason and adjustment account when you create inventory through the app. It also enables optional entry of a memo, class, and department. NetSuite WMS displays these details on the inventory adjustment generated after you create the inventory. When you activate the rule, make sure that you also preconfigure the adjustment reasons you want to use for creating inventory. For more information, see the help topic Creating Inventory.

Receiving in Different Units Through Tally Scanning

For all receiving processes, except returns receiving, you can specify an item’s unit before you tally scan

its bar code. This capability applies to regular inventory and lot items only. For reference, you can view the unit conversion to check the quantities you want to receive against the remaining and received quantities. For more information, see the help topic Inbound Processing. To set up Tally Scanning, see the help topic System Rules for NetSuite WMS.

New WMS Preferred Bins for Putaway

You can activate the Recommend WMS Preferred bins rule to choose bins to recommend during item putaway. On item records, you can set the WMS Preferred and WMS Sequence # columns on the Bin

Numbers subtab. When you put away items on the app, the Recommended Bin field displays the WMS

Preferred bin that has the first sequence number. The bin list displays other available bins, including other

WMS Preferred bins and the Preferred (Per Location) bin. For more information, see the help topic Item Putaway.

CSV Import for Bin Transfers

You can use the Bin Transfer custom record to import CSV files that contain your bin, item, and transfer details. For more information about CSV imports, see the help topic Importing CSV Files with the Import Assistant. Change

Filtering Orders by Date

If you activate the Add Date Filtering rule, you can specify the number of months by which you want to filter orders. On the app, the orders table displays the Filter by Date field with the list of number of months for selection. During item picking, you can view the sales, transfer, or work orders created in the past number of months that you have selected. Aside from the picking processes, date filtering also applies to cycle counting and receiving of purchase orders, transfer orders, or inbound shipments. To activate the rule, see the help topic System Rules for NetSuite WMS.

Displaying the Unit Conversion Table

If you use the Multiple Units of Measure feature, you can view the unit conversion table on the app. On the Enter Quantity page of a standard mobile process, you can tap the units icon to open the Conversion Units and Rates popup window. For more information, see the help topic Common Mobile Pages and Screens. Supply Planning Enhancements

Scoped Planning Repository Refresh

With NetSuite 2025.1, you can now choose to refresh the planning repository for only the data that matches the criteria of a selected Plan Definition. A new Scope sections appears on the Refresh Planning

Repository Schedule page, where you can set one of the following preferences:

Global Refresh: Refresh all eligible planning Items and Locations in the system.
Scoped Refresh: Refresh all planning Items and Locations in the scope of the selected Supply Plan Definitions. Access the new preference at Transactions > Supply Planning > Refresh Planning Repository > Schedule. For more information, see the help topic Creating a Refresh Planning Repository Schedule.

Supplier Filter on Supply Planning Workbench

As of NetSuite 2025.1, with the new Supplier filter on the Supply Planning Workbench, you can filter workbench results to items that are assigned to a specific preferred supplier. To access the new filter on the workbench, go to Transactions > Supply Planning > Supply Planning Definitions. Beside the supply plan you want to view, in the Planning Workbench column, click View Results. For more information, see the help topic Creating a Refresh Planning Repository Schedule.

Query Item Data using the Planned Order Saved Search

With NetSuite 2025.1, when you run a query using the Planned Order Search, you can now include criteria on the item record, such as the replenishment method. For example, you can configure your query to return only planned orders for items with the replenishment method set to MPS. To access the new query capabilities on the Planned Order Search, go to Transactions > Supply Planning > Planned Orders > Search. Change

Manufacturing Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Manufacturing Routing Enhancements Add Delays Between Manufacturing Operation Tasks and

Select Connection Type

Before NetSuite 2025.1, it was possible to define operations overlapping when the following operation task started with a delay after the previous operation task started. The connection type between operations was always Finish-To-Start. Now, you can also add delays between operations and change connection type. The following options are available:

Start-To-Start - the subsequent operations start at the same time (with minimal lag calculated automatically).
Start-To-Start with lag - the subsequent operation starts after a specified delay (lag) from the start of the first operation.
Finish-To-Start (default) - the subsequent operation starts only after the previous one finishes.
Finish-To-Start with lag - the subsequent operation starts after the first operation finishes, with an additional specified delay (lag). You can view and edit the connection type and lag amount in the Predecessors subtab in the Manufacturing Operation Task popup window. For more information, see the Manufacturing Operation Tasks help topic. You can also define the connection type and lag amount in the Routing Steps subtab in the Manufacturing Routing popup window. For more information, see the Creating a Manufacturing Routing help topic. The connection type for all existing operations will change automatically. For more information about connection types, see the Operations Overlap help topic.

Add, Delete or Reorder Manufacturing Operation Tasks

Before NetSuite 2025.1, it was possible to add, edit, or delete only the last task in the sequence.

Now, from the Operations subtab on the work order, you can do the following:

add an operation with any sequence number
edit existing operations with the Not Started status to change their sequence numbers to any value
delete any operation with the Not Started status

Change

For more information, see the Add or Delete Tasks help topic.

Order Management Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Annual Recurring Revenue (ARR) Analytics and Dashboard

SuiteBilling is adding annual recurring revenue (ARR) to our monthly recurring revenue (MRR)

functionality in SuiteAnalytics and reporting. Subscription businesses have a unique set of metrics called

SaaS (software as a service) metrics. Recurring revenue, either MRR or ARR, is the basis many of these

metrics. SaaS metrics are used to determine the health of their business and to help inform if changes are needed. Depending on the nature of the business, MRR or ARR may be more important. There is also a new ARR workbook with standard reports and enhanced dashboard portlets for MRR and ARR metrics.

Invoice and Allocate Before Activation

Subscription businesses sell projects, hardware, and subscriptions all together. It is very common for

hardware items and projects to be delivered and invoiced before subscriptions are activated or the service starts. You can create invoices and bill before activating the subscription. You also can create forecast revenue for allocation against inventory and project revenue. You can create charges and revenue before knowing when software or services will be provisioned or billed. Charges are generated and revenue elements are created in pending activation status instead of at activation.

Pooled Usage

You can now price services annually but charge customers monthly. For usage and overage services, you can price in one frequency and charge in another frequency.

Uplift Has Higher Decimal Precision

The uplift feature has expanded decimal precision to eight places after the decimal for a more precise uplift value and accurate price.

Purchasing Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Enhancements to Bill Capture

Scanned Vendor Bills Page Improvements

You can now delete uploads in bulk. Check the box next to one or more uploads and click Delete.

Change

A Reference No. column is now displayed on the Scanned Vendor Bills page. Previously this was only available on the Review Scanned Bill page.
A duplicate detection warning is shown on both the Scanned Vendor Bills and Review Scanned Bill pages if the reference number has already been used. This helps you identify if you have uploaded a duplicate bill.
You can now add user notes on both the Scanned Vendor bills and Review Scanned bill pages. These user notes are carried over to the bill in the User Notes section of the Communication subtab.

Review Scanned Bill Page Improvements

NetSuite SuiteTax Engine is now supported. NetSuite India Localization SuiteTax Engine and NetSuite LATAM Engine are currently not supported.
Templates are now available. Templates save data for select fields for specific vendor and subsidiary combinations. Template data will override scanned bill data.
Discounts are now supported, including percentages and negative rates.
You can now apply payment holds when reviewing your bill. Check the Payment Hold box to apply a payment hold on a disputed bill.
Files can now be downloaded from the Review Scanned Bill Page. Select the download icon on the left side of the split view.
For line items, if there is no PO linked or scanned value found, item rates are carried from the item record.
When selecting a PO number for a line item, the Billed Quantity is now displayed in the Purchase Order pop-up.

Bill Creation Improvements

To create bills using Bill Capture, the Create level of the Documents and Files permission is now the minimum requirement. Previously, Full access level was required.
After creating a bill using Bill Capture, the uploaded file can be viewed in a split view next to the created bill.
If a bill was created using Bill Capture, this is indicated in System Notes. (Bill > System Information subtab > System Notes)

New Bill capture Preferences

When a PO is linked, you can now use PO data for all applicable fields, except line items and expenses, and require a review. (Bill Capture Preferences > Review Page field Sourcing > Purchase Order)
Scanned item lines can be aggregated as one line. Previously, this was only available for expense lines. (Bill Capture Preferences > Review Page Line Display > Item Line Total)
You are no longer required to select tax and shipping preferences for Bill Capture. They can be left empty. (Bill Capture Preferences > Review Page Field Sourcing > Total Tax / Shipping Cost) For more information, see the help topic Email or Upload Vendor Bill Files Into NetSuite Using Bill Capture. Change

SuiteAnalytics Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Change

End of Support for the NetSuite.com Data Source
New Option to Send Reports to Each Group Member
New HTML Formulas in Search Feature

End of Support for the NetSuite.com Data Source

Previously, a process was started to remove the NetSuite.com data source from SuiteAnalytics Connect. As part of this process, support is now ending for the NetSuite.com data source. This means that the

NetSuite.com data source is still available, but support cases requesting bug fixes or performance

enhancements for the NetSuite.com data source will not be considered. The only exception to this rule is if the data source is down. Important: The NetSuite.com data source will be completely removed as of NetSuite 2026.1. To avoid disruption when the NetSuite.com data source is removed, you must complete all of the required actions to use SuiteAnalytics Connect with the Netsuite2.com data source only. For information about how to transition to the NetSuite2.com data source, see the help topic Changing from NetSuite.com to NetSuite2.com.

New Option to Send Reports to Each Group Member

Now you can send reports to each member of a group. Before this change, when you sent reports to a

Group entity, the reports were sent to the group email address only and not to the email addresses of

each member of the group. They were sent to the group email address only. With this release, now you can check the All individual group members box to send your report to each member of the group. This option is available when you send reports and schedule them. For more information, see the following topics:

Scheduling a Report
Emailing a Report

New HTML Formulas in Search Feature

The new HTML Formulas in Search feature enables users with the Administrator role to assign the Create

HTML Formulas in Search permission to other users. This change improves the security of saved searches

in your account and raises awareness of the risks of inserting HTML and scripts into a saved search. For more information, see the help topic Evaluating Code in Saved Searches Using Formula (HTML) Fields. SuiteApps (Bundles) Released by NetSuite Change Administration SuiteApps Following is the 2025.1 administration enhancement to SuiteApps: Enhancements to the Personal Information Access Logs

Workbook in the Compliance 360 SuiteApp

Note: Currently, these changes are visible only in the Personal Information Access Logs workbook. The Activity Log and the Compliance 360 dashboard will be updated later in the 2025.1 release. You can now view the following information in the Personal Information Access Logs workbook:

Actions performed on custom records.
Actions related to viewing, sending, or deleting messages.
Email messages that are sent from saved searches.
Email campaigns that are sent to customers.
Scheduled or automated actions. Inventory Management SuiteApps

Following are the 2025.1 inventory management enhancements to SuiteApps:

Quality Management Enhancements
SCM Mobile Enhancements Quality Management Enhancements

Statistical Sampling

The NetSuite 2025.1 Quality Management SuiteApp includes the new Statistical Sampling feature that enables you to take a compliance-driven approach to quality assurance. You can perform targeted inspections based on item, transaction, and volume combinations. With the Statistical Sampling feature, you can define your inspections using any of the following sampling types:

Item-Based: Define inspection standards for specific items.
Volume-Based: Tailor inspection standards by volume range and defect limits.
Transaction-Based: Perform inspections based on transaction types with defect thresholds.
Transaction & Volume-Based: Combine transaction and volume criteria for precise inspections.

Change

The Quality Management SuiteApp now supports criteria to align with the following three defect categories:

Critical: High-severity issues.
Major: Medium-severity issues.
Minor: Low-severity issues.

Enhanced Receipt Return Authorization

The new Enhanced Receipt Return Authorization workflow automates the creation of Return Receipt Authorizations based on inspection results. The workflow identifies non-compliant lot and serial numbers and automatically generates corresponding return authorizations. Process and Visibility Enhancements inspection processes and visibility:

Inventory Details Visibility: Quality personnel can now access inventory details directly from the inspection queue on the QMS Tablet. Operational Details Access: You can now view operational details in the inspection queue based on work order routing. Expiry Date Information: You can now see the expiry dates for lot and serial numbers of items you inspect on the QMS Tablet. SCM Mobile Enhancements Customization:

Support for Redwood Experience Preference

If you set the Enable option for the Redwood Experience general preference, you can view the same theme on the app. Mobile pages show the same updates to the headers, icons, colors, and fonts. For more information, see the help topic Personal Preferences for Appearance.

Print to File Without Third-Party Integration

If you do not use the PrintNode integration for Mobile Printing, you can save a soft copy of a label or document for printing. When you print on the app, you can choose a printer set to Print to File. You can access the saved PDF or ZPL file from your file cabinet and print it on your own. For more information, see the help topic Label Printing and Reprinting or SCM Mobile Printing.

Multiple Row Selection for Transfer Tables

When you customize transfer tables, you can check the Enable Multiselect Condition box to display the same toggle on the app. You can switch on the toggle to show a box beside each row for selection. It also displays a box at the header for selection of all rows. SCM Mobile provides a new set of APIs that you can add to row click conditions for the left or right table. You can use the following APIs depending on your table requirements: getSelection, getLeftSelection, and getRightSelection.

Change

For more information, see the help topic Customizing Mobile Table Elements.

Date Selection from a Calendar

By default, date fields on the app now display the calendar icon for date selection. If you want to remove it from a field, you can access the Date page element and check its Hide Date Selector box through Mobile Customization. For more information, see the help topic Customizing Mobile Page Elements.

New Mobile Configuration Capabilities

For standard mobile processes, the following capabilities enable you to update specific page elements through Mobile Configuration:

Adding Action Buttons – On standard mobile pages, you can configure new action buttons and display them on the body or footer. If you have multiple buttons, you can specify the primary button and the display order.
Cloning Data Tables – You can create a copy of a standard data table and update it based on your table requirements. You can set up additional columns and your own actions for row clicks or column clicks.
Autosubmission of Selected Table Data – You can configure autosubmission for row clicks or column clicks on a Data Table element. Localization SuiteApps

Following are the 2025.1 localization enhancements to SuiteApps:

Brazil Localization Enhancements
Brazil Reports Enhancements
New Denmark Tax Reports
Southeast Asia Localization Enhancements
SuiteTax Latam Engine Enhancements
SuiteTax Latam Engine - Brazil Records Enhancements Brazil Localization Enhancements CNAB Delivery Files Supporting Larger Volumes of Transactions or

Installments

Brazil Localization now enables you to adjust the number of SuiteCloud processors that NetSuite uses to generate CNAB delivery files.

Change

If you want to generate CNAB delivery files with large volumes of transactions or installments, you can increase the number of processors to improve performance.

Multiple Referenced Electronic Invoices

Brazil Localization now enables you to enter up to 999 access keys in the Referenced Electronic Invoice

field in transactions. Previously, this field only supported the input of one access key. For more information, see the help topic Electronic Invoicing for Brazil.

New Inbound Delivery Transaction

The SuiteApp includes a new inbound delivery type of transaction that replaces the existing inbound delivery. The new transaction has the same functionality as the retired inbound delivery. Additionally, the new inbound delivery enables you to register inventory details and add new lot numbers. For more information, see the help topic Generating Electronic Invoices for Inbound Deliveries for Brazil.

New Purchasing and Receiveing Process for Imported Goods

You can now integrate the import bill into your purchasing process in NetSuite by creating import bills from purchase orders. Eligible purchase orders display the Create Import Bill button. For more information, see the help topic Purchasing and Receiving Imported Goods in Brazil.

Purpose in Transaction Natures

Transaction nature records now include the Purpose field. With this enhancement, you can indicate that

specific conditions apply to transactions with a given nature. Brazil Localization provides predefined purposes for imports of goods and sales to end consumers. For more information, see the help topic Setting Up Transaction Natures for Brazil. Brazil Reports Enhancements

Accounting Contexts Support

Brazil Reports now supports accounting contexts, enabling you to print location-specific account names and numbers in your reports. The SuiteApp displays the Accounting Context field on the Country Tax Reports page when you generate the following reports:

Brazil balance sheet
Brazil general journal

Change

Brazil general ledger
Brazil trial balance For more information, see the help topic Accounting Contexts.

City of the Service Provision

Provided services and received services fiscal books will now include the city where the service was provided. If you fill the Location field on transactions, NetSuite now prints the location as the city where the service was provided in provided services and received services fiscal books. If you leave the field empty, NetSuite populates the city of the transaction's issuer as the city of the service provision in the fiscal books. For invoices, the issuer is the subsidiary. For vendor bills, the issuer is the vendor.

Consolidated Reports

Brazil Report enables you to generate a consolidated report that includes information from a parent

subsidiary and all its child subsidiaries. The option to consolidate reports is available on the Brazil Reports

Settings page for the following reports:

Brazil balance sheet
Brazil general journal
Brazil general ledger
Brazil trial balance For more information, see the help topic Generating Country Tax Reports for Brazil.

Cost Centers in Reports

If your company uses cost centers, you can now include this information in your reports for Brazil. With Brazil Reports, cost centers correspond to department records in NetSuite. The SuiteApp includes cost center information in the following reports:

Brazil balance sheet
Brazil general journal
Brazil general ledger
Brazil trial balance
ECD file
EFD Contribuições file
PIS and COFINS assessment You can choose whether you want to display or hide the cost centers from your reports. For more information, see the help topic Cost Centers in Reports for Brazil.

ECF File Layouts per Tax Regime

Brazil Reports now provides separate Escrituração Contábil Fiscal (ECF) file layouts for the Lucro Real and Lucro Presumido tax regimes.

Change

Each file layout includes sections and records that are relevant to businesses that adhere to the corresponding tax regime. For more information, see the help topic Available Statutory Reports for Brazil.

Populated ICMS Credit Balance

When you create ICMS assessment records, NetSuite now retrieves your credit balance from the previous assessment period. The system populates the ICMS Credit Balance field with the existing balance when you save the new ICMS assessment record. For more information, see the help topic Assessing ICMS.

New Denmark Tax Reports

The Denmark Tax Reports SuiteApp version 1.0.0 has been released to the public. Denmark Tax Report lets you generate the Denmark Standard Audit File for Tax (SAF-T) report.

SAF-T (Standard Audit File for Tax) is an international standard format for exchanging electronic

accounting data, developed by the OECD (Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development). It is designed to facilitate efficient tax audits and ensure compliance with local tax regulations.

Effective January 1 2025, the new requirements apply to businesses operating in Denmark, mandating the

Invoicing functionality:

Official Receipts Updates
New Invoice Template Formats for Single Type VAT Transactions
New Tax Summary Breakdown for Mixed Transactions
New Transaction Total Summary Breakdown for Mixed Transactions

Official Receipts Updates

Official receipts are delegated as a supplementary document and cannot be used to support input tax

claims. Invoices are now the primary supporting document for VAT purposes. With this, the following changes are introduced:

In Philippines Official Receipt PDF/HTML Template, the phrase “THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT VALID

FOR CLAIM OF INPUT TAX” now appears in the footer section. When printing official receipts with

multiple pages, the footer phrase appears on the bottom of the last page of the receipt.

Philippines Official Receipt PDF/HTML Template (Without Footer Phrase) is removed and can no longer be used. If you use this template, you must map your custom form to use Philippines Official

Change

Receipt PDF / HTML Template. Refer to Mapping Preformatted Document Types and Templates to Transaction Forms for instructions. Important: Printing a transaction that is associated with a deleted template may result in an error.

The Tax Summary section is now removed in collection receipts or official receipts because it is no longer the basis of output tax liability for sellers and input tax claims for buyers. However, for existing payment transactions that have not yet been printed or for those which are already printed prior to this release, including reprint transactions, the Tax Summary section remains.

For information, see the following help topics:

BIR-Required Details BIR-Required Details
Reprint Label and Watermarks in Philippines Invoicing Documents

New Invoice Template Formats for Single Type VAT Transactions

The following are new invoice template formats for VAT-Zero Rated Sale or VAT-Exempt Sale transactions:

Zero-rated sales invoice – This is used if all items in a transaction are subject to zero percent (0%) VAT.
- The phrase “ZERO-RATED SALE” appears in the header.
- The label “Total Zero-rated Sales” is used for the total amount of sale.
VAT-exempt sales invoice – This is used if all items in a transaction are exempt from VAT.
- The phrase “VAT-EXEMPT SALE” appears in the header.
- The label “Total VAT-Exempt Sales” is used for the total amount of sale.
- The phrase “THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT VALID FOR CLAIM OF INPUT TAX” appears on the bottom of the invoice. When printing sales invoices with multiple pages, the footer phrase appears on the bottom of the last page of the invoice.

New Tax Summary Breakdown for Mixed Transactions

For mixed transactions, the sales involved are now broken down into VATable Sales, VAT Amount, VAT Exempt Sales, and Zero-Rated Sales in the Tax Summary section. For single type VAT transactions, such as line-items that are purely zero-rated or VAT-exempted, the Tax Summary section no longer appears.

New Transaction Total Summary Breakdown for Mixed Transactions

For mixed transactions, VAT details are now broken down into Less: VAT, Amount: Net of VAT, and Add: VAT when the Print Inclusive of VAT box is checked for subsidiaries. For more information about including VAT details on printed Philippines documents, see the help topic Displaying VAT Breakdown. SuiteTax Latam Engine Enhancements

Change

Country Field Available in Tax Determination Rules Records
Credit Card Transaction Now Supported
New Supplementary Information Code Field
Projects Now Supported in Transactions
Proration Criteria

Country Field Available in Tax Determination Rules Records

If you have taxation scenarios that apply at the country level, now you can create tax determination rules for transactions from or to a given country. SuiteTax Latam Engine adds new Country fields to the tax determination rules record, one for the issuer and another for the receiver of the transaction. For more information, see the help topic Creating Tax Determination Rules in the SuiteTax Latam Engine.

Credit Card Transaction Now Supported

The SuiteApp now supports the tax determination process in credit card transactions. With this enhancement, if rules apply to a credit card transaction, the SuiteTax Latam Engine’s tax engine calculates the appropriate taxes.

New Supplementary Information Code Field

Tax determination settings records now include the Supplementary Information Code field. Supplementary information codes represent a type of information that you want SuiteTax Latam Engine to consider in the tax determination process. For example, local authorities may require you to inform a code to comply with tax laws or to grant you a reduced tax rate. For more information, see the help topic Creating Tax Determination Settings in the SuiteTax Latam Engine.

Projects Now Supported in Transactions

If you have the Projects feature enabled in your account, you can calculate taxes in transactions involving projects. The following types of transaction now support tax calculation with projects:

Cash sale
Custom sales transactions
Estimate
Invoice

Proration Criteria

You can now define how to proportionally allocate expense amounts in the tax calculation basis of transaction items. The SuiteTax Latam Engine provides you the following options as proration criteria:

Quantity
Value
Weight

Change

The new Proration Criteria field is available in expense category and shipping item records. For more information, see the help topic Defining Proration Criteria for Expense Categories and Shipping Items in the SuiteTax Latam Engine. SuiteTax Latam Engine - Brazil Records Enhancements

Creation of CFOP Code Records

Now you are able to create CFOP code records in NetSuite with the same code and description, but different names. This enhancement enables you to further specify the applicability of your tax determination rules, by entering specific CFOP code names as the operation codes. For more information, see the help topic Creating CFOP Codes.

ICMS Tax Relief for SUFRAMA

SuiteTax Latam Engine - Brazil Records now provides a tax code and tax type to account for the ICMS with tax relief granted by the Superintendência da Zona Franca de Manaus (SUFRAMA). The SuiteApp also introduces a parameter type for the tax relief in transactions involving the SUFRAMA. The parameter enables you to apply and include this information in transactions and their e-documents. For more information, see the help topic Parameter Types for Brazil.

Tax Determination for Specific Origin Codes

SuiteTax Latam Engine - Brazil Records now enables you to set up tax determination rules to consider origin codes when determining and calculating taxes for Brazil.

For example, a tax’s rate may vary depending on the place of origin of the items in a transaction. In this

case, you can create different tax determination settings for each different origin and the applicable tax rate. For more information, see the help topic Creating Tax Determination Settings for Specific Origin Codes. Manufacturing SuiteApps Following are the 2025.1 manufacturing enhancements to SuiteApps: Manufacturing Mobile Enhancements

Change

Label Printing Enhancements
Pause Reason on Restart Pages Refined Bin Selection When Issuing Components for Work

Orders

With the NetSuite 2025.1 Manufacturing Mobile SuiteApp, you can now select the bins from which you want to issue components when you execute WIP and non-WIP work orders. This feature uses the existing Issue from Preferred Bin preference on the Bin Numbers section of the Purchasing/Inventory subtab of the assembly item record. When the Issue from Preferred Bin box is checked, and the component item record is configured with a preferred bin per location, components will be issued from the configured preferred bin. When your location is selected in the Location to show all bins field in the Manufacturing Mobile subtab, you can select any bin at your location when issuing components for work orders.

Operation Log

A new Operation Log option appears in the NetSuite 25.1 Manufacturing Mobile SuiteApp interface menu. The operation log displays details for operations that are in progress (either set up or running) at a specified work center. Depending on your role, you can switch between work centers, select associated in- progress operations, and end them. If you are a Production Operator, you can see in-progress operations that you have previously worked on. If you are a Production Manager or Administrator, you can see all in- progress operations.

GS1 Item Label Printing

With the NetSuite 2025.1 Manufacturing Mobile SuiteApp, you can now print GS1 bar codes on the item labels for produced assembly items. To use this feature, you must have item level label printing enabled. A new Enable GS1 Bar Code Printing box appears on the item print preferences record when you go to Manufacturing Mobile > Administration/Setup > Item Level Print Preferences and select the assembly item for which you want to print labels by scanning a GS1 bar code. Label Printing Enhancements printing:

Defining Item Level Print Preferences by Item Process Group or Item Process Family: The item print preferences record now includes new Item Process Group and Item Process Family to enable you to configure print preferences for multiple items at one time. When you set either of these two new fields, the print preferences will apply to all of the items configured as part of the Item Process Group or Item Process Family.
Advanced PDF Template Support: You can now select Advanced PDF Templates in the template fields on the item level print preferences record. For more information on using Advanced PDF Templates, see Creating Custom Print Templates and Files.

Pause Reason on Restart Pages

You can now see a new Pause Reason field on the Restart Run and Restart Setup pages in the NetSuite 25.1 Manufacturing Mobile interface. Before you choose to restart a run or setup, you can review the reason the operation was paused. Change Order Management SuiteApps Following are the 2025.1 order management enhancements to SuiteApps:

Ship Central Enhancements

Note: Use of Ship Central requires that you install two SuiteApps in the following order: (1) SCM Mobile and (2) NetSuite Ship Central. In NetSuite 2025.1, Ship Central provides the following packing enhancements:

Pack Carton Reuse

If you activate the Use Cartons from Shipped Fulfillments rule, you can reuse pack cartons previously associated with fulfillments that have been shipped. On the app, you can enter, scan, or select from the list of available cartons through the Reuse Cartons option. You can specify a different size and weight for a reused carton. To activate the rule, see the help topic Configuring Ship Central Rules.

Pack All Option for Cartons and Pallets

The new Enable Multi-Select toggle displays a box beside each row for selection on the left or right side of the transfer table. Along with the Pack All and Unpack All buttons, you can select and transfer between the two sides to process cartons or pallets. For more information, see the help topic Ship Central Packing.

Weighing Scale Support and Tare Weight for Pallets

If you set up Weighing Scale Support, you can capture the total weight of a pallet that contains your packed cartons. You can also provide the tare weight. For requirements and setup procedures, see the help topic Mobile Printing and Weighing Scale Setup.

Printing Multiple Packing Labels and Documents

On the app, you can access Print Packing Labels & Docs from the Options menu. You can print multiple

packing labels, lists, and related documents at the same time for cartons that you have packed. Ship Central provides the following enhancements for domestic shipping, international shipping, or both: New Settings for Carriers

For your carriers, you can now configure the following capabilities:

Carrier Accounts per Location – You can assign a location to a carrier account that you integrate and sync through ShipEngine. If you have multiple accounts for a single carrier, you cannot assign all of them to the same location. You can use shipping methods, shop for rates, and get best rates available through a carrier account mapped to a location.
Default Package Code per Carrier – On a Ship Central Preference record, you can assign a default package code for each carrier. On the app, you can use the default one or change it for a specific shipment.
Shipment References per Carrier – For carriers that support additional shipment references, you can specify the references for each carrier. You can specify up to three references, depending on the carrier. Change

CSV Import of Other Billing Accounts

You can use the Other Billing Account custom record to import billing account details of third parties or recipients. On your CSV files, you can include the Ship Central Preferences record to which you want to associate a billing account. For more information about other billing accounts, see the help topic Third- party or Recipient Billing Setup. Applying Discount, Markup, and Flat Rates When you ship orders on the app, you can apply a discount, markup, or flat rate that you set up for a shipping item. You can apply either a discount or markup to a calculated shipping cost. Flat rates replace the shipping cost altogether.

Shop for Rates on the Order Transaction

If you use a shipping item for Ship Central on a sales or transfer order, the Shop for Rates option now appears on its Shipping subtab. Instead of calculating the rate, you can view and select from a list of available rates from your carriers. For more information, see the help topic Rerating Orders.

Changing the Ship From Address on the App

By default, the app uses the address on your Location record as the Ship From address. You can change it to another location address that you set up or your return address for each shipment or order. This address change does not replace the one on the associated order. For more information, see the help topic Shipping Packed Orders.

Domestic Shipping to Military PO Boxes and US Territories

Using a USPS domestic shipping service, you can now ship orders to US territories and the following military PO boxes: APO, FPO, and DPO. On the app, you can choose the Add customs details option to enter the details required to generate shipping labels and documents. For more information, see the help topic Ship Central Shipping.

Estimated Tax for International Shipments

On a Ship Central Preferences record, if you set the Enable International Shipping box, you can also set

the Calculate International Shipping Tax box. When checked, you can view the estimated tax amount based on the shipping destination.

Adding Description of Goods to International Shipments

On the app, you can now specify the description of goods for international shipments. You can choose

one of the following fields from which you want to obtain the description: Display Name/Code, Sales Description, or International Description of Goods.

Shipping with ParcelGuard Insurance

If you activate the Add shipping insurance rule, you can now choose ParcelGuard as an insurance provider if available from your carrier.

New Shipping Label Size

When you ship orders on the app, you can print labels in letter size (8.5 × 11 inches) and in PDF or PNG format. Change

SuiteBuilder Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Updated BFO library for Advanced PDF/HTML Templates

The BFO library used for advanced PDF/HTML templates has been updated to 1.2.10.

BFO version 1.2.10 uses enhanced security and allows users to embed a file within a PDF document. For

version details, see the help topic Third-Party Products Used in Advanced Printing.

SuiteCloud Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF) is a development framework and deployment mechanism.

Customers and partners can use SDF to create customization projects for internal use within their

organizations or for commercial distribution. For more information about SDF, see the help topic SuiteCloud Development Framework. For a complete list of custom records and customizations that are supported by SDF, see the help topic Customizations Supported by SuiteCloud Development Framework. New SDF Custom Objects for Prompts and Text Enhance

Actions

SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF) custom objects are components you define in XML to

customize NetSuite. You can create SDF custom objects in a SuiteCloud project or import them from a NetSuite account. These objects represent NetSuite elements such as custom records, workflows, scripts, and so on.

Two new SDF custom objects are now available:

prompt – This object represents a prompt.
textenhanceaction – This object represents a Text Enhance action. For more information about Text Enhance, see the help topic Text Enhance. For more information about SDF custom objects, see the help topic Developing SDF Custom Objects. Changes to Audience Fields in Script Deployments and

Single Page Applications

Important: This feature is targeted to be available in February 2025. For the scriptdeployment structured field within each script type SDF custom object, the behavior of the following fields has changed:

Change

allroles – Setting this field to T (true) means that all internal roles are selected.
audslctrole – You can use this field to specify roles individually, including any external roles, in the script audience. If the allroles is set to T, any internal roles listed in the audslctrole field will be ignored.

These changes apply to the following custom objects for script types:

clientscript
massupdatescript
portlet
restlet
suitelet
usereventscript
workflowactionscript

For the singlepageapp SDF custom object, the behavior of the following fields have changed:

audienceallroles – Setting this field to T (true) means that all internal roles are selected.
audienceroles – You can use this field to specify roles individually, including any external roles, in the SPA audience. If the audienceallroles is set to T, any internal roles listed in the audienceroles field will be ignored.

SuiteCloud SDK Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteCloud Software Development Kit (SuiteCloud SDK) is a set of tools you can use to develop SuiteCloud

projects. These tools are the SuiteCloud IDE plug-ins and command-line interfaces.

Secure Credentials Storage for SuiteCloud SDK

Important: This feature is targeted to be available in February 2025. Starting 2025.1, SuiteCloud SDK uses Public-Key Cryptography Standards #12 (PKCS#12) to generate a credentials file that is password protected. When you authenticate for the first time using the SuiteCloud SDK tools, the PKCS#12 credentials file is created and stored on your local machine in the .suitecloud-sdk folder within your home directory. This file contains encrypted authentication data, thus eliminating the need for repeated authentication in subsequent sessions. To keep your credentials file secure, SuiteCloud SDK encrypts it using a password or secure passkey:

Change

For browser-based authentication, the passkey is auto-generated and stored in your machine's secure storage service (such as Windows Credential Manager, MacOS Keychain, or Linux Keyring).
For machine-to-machine authentication or browser-based authentication in fallback mode, you must manually define the passkey using an environment variable. Important: The upcoming SuiteCloud SDK tools release will impact your credentials for these tools. After the SuiteCloud SDK tools are upgraded to the next version (25.1 for SuiteCloud IDE Plug- in for WebStorm and SuiteCloud CLI for Java, and 2.1.X for SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio

Code and 2.0.X for SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js), your current credentials file, along with your locally

saved credentials for any of the SuiteCloud SDK tools, will not be valid. You will be required to reauthenticate to use these tools again. Removal of OAuth 1.0 Token-Based Authentication Support in SuiteCloud SDK Starting February 2025, SuiteCloud SDK version 24.1 will no longer be available for new installations.

Version 24.1 is the last version that supports Token-Based Authentication (TBA) and OAuth 1.0. Existing

installations will continue to work, however, OAuth 1.0 support will eventually be removed from SuiteCloud SDK version 24.1 and older versions. At that point, version 24.1 and older versions of the tools will stop working. If you are still using older versions of the SuiteCloud SDK tools, you should upgrade to the latest version as soon as possible. The latest version of the SuiteCloud SDK tools use OAuth 2.0 protocol for authorization. For more information, see Removal of OAuth 1.0 Token-Based Authentication Support in SuiteCloud SDK (SuiteAnswer ID 1019514). 2025.1 SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code Is Not

Yet Available

The 2025.1 SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code is targeted for release in February 2025.

SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code provides a UI for NetSuite platform development using

SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF). You can install the SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio

Code, develop SuiteCloud projects, and deploy them to your account. For more information, see the help topic SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code Overview.

SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code is an open-source project published in GitHub. To view its

code and get the latest changes, see SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code GitHub Repository. 2025.1 SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js Is Not Yet Available The 2025.1 SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js is targeted for release in February 2025.

SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js is a tool that you can use with your own integrated development environment

Change

SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js is an open-source project published in GitHub. To view its code and get the latest changes, see SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js GitHub Repository. 2025.1 SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm Is Not Yet

Available

The 2025.1 SuiteCloud IDE plug-in for WebStorm is targeted for release in February 2025.

SuiteCloud IDE plug-in for WebStorm is an integrated development environment (IDE) that is packaged

for NetSuite platform development. It provides a UI for SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF). You can download SuiteCloud IDE plug-in for WebStorm as a plug-in installation, develop SuiteCloud projects, and deploy them to your account. For more information, see the help topic SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm Overview. 2025.1 SuiteCloud CLI for Java Is Not Yet Available The 2025.1 SuiteCloud CLI for Java is targeted for release in February 2025.

SuiteCloud CLI for Java is the SDF command-line interface. You can use the CLI for Java with your own

SuiteScript Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Refer to the following sections for details on SuiteScript updates for NetSuite 2025.1:

Removal of the Ext JS Library in 2025.1
Changes to Audience Settings in Script Deployments and Single Page Applications
Removal of Request Process for Single Page Applications
SuiteScript Generative AI API: New Methods in the N/llm Module
Additional Changes to Hidden Files

Removal of the Ext JS Library in 2025.1

As of NetSuite 2025.1, the unsupported Ext JS library is no longer available in NetSuite. The removal of the Ext JS library may break external references to it after your account is upgraded to 2025.1. If your customizations rely on the Ext JS library’s API despite its lack of support, you must do one of the following to ensure that your customizations will continue to work after your account is upgraded to 2025.1:

Adjust your code to work without the use of the Ext JS library.
To continue using the Ext JS library, you must replace it with your own external instance of the library. After you have made script updates, you can test these updates by requesting a change to your account that will remove the Ext JS library before your account is upgraded to 2025.1. To test your changes and preview the upcoming removal of the Ext JS library, contact NetSuite Customer Support for assistance. Change Changes to Audience Settings in Script Deployments and

Single Page Applications

Important: This feature is targeted to be available in February 2025. Previously, selecting all roles on the audience setting for scripts and single page applications (SPAs) meant that any role (internal and external) had access to the script or SPA. Starting 2025.1, when you select all roles on the audience setting for SuiteScript scripts and SPAs, only internal roles are selected. Additionally, internal and external roles are now shown in two separate multiselect fields. When your account is upgraded to 2025.1, expect the following changes to the UI and SDF XML reference for script deployments and SPAs:

Changes to Script Audience Settings
Changes to SPA Audience Settings

Changes to Script Audience Settings

The Audience subtab on the script deployment record now includes separate lists for internal roles and external roles:

Internal Roles – Includes a multiselect field with a list of internal roles. You can select individual roles from the list or check the Select All box to make the script available to all internal roles.
External Roles – Includes a multiselect field with a list of external roles, which you can select individually. For the scriptdeployment structured field within each script type SDF custom object, the behavior of the following fields has changed:
allroles – Setting this field to T (true) means that all internal roles are selected.
audslctrole – You can use this field to specify roles individually, including any external roles, in the script audience. If the allroles is set to T, any internal roles listed in the audslctrole field will be ignored.

These changes apply to the following custom objects for script types:

clientscript
massupdatescript
portlet
restlet
suitelet
usereventscript
workflowactionscript

Changes to SPA Audience Settings

The Audience Setup window on the SPA Management page now includes separate lists for internal roles and external roles:

Change

Internal Roles – Includes a multiselect field with a list of internal roles. You can select individual roles from the list or check the All Internal Roles box to make the SPA available to all internal roles.
External Roles – Includes a multiselect field with a list of external roles, which you can select individually.

For the singlepageapp SDF custom object, the behavior of the following fields have changed:

audienceallroles – Setting this field to T (true) means that all internal roles are selected.
audienceroles – You can use this field to specify roles individually, including any external roles, in the SPA audience. If the audienceallroles is set to T, any internal roles listed in the audienceroles field will be ignored.

Removal of Request Process for Single Page Applications

Starting January 2025, the request process for the Single Page Applications (SPA) feature has been removed. You can now develop SPAs if you meet the following minimum requirements:

Must use SuiteCloud Development Framework (SDF) SuiteApp projects
Must use SuiteScript 2.1

SPAs are web applications that load a single HTML page and dynamically update that page when the user

interacts with it. In NetSuite, you can create SPAs with NetSuite look and feel using the NetSuite User Interface Framework (UIF), and with full SuiteScript support and SDF deployment capabilities. For more information, see the help topic Single Page Applications. SuiteScript Generative AI API: New Methods in the N/llm Module

Two new methods are available in the N/llm module:

llm.evaluatePrompt(options) – Takes the ID of an existing prompt and values for variables used in the prompt and returns the response from the large language model (LLM). You can use this method to evaluate a prompt by providing values for any variables that the prompt uses. The resulting prompt is sent to the LLM, and this method returns the LLM response, similar to the llm.generateText(options) method. When unlimited usage mode is used, this method accepts the OCI configuration parameters. For more information, see the help topic Using Your Own OCI Configuration for SuiteScript Generative AI APIs.
llm.evaluatePrompt.promise(options) – Provides an asynchronous version of the llm.evaluatePrompt(options) method.

These new methods provide more options to interact with LLMs using SuiteScript Generative AI APIs. For

more information about these APIs, see the help topic SuiteScript 2.x Generative AI APIs.

Additional Changes to Hidden Files

The stack property of Error instances and the .toString()method on functions will be functionally discontinued in hidden files. The following changes will take place in NetSuite 2025.1, with an estimated date of June 2025:

Usage of functionName.toString() where functionName is part of a hidden file will result in an error.
The stack property of an Error instance (i.e., Error.stack) will no longer show the trace of a function if it is a part of a hidden file. Change

Files are considered hidden if any of the following is true:

The file record in the File Cabinet has the Hide in SuiteBundle preference enabled.
Your SuiteApp has a hiding.xml file in the InstallationPreferences folder with the “HIDING” defaultAction set to “HIDE.”
Your SuiteApp has attribute files under FileCabinet > SuiteApps > com.netsuite.project > .attributes where the hideinbundle field is set to ‘T’. As a script owner, if you use functionName.toString()or Error instances’ stack property in a hidden file, you must remove such usages to prevent the script functionality from breaking in target accounts.

SuiteTalk Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Behavioral Change of 2025.1 Endpoint Regarding Complex

Type Elements

Starting with the 2025.1 endpoint, elements of complex type are ordered so that parent complex elements precede elements of given complex type. This means that additional content model particles are added at the end. The behavior of previous endpoints does not change and additional content model particles remain at the beginning. SOAP Web Services Version 2025.1 SOAP web services version 2025.1 is not yet available. When SOAP web services version 2025.1 becomes available, version 2018.1 will be retired. For information about the supported generally available versions, see the help topic Support for Existing WSDL Versions.

Araxis Merge Diff File for the 2025.1 Endpoint

The Araxis Merge diff file highlights the schema changes between the 2024.2 and 2025.1 endpoints.

About the Araxis Merge Diff File
Using the Araxis Merge Diff File

About the Araxis Merge Diff File

NetSuite publishes an Araxis Merge diff file for every new endpoint. Depending on the scope of the release, changes described in the Araxis Merge diff file may include:

Change

New record types
Elements (fields) that have been added, removed, or changed
New sublists (lists)
New joins
New search filters and search return columns
New platform operations Using the Araxis Merge Diff File Important: The screenshots in this section are for illustrative purposes only. They do not reflect changes related to any specific endpoint. The Araxis Merge diff file is generated using Araxis Merge. When you click the Araxis Merge diff file link (when it is available), a page appears that offers an overview of all schema changes. The following screenshot shows how this summary page looks. In this example, the highlighted rows indicate that an XSD has been modified. The integers at the center indicate the number of changed lines in the file. To see the exact differences, click the report link in the column on the right or click the name of the file in either column. When you click any of these links, the Araxis Merge diff file shows a page with two columns. The previous version of the file is displayed on the left and the new version is displayed on the right. Changed elements are highlighted. For example, the following screenshot shows an excerpt from the report on platform.commonTypes.xsd. Notice the addition of two values to the PermissionCode enumeration: _accessPaymentAuditLog and _advancedPDFHTMLTemplates.

Change

The Araxis Merge diff file also shows changes to data types. The following screenshot is a snapshot of transactions.sales.xsd. Notice that the chargeType element changed from an enumeration to a RecordRef. 2025.1 SOAP Schema Browser The 2025.1 SOAP Schema Browser is not yet available.

Taxation Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Invoice Time Items and Expense Report Detail Items Preferences in SuiteTax
- Brazil Reports Enhancements
- SuiteTax Latam Engine Enhancements
- SuiteTax Latam Engine - Brazil Records Enhancements Invoice Time Items and Expense Report Detail Items

Preferences in SuiteTax

Starting from 2025.1, the following preferences will be supported in SuiteTax to enable finance users to simplify the presentation of items on transactions:

Combine time items on invoices — This preference will combine time items with the same service item into one total on invoices.
Combine detail items on expense reports — This preference will group expense lines based on the same expense category allowing for consolidated accounting entries. Previously, these preferences could not be enabled together with the SuiteTax feature. It was not possible to combine items lines into one line to manage how items are presented on invoices and expense reports.

UI Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Updates to Text Enhance

Change

Partial Text Enhance: You can apply supported Text Enhance actions to content you select in a text area field, a long text field, or a rich text field. For example, if you are working on an email message and only want to clean up part of the email message, you can select the part you want to clean up and a menu displays the available actions. For more information, see the help topic Text Enhance.

Enhancements to the Redwood Experience Theme

The Redwood Experience theme, which represents a new user interface design, is now available for additional pages, portlets, and features:

Pages Portlets Features

Analytics Settings portlet ■ Bulk processes
Email Template ■ Import
File Cabinet ■ Printing
Help Center
Reports
Saved Searches
Search Results
Set Preferences
Setup Manager
Time Tracking The following enhancements were added to the Redwood Experience theme:
To differentiate among roles, you can now change the color of the user name and role in the header. Go to Home > Set Preferences and on the Appearance tab, set the color for your role in the Color Theme field.
To differentiate among accounts, including production, release preview, sandbox, and development, the header strip of each account is now in a different color.

Change

If you decide to disable the Redwood Experience theme, a questionnaire appears asking you why you are disabling the theme. This information will help us improve your experience with NetSuite. We appreciate your feedback. By default, the Redwood Experience theme is now enabled for all users of newly provisioned accounts. For more information about the Redwood Experience theme, see the help topic Personal Preferences for Appearance.

New Product Recommendation Messages

You can now see recommendation messages for different NetSuite features directly in the product. These recommendations are displayed at the top of the page. By default, recommendation messages are enabled. You can disable the recommendations by checking the Don't show again box in the message. Note: Only a user with the Administrator role can disable all recommendation messages for the whole account by clearing the Show Product Recommendations box at Setup > Company > General Preferences.

CSV Import Updates in NetSuite 2025.1

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 GMT

Newly Supported Record Types for CSV Import Change
Audience Redesign Impact on Sharing Saved Imports

Account Setup Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

New Specialized User: CRM Role

The Specialized User: CRM role is a standard role with predefined permissions which enables you to manage sales, CPQ, marketing, support, and other CRM activities in NetSuite. Use this role to work with

Campaigns, Opportunities, Quotes, Sales Orders, Cases, and other customer-related records, and CPQ

New Specialized User: View and Approve Role

When the new Specialized User: View and Approve role is assigned to a user, it grants limited access to NetSuite. Users assigned with this role can do basic tasks, such as viewing or approving reports, but are prevented from completing more advanced tasks. For example, this role could be granted to a manager who needs to view the team's performance and approve requisitions, but doesn't need to do any other task within NetSuite. You can customize this role to remove permissions for certain tasks. This role prevents the use of any functionality that is not included in it. For more information about roles, see the help topic NetSuite Roles Overview.

Accounting Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated September 2, 2024.

Advanced Revenue Management in Configuration Mode

NetSuite 2024.2 introduces Advanced Revenue Management in Configuration Mode. This mode lets you configure Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) and Advanced Revenue Management (Revenue Allocation) without affecting your current revenue recognition process. When Advanced Revenue Management in Configuration Mode is enabled, you cannot use Advanced

Revenue Management (ARM) to recognize revenue. This helps ensure your ARM setup is complete before

your order-to-revenue workflows use ARM. With Advanced Revenue Management in Configuration Mode enabled, your revenue recognition process will remain the same as it was before enabling Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials).

Advanced Revenue Management in Configuration Mode is automatically enabled when you enable the

Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) feature. To enable the Advanced Revenue Management

(Essentials) feature, go to Setup > Company > Setup Tasks > Enable Features (Administrator). On the Accounting subtab, in the Revenue Accounting section, check the Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) box. After configuring Advanced Revenue Management, you can disable the Advance Revenue Management in Configuration Mode feature. When you disable this feature, all subsequently created transactions are processed using Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials).

Advanced Revenue Management in Configuration Mode is automatically disabled for existing Advanced

Revenue Management (Essentials) users and cannot be enabled. This feature does not affect functionality

for existing users who have already enabled Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials). For more information about setting up ARM, see the help topics Setup for Advanced Revenue

Management (Essentials) and Setup for Advanced Revenue Management (Revenue Allocation). For more

information about this feature, see Advanced Revenue Management in Configuration Mode. Advanced Revenue Management and Prepay with

Drawdown Integration

The Advanced Revenue Management (Essentials) feature works together with the new Prepay with

Drawdown feature. This integration lets you accurately recognize revenue for both prepay and usage

elements. For more information about the Prepay with Drawdown feature, see Subscription Rating: Prepaid Usage with Monthly Consumption. The Prepay with Drawdown feature lets customers pay a specified amount in advance before using the service lines in their contract. The upfront payment is the sales amount on the prepay element, and it is fully billed at the start of the subscription. When usages are recorded, the rate of the service is used to calculate the amount subtracted from the prepay element and transferred to the usage elements. Invoices are then created to decrease the sales and bill amount on the prepay element, thereby increasing the sales and bill amount on the usage elements. At the end of the contract, the service provider can refund any remaining amount on the prepay element or recognize the remaining amount without a refund. To enable the Prepaid with Drawdown feature, go to Setup > Company > Setup Tasks > Enable Features (Administrator). On the Transactions subtab, in the Billing section, check the Prepay with Drawdown box. Prepay with Drawdown can only be enabled if the Advanced Subscription Billing feature is enabled and the Create Revenue Elements for Subscription Revisions accounting preference is disabled. For more information about this feature, see Revenue Recognition and Prepay with Drawdown and Example of Prepay with Drawdown and Revenue Recognition.

SuiteScript 2.x Support in Custom GL Lines Plugin

NetSuite 2024.2 now includes SuiteScript 2.x support for the Custom GL Lines plugin. This includes a new interface function, customizeGlImpact(context), that you can use exclusively for SuiteScript 2.x implementations. For detailed information about using this function, see the following articles:

Custom GL Lines Plug-in Overview
Custom GL Lines Plug-In Interface Definition
customizeGlImpact(context)

Authentication Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Outbound Single Sign-on (SuiteSignOn) End of Support

Targeted for NetSuite 2025.1

As of NetSuite 2024.1, support for the Outbound Single Sign-on (SuiteSignOn) feature ended in non- production accounts, such as sandbox accounts. As of NetSuite 2025.1, this feature will no longer be supported in production accounts. More proactive feature change notifications will be sent to prepare you for this change before the release of NetSuite 2025.1. As an alternative to SuiteSignOn, you can use the NetSuite as OIDC Provider feature. For more information, see the help topic NetSuite as OIDC Provider. Consider switching to the NetSuite as OIDC Provider feature as soon as possible.

Banking Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

New Service Provider Supports More U.S. and Canadian Financial Institutions
Cash 360 Enhancements
Payment Automation Enhancements
Australia Bank Feeds Enhancements
Brazil Localization Enhancements

Commerce Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Commerce Website Management and Performance

This release note was updated September 16, 2024. website:

User Agent Detection Optimization

First-load performance of SuiteCommerce web stores has been improved following the introduction of user agent detection to the SEO page generator. Previously, when any user—whether shopper or web crawler—visited your SuiteCommerce web store and requested an uncached web page, the SEO page generator would prerender the page first.

Now, with user agent detection, the SEO page generator only prerenders pages for web crawlers. As

shoppers now skip the prerendering process, most shoppers will benefit from improved performance that will reduce time to first byte (TTFB) and first contentful paint (FCP) times, which will benefit their user experience and provide an SEO boost.

User agent detection optimization is now available by default in all accounts and will be activated

progressively on all SuiteCommerce websites over the next few weeks, beginning on September 16, 2024. No action is required from you. For more information about the SEO page generator, see the help topic SEO Page Generator. Commerce Website Setup

SSL Support for Promotional URL Domains

SSL support is now available for promotional URL domains. Since secure domains are now an industry standard, SSL support is now available for all domain types in NetSuite. To secure your promotional URL domain:

Go to Commerce > Hosting > Domains > and click Edit next to the promotional URL domain you want to secure.
In the Certificate section, check the Use SSL Certificate to Secure Domain box. Additional certificate-related fields are displayed so you can specify the type of certificate you want to use.
If you want Oracle NetSuite to obtain a domain validated (DV) certificate for your domain, click the Automatic button and then check the box to confirm acceptance of the automatic certificate terms and conditions.
If you want to obtain a certificate from your preferred CA, see the help topic Manual Certificates for instructions.
Click Save. For more information, see the help topic Secure Your Domain.

SC/SCMA/SCA — SuiteCommerce Solutions

The 2024.2 release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced will be available in a future release. For information about the current release, see the help topic 2024.1 Release of SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced.

Commerce Themes

Complete release notes on the latest themes for your SuiteCommerce and SuiteCommerce Advanced site are available here: Commerce Themes Release Notes.

Commerce Extensions

Complete release notes on the latest extensions for your SuiteCommerce, SuiteCommerce MyAccount, and SuiteCommerce Advanced site are available here: Commerce Extensions Release Notes.

SuiteCommerce InStore

Release Summary

SCIS 2024.2 provides enhancements and fixes for processing that occurs in the background. The release

has no new features or functional changes that are visible at the point-of-sale (POS).

CPQ Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated September 30, 2024.

Work in Synchronous Mode with the runAction() Function

The runAction() function—a client-side function— now supports the synchronous mode in NetSuite CPQ

Configurator (version 1.4.5). The function's syntax has been updated to take an object as a parameter. As

properties, the object includes the server-side function code and the new async parameter. With this parameter, you can define whether client-side actions can make requests to server-side actions synchronously or asynchronously. Because runAction() continues to work asynchronously by default, you can omit the async parameter when true. If you want to work in synchronous mode, set the async parameter to false. Use the following syntax to work with runAction() in synchronous mode: runAction({code:'SERVER_SIDE_ACTION_CODE', async: false}); To work in asynchronous mode, use the following syntax: runAction({code:'SERVER_SIDE_ACTION_CODE'}); Previously, runAction() could only work asynchronously. The previous syntax is still valid to work in asynchronous mode: runAction('SERVER_SIDE_ACTION_CODE'); Note: When creating new client-side actions, use the new syntax. Work in Standard Mode When Creating and Copying

Records by Scripting

The createRecord() and copyRecord() functions now work in standard mode by default. In NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.4.5), these server-side functions include a new dynamic parameter. This parameter is false by default and can be omitted when working in standard mode. If you want to work in dynamic mode, set the dynamic parameter to true. For more information about standard and dynamic modes, see the help topic SuiteScript 2.x Standard and Dynamic Modes. Note: Use dynamic mode only if you experience issues when creating or copying records in standard mode. The following piece of code provides an example of working with the createRecord() function in dynamic mode: createRecord({ type: 'inventoryitem', fields: { itemid: 'Desk-Lamp-A170300', displayname: 'Desk Lamp', subsidiary: ["1"], includechildren: true, costcategory: 1, taxschedule: 1 }, sublists: [ { itemvendor: [ { vendor: 163, subsidiary: 1 }, { vendor: 164, subsidiary: 1 } ] } ], dynamic: true }).then(function(data) { console.log('Data: ', data) }); This piece of code shows an example of working with the copyRecord() function in dynamic mode: copyRecord({ id: 496, type: 'inventoryitem', fields: { itemid: 'Desk-Lamp-A170300', displayname: 'Desk Lamp', subsidiary: ["1"], includechildren: true, costcategory: 1, taxschedule: 1 }, lists: { itemvendor: [ { vendor: 9, subsidiary: 2 }, { vendor: 412, subsidiary: 1 } ] }, dynamic: true }) Previously, createRecord() and copyRecord() only worked in dynamic mode.

Integration with NetSuite SuiteBilling

NetSuite CPQ Configurator (version 1.3.4) now integrates with NetSuite SuiteBilling to include subscriptions for products or services in the configuration process. To add subscriptions to transactions with NetSuite CPQ Configurator, create subscriptions with creation records. Then, link them to subscription plans through mapping records. Before adding subscriptions to transactions, go to CPQ > Configurator > Settings. Under the Submit subtab, check the Update transaction entity box (version 1.3.5). This option loads subscriptions to transactions after the configuration is submitted. Note: Enabling this option may be incompatible with custom scripts deployed on transactions.

CRM Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

View Key Customer Information about the New NetSuite

Customer 360 Page

NetSuite Customer 360 provides you with a complete, 360-degree view of the customer, including their financial information, transaction history, and other related data. The Customer 360 page can be accessed in the following ways:

By clicking the View Customer 360 link on Customer Record.
By clicking the Switch to Customer 360 View link on Customer Dashboard.

Customer 360 collects all current information from across the business and displays it on a single

page, thereby providing you with actionable insights. Using this information, you can easily track all the interactions made with the customer, their financial position and profitability to the business, purchasing trends, and more.

Information about the Customer 360 page is presented as follows:

Recent Transactions: A list of transactions with the customer, latest at the top. These interactions include invoices, sales orders, credit memos, and returns.
Product Recommendations: An AI-generated list of products that can be recommended to the customer.
Sales This Year: The total of all sales made to the customer in the current year, in US dollars.
All-Time Sales: The total of all sales made to the customer since the first ever transaction, in US dollars.
Customer Profitability: The profitability of the customer to your organization in percentage.
Top-selling items: A list of items purchased the most by the customer.

New Specialized User: CRM Role

Campaigns, Opportunities, Quotes, Sales Orders, Cases, and other customer-related records, and CPQ

functionality. You can customize this role to remove permissions or grant reduced access. This role prevents the use of any functionality that is not included in it. For more information, see the help topic Specialized User: CRM Role. Ability to Restrict Access to External Case Response Page in CRM A new security preference has been added to the Customer Support and Service feature. The preference enables or disables access to the External Case Response Page for your customers. The External Case Response Page is a web page that contains information about a case. If you check the External Case Response Page box, anyone with a link can access the web page. If you clear the box, login to NetSuite is required to access the web page. The External Case Response Page box is cleared by default. Note: This preference is available only when the Customer Support and Service feature is enabled for an account. For more information, see the help topic Setting Customer Service Preferences. Change in Responding to Customer Messages in Case

Management

The preference Receive Customer Replies in Case List Only in Case Management has been renamed to Prevent Support Reps from Receiving Customer Replies by Email. This preference determines whether the support representative assigned to a case can receive email copies of customer replies. If you check the Prevent Support Reps from Receiving Customer Replies by Email box, support reps do not receive an email copy of customer’s reply to a case. If you clear the box, the customer’s reply is sent to the support rep by email and stored in the case record. The Prevent Support Reps from Receiving Customer Replies by Email box is cleared by default. Note: This release does not change the current state of the preference in your account. For more information, see the help topic Setting Customer Service Preferences.

Change to which Users can Create Events on a Calendar

As of 2024.2, users can create events only on their own calendars. However, users can manage events on other people's calendars if the owner of the calendar has granted them permission to do so. Similarly, only users who are members of a group can create events for that group. For more details, see the help topic Creating a New Event Record. Text Enhance Clean Up Action Added to More Fields in

NetSuite

Text Enhance is a generative AI capability that helps you with writing tasks. The Clean Up action of Text

Enhance has been added to nearly 200 fields in NetSuite. For more details, see Enhancements to Text Enhance.

Employee Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Post Consolidated Payroll Batch Totals to the General

Ledger

In NetSuite 2024.2, SuitePeople U.S. Payroll administrators can hide individual employee paycheck totals when posting payroll batch totals to the general ledger. These totals are hidden to roles which should not see them. To turn this option on, go to the Accounting Preferences > General Ledger page. For more information, see the help topic General Ledger.

Link to Payroll Compliance Updates

In NetSuite 2024.2, SuitePeople U.S. Payroll administrators and managers can now view payroll compliance update articles in SuiteAnswers by clicking links in NetSuite on the following pages:

Payroll and HR page > Payroll Links portlet
Update Payroll Information page

Inventory Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Review Item Line/Inventory Detail Quantity Mismatch Task

Note: This new task for the Period Close Checklist is targeted to be available by Fall 2024. NetSuite 2024.2 provides the Review Item Line/Inventory Detail Quantity Mismatch task for the Period

Close checklist. This new task displays a list of inventory posting transactions that contain quantity

mismatches between item lines and their associated inventory detail. Optionally, you can view each transaction and resolve the mismatches. Within the current accounting period, you must mark the task complete before you can proceed to the next task, Review Negative Inventory. For more information, see the help topic Inventory Tasks on the Period Close Checklist.

Warehouse Management Enhancements

In NetSuite 2024.2, you can view the time in the following date fields on wave transactions:

Created Date
Released Date
Completed Date Using both date and time, you can prioritize orders as you process them on the app and view reports.. To display the time in these fields, NetSuite WMS follows your Time Zone and Time Format preferences. For more information, see the help topic General Personal Preferences. The updated Wave saved search now includes the Printed Pick Ticket filtering criteria. You can set this filter to generate a list of waves with or without printed pick tickets. For more information, see the help topic Printing Pick Tickets from Wave Transactions.

Renaming of the WMS Limited Access Role

The WMS Limited Access role will be renamed to Specialized User - WMS. Within the NetSuite UI, all references to the role will be renamed. The name change will not affect custom roles that you have created based on the standard role. For availability and more information about this role, see the help topic Warehouse Management Roles and Permissions.

Cycle Counts Updates

The new Generate from Plan mobile process enables you to create inventory cycle count tasks on the app. You can generate counts from cycle count plans that you create within the NetSuite UI. To further enhance cycle counting on the app, you can activate the Start and complete counts on app rule. After you generate and release inventory counts, you can start them to make them available to counters. When they process and complete the cycle counts, the app automatically submits them for approval.

Scheduling Bin Replenishment

You can create and run schedules for bin replenishment on the NetSuite UI. When you create a schedule, you can specify the frequency, start time, and end time. You can receive notifications for successful or failed runs. Bin replenishment tasks generated from a schedule become available for processing on the app. For more information, see the help topic Replenishment.

Lot Autonumbering for Work Order Assembly

The Autogenerate Lot Numbers? rule now enables you to generate lot numbers within the Build Assembly mobile process for work orders. When you enable autonumbering for a lot item, you can generate lot numbers during assembly build processing on the app.

Bar Code Scanning for Bulk Serial Numbers

The Scan bar codes with bulk serial numbers? rule enables you to scan an item bar code with multiple serial numbers. When you receive a purchase order, you can scan the serialized item bar code without entering or scanning each serial number. On the associated item receipt, you can review the serial numbers of a received item.

Changing Bins During Order Picking

For all the sales or transfer order picking flows, you can pick partial quantities of an item from different

bins. You can enter the quantity to pick from the first bin, and then tap Other Bin to choose another bin to pick from. For more information, see the help topic Picking Orders. To activate the new system rules available in NetSuite 2024.2, see the help topic System Rules for NetSuite WMS.

Supply Planning Enhancements

The 2024.2 NetSuite Supply Planning release includes updates to the Supply Planning Workbench, Planning Repository, and more. These updates provide new supply planning options and improvements to the Planning Engine logic and Workday Calendar.

Remove a Supply Order from the Repository
Combine Minimum Order Quantity with Lot Sizing Options
Planning Workbench Filter Action Messages for Firm Supply Orders
Extend Limit for Demand Plan Horizon and Purchase Lead Time Beyond One Year
Plan Definition Pre–Check to Report Cycle Errors
Workday Calendar for Purchase Orders

Remove a Supply Order from the Repository

To fix transaction issues in the transactional system, refresh the repository to remove the transaction from the planning repository so the engine could run cleanly. The 2024.2 enhancement enables you to open the transaction record and check the new Exclude from Supply Planning box to remove the transaction from the most current planning repository version. A system refresh is not needed. For more information, see the help topic Entering a Transfer Order.

Combine Minimum Order Quantity with Lot Sizing Options

This enhancement enables customers to pair Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) with any lot sizing option.

Customers who use MOQ will be migrated to a combination of their MOQ and a lot sizing method of lot

for lot. Customers who use MOQ will have their setup changed to use the lot sizing option with the limit of their current MOQ. To learn more, see .Setting Up Supply Planning Planning Workbench Filter Action Messages for Firm Supply

Orders

For NetSuite 2024.2 Supply Planning, the Supply Planning Workbench View record includes filters for both

firmed and un-firmed orders. The following filters will be available in the workbench to help distinguish between these different action types:

Cancel Firm
Lead Time Threshold
Reschedule In
Reschedule In Firm
Reschedule Out
Reschedule Out Firm
Lead Time Fence Threshold For more information, see the help topic Creating a Planning Workbench View. Extend Limit for Demand Plan Horizon and Purchase Lead Time

Beyond One Year

Previously, the Supply Planning demand plan horizon and purchase lead-time was limited to one year. With the release of NetSuite 2024.2, the time line limit is extended to three years for both the Purchase Lead Time on the Location Attributes/Item Location Configuration record and the Demand Plan Horizon on the Item Demand Plan record.

Plan Definition Pre–Check to Report Cycle Errors

With the release of NetSuite 2024.2, the Supply Planning Event Log displays a link to Cycle Error messages that clearly describes the error setup or transactions that are causing the cycle errors and how to correct the error. Instead of re-running the repository to get rid of this error, you can now exclude this error from your supply plan. For more informaiton, see the help topic Entering a Transfer Order.

Workday Calendar for Purchase Orders

The NetSuite 2024.2 Supply Planning Engine recognizes workday calendar entries for purchase orders. An option on the location record enables you to enforce the workday calendar for work orders, purchase orders, or both. For more information, see the help topic Creating Locations.

Items Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Support for Date Formats in Lot Number Date Elements

Manufacturing Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Restrict Copying Bills of Materials to an Assembly

With the release of NetSuite 2024.2, Manufacturing Bills of Materials (BOM) are no longer included in copied assemblies.

Currently, Bills of Materials are rarely used when creating new assemblies. Copying a BOM that has

similar assembly attributes and then updating the BOM content to suit the assembly produces a different BOM. Since this behavior is inefficient and prone to human error, NetSuite no longer supports creating separate/new Bills of Materials for copied Assemblies.

Manufacturing Enhancements

NetSuite Manufacturing 2024.2, accounts that have enabled the Advanced BOM feature will receive the

following updates for BOM Revision defaults on work orders and assembly build and unbuilds:

Bill of Materials Revision Defaulting on Work Orders
Default BOM Revision Dates on Assembly Build/Unbuild
Correct Work Order Operation Start and End Dates
Actual Production Start Date Completion Transactions
Correction of Work Order Operation Remaining Hours Calculation

Bill of Materials Revision Defaulting on Work Orders

After you define a Forward Scheduling method, the BOM Revision is then set to the Work Order Production Start Date. The Work Order Production Start Date is defined as follows:

When the subsidiary is not defined, the production start date is set to the company time zone date.
When the location and location time zone are not defined, the production start date is set to the subsidiary time zone date.
After the location and location time zone are defined, the production start date is set to the location date. After you define a Backward Scheduling method to determine production dates, the BOM Revision defaults to the Work Order Transaction Date. When the production start date falls on the start or end date of the BOM Revision Effective date range, yu should then use your organization's time zone. The default Work Order BOM Revision uses the production start date which is defined on the work order based on the company location time zone. If the company location time zone does not exist, the subsidiary time zone is used. If the subsidiary time zone does not exist, the company time zone is used.

Default BOM Revision Dates on Assembly Build/Unbuild

When a work order's production start date falls within the Bill of Materials (BOM) revision effective date range, the BOM Revision on a work order is designated as the default BOM Revision.

Assembly BOM Sublist Extended

The following fields were added to the 2024.2 Manufacturing Assembly BOM sublist:

BOM Revision Effective Start Date
BOM Revision Effective End Date

Correct Work Order Operation Start and End Dates

Before NetSuite 2024.2, manufacturing operation start time was set to the work order production start date. Working hour start time was set to the work calendar that was assigned to the first operation's manufacturing work center. The operation end date and time was set according to its length, based on the setup time and run time, and the start of this operation. All operations were then added one after the other. With the release of NetSuite 2024.2, the operation start and end time setting depends on whether these times are set based on completion performed on working or non-working days.

Completion on working days

The start of the operation is set to the beginning of the working day as scheduled on the working calendar.
To set the end of the operation, the remaining operation time is added to the operation start day. If the remaining time is more than the available free completion day working time, the balance is added to the next working day.

Completion on non-working days

The start of the operation is set to the beginning of the working day as scheduled in the working calendar for working days.
To set the end of the operation, the remaining operation time is added to the beginning of the next working day according to the working calendar.

Actual Production Start Date Completion Transactions

Before NetSuite 2024.2, the Actual Production Start Date field in WIP work orders was automatically populated with Issue Components or Completion with Backflush transactions. With the release of NetSuite Manufacturing 2024.2, the Actual Production Start Date is automatically populated based on the completion transaction. Correction of Work Order Operation Remaining Hours

Calculation

Before NetSuite 2024.2, the work order Operation Remaining Hours field was calculated incorrectly because it used planned operation times from the manufacturing routing and then multiplied that amount by the work order quantity. From this number, the system then subtracted the reported completion times. The following updates have been made to the work order operation remaining hour calculation in

NetSuite Manufacturing 2024.2:

To calculate Remaining Time before First Completion:
- Setup time is considered to be part of remaining time only before first completion.
- The system uses the remaining quantity and multiplies it by the Run Time amount and then adds Setup Time.
To calculate Remaining Time after First Completion:
- After the first completion is complete, setup time is not included in Remaining Time amount.
- The system uses the remaining quantity and then multiplies it by the Run Time amount.

Order Management Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Subscription Rating: Prepaid Usage with Monthly

Consumption

Usage-based services reduce the service providers' risk and produce a more steady, predictable income

stream based on the customers' consumption. For this purpose, NetSuite includes a new usage-based pricing model, prepaid usage with monthly consumption. With prepaid usage with monthly consumption, the customer pays a specified amount in advance before using any number of service lines in the contract. When any services are used and the usage is recorded, the rate of the service is used to calculate the amount subtracted from the prepayment amount. For example, service 1 at a rate of $1.50 with quantity of 100 used reduces the prepayment amount by $150.00. When the user has used the amount of their prepayment, the service provider can indicate three possible responses:

NetSuite generates another prepayment amount. (Most common)
NetSuite converts the user to pay as you go, in which each usage service is billed for any usage beyond the prepayment amount. (Somewhat common) This cycle of prepayment and the subtracted usage cost continues until the contract ends. When the contract ends, the service provider can refund any remaining prepayment or recognize the remaining amount without a refund.

SuiteBilling Percent Uplift Field

You can now use a saved search for the percent uplift on the subscription line and change order. Ability to Use Custom Fields When Using the Price Book

Saved Search

Custom price book fields are now available under the Criteria, Results, Available Filter, and Price Book Fields dropdown menus.

Ability to Filter by Price Book in Subscription Search

You can search for specific subscriptions that are using a specific price book. Subscription Plan and Price Book Are Optional When

Creating a Subscription

Subscription plan and price book are no longer required when creating new subscriptions, but instead

can be created using only add-on subscription lines. You can use this feature to create more custom subscriptions without requiring a basic subscription plan. Email Alert for Changes to Subscription, Subscription Line, or Change Order In the email section in a saved search for subscription, subscription line, and subscription change order,there is a new preference, Send Email Alerts When Records Are Created / Updated. When it is checked and a subscription, subscription line, or subscription change order is created or updated, the user receives an email alert. Subscription Total Contract Value and Service Type TCV

Metrics

On the subscription page, there is a new summary section that shows the total contract value, pending

total contract value, and total active contract value per service type. These new metrics are searchable and can be viewed in scripting, which gives you more flexibility in reporting pending or active revenue. Subscription Management: Pricing Detail on Charge and

Invoice

To help end customers understand the amount they are being charged, the invoice and charges now contain the quantity to amount breakdowns, which you can add to your PDF documents.

Purchasing Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Enhancements to Bill Capture View the Bill Capture New Feature Preview (Article available only in English).

Scanned Vendor Bills Page Improvements

You can now upload PDFs of more than 5 pages. For best performance, limit files to 30 pages.
Both drag and drop and emailed files that failed to upload can now be deleted. This makes it easier to locate files on the Scanned Vendor Bills Page and reduces space used in your File Cabinet.

Review Scanned Bill Page Improvements

Scanned bill information is now overwritten with content from a Purchase Order (PO) when a PO is linked. A new preference is available to select whether the content requires your review or if the bill should be created automatically. To manage this preference, go to Setup > Accounting > Bill Capture Preferences > Review Page Field Sourcing.
You can now delete uploaded files directly from the Review Scanned Bill page, without having to go back to the Scanned Vendor Bills page. You can also delete multiple item lines and expense lines at the same time.
Custom segment filtering and sourcing is now supported. This includes custom segments in primary information, item lines, and expense lines.
All fields on the Review Scanned Bill page now support type-ahead functionality.
A warning now appears if PO and Review Scanned Bill page item and expense amounts do not match.
When reviewing items and expenses, the PO popup window now shows the item and expense name in the header for better clarity.
For linked POs, item description, units, and rate are now carried from the PO.
There are several improvements to subsidiary, vendor, and location mapping logic to improve accuracy. For example, sender email address, customer address, and customer zip code are now considered during mapping. For more information, see the help topic Email or Upload Vendor Bill Files Into NetSuite Using Bill Capture.

SuiteAnalytics Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Upcoming Removal of the NetSuite.com Data Source

A process for SuiteAnalytics Connect has started to remove the NetSuite.com data source. Start transitioning to the NetSuite2.com as soon as possible to avoid disruption when this change occurs. The removal process is planned as follows:

When your NetSuite account is upgraded to 2025.1, the NetSuite.com data source will still be available, but will no longer be supported. This means that as of 2025.1, support cases requesting bug fixes or performance enhancements for the NetSuite.com data source will not be considered. The only exception is if the data source is down.
When your NetSuite account is upgraded to 2026.1, the NetSuite.com data source will no longer be available. The NetSuite2.com data source solves some previous inconsistencies in data exposure between saved searches and reporting. Data exposed in the NetSuite2.com data source is consistent with the

SuiteAnalytics Workbook. NetSuite2.com also improves security, using role-based access control, and

supporting OAuth 2.0 and token-based authentication. The NetSuite2.com data source also uses SuiteQL, a query language that provides advanced capabilities and restricts the SQL functions that can be used. For more information, see the help topic Changing from NetSuite.com to NetSuite2.com.

Export Pivot Tables to an Excel File

You can now export most Workbook pivot tables to an Excel XLSX file. This export capability enables you to export pivot tables to a standard spreadsheet format with no modifications, and open them in a spreadsheet application. For more information, see the help topic Pivot Tab. SuiteApps (Bundles) Released by NetSuite

Accounting SuiteApps

This release note was updated August 17, 2024.

Following are the 2024.2 accounting enhancements to SuiteApps:

Benchmark 360 Enhancements
Approval Information Enhancements
Benchmark 360 SuiteApp Now Available in the SuiteApp Marketplace
Transaction Line Distribution Enhancements

Benchmark 360 Enhancements

The Benchmark 360 SuiteApp v1.0.1 contains the following enhancements:

Updated Currency Symbol for Benchmark Data- The system now displays the USD currency symbol for Revenue per FTE values when the currency value is in USD. Previously, the correct currency symbol for the benchmark data does not reflect for currencies with no exchange rate support in NetSuite.
Updated Benchmark 360 Workbook and Dataset Names- The Benchmark 360 labels for the KPI workbook names on the Preferences page are shortened to B360 due to the character limitations in the system. For example, Benchmark 360 Days Cash On Hand is now B360 Days Cash On Hand.
Additional Graph Legend Behavior- If the benchmark data currency is different from the currency of the KPI actual, an em dash (—) is shown in the variance of a KPI tile. Additionally, only the KPI actual value is shown but not the gauge chart for the KPI actual. Previously, if an em dash is shown in the graph, it indicates one of the following scenarios:
- There are no transactions related to the KPI
- There are errors in the workbook
- There is no workbook selected for a KPI
- The target value is negative For more information, see the help topic Benchmark 360.

Approval Information Enhancements

SuiteApprovals version 7.02.9 lets you fix transaction records to ensure updates to fields. Specifically, you can fix failed updates for the Approval Status and Next Approver fields. When a transaction contains a high volume of line items, it can take several minutes before the SuiteApp completes updating the Approval Status and Next Approver fields. This behavior causes an issue when the transaction record is approved before the update to the field is complete. approval information update failed. The banner message varies based on the current user. If you are a final approver, the banner message contains instructions on how to fix the document. If you are not a final approver, the banner message informs you that an email is sent to the final approver to fix the document.

Transaction Failed to Update Email Notification – When you open a transaction, an email notification is sent one time only to the final approver about the transaction that failed to update.
Update Approval Information Button – When the final approver opens an affected transaction, this button is included on the record.

Clicking this button updates the following fields:

Approval Status
Next Approver For more information, see the help topic Updating the Approval Information of a Record. Benchmark 360 SuiteApp Now Available in the SuiteApp

Marketplace

The Benchmark 360 SuiteApp enables you to benchmark your company’s key metrics against other companies in the same industry and region to improve your performance. The SuiteApp provides a dashboard where you can view important industry benchmark data such as Top 25%, Median, and Bottom 25% for five preselected KPIs. The benchmark KPIs include Days Cash on Hand, Days Sales Outstanding, Days Payable Outstanding, Employee Turnover Rate, and Revenue per FTE. NetSuite sources the industry benchmarks for these KPIs from American Productivity and Quality Center (APQC). You can use the Benchmark 360 SuiteApp to:

Review industry benchmark for five KPIs included in the dashboard
Define performance metrics and set adjustable target values for each metric
Compare performance metrics against other companies in the same industry and region
Map different subsidiaries to the corresponding industry and region to view benchmark data
View industry benchmark data by region for a selected subsidiary
View NetSuite products and features relative to your industry and region to improve your KPIs
Use NetSuite contents and articles as guides to implement best business practices For more information about the SuiteApp, see the help topic Benchmark 360.

Transaction Line Distribution Enhancements

Transaction Line Distribution SuiteApp includes enhancements for the following versions:

Transaction Line Distribution Version 1.2.0
Transaction Line Distribution Version 1.1.2 Transaction Line Distribution Version 1.2.0 Transaction Line Distribution SuiteApp version 1.2.0 is not yet available.

Transaction Line Distribution Version 1.1.2

The error in printing transactions is fixed. In View mode, you can now click Print from the Actions list and successfully print your transactions.

Issue Fix on Governance Limit Usage In the previous version, adding or editing transactions that had more than 1000 lines resulted in usage limit error. This issue is fixed in version 1.1.2.
Update to Classification Section Fields In this version of the SuiteApp, the following fields in the Classification section are now optional:
- Department
- Class
- Location For more information about the SuiteApp, see the help topic Transaction Line Distribution. Administration SuiteApps Following is the 2024.2 administration enhancement to SuiteApps: Compliance 360 SuiteApp Enhancements Compliance 360 Version 1.1.0 Not Yet Available Compliance 360 Version 1.1.0 is not yet available. Changes to the Personal Information Access Logs Workbook in

Compliance 360

Note: Currently, these changes are visible only in the Personal Information Access Logs workbook. The Activity Log and the Compliance 360 dashboard will be updated later in the 2024.2 release. The Personal Information Access Logs workbook can now track actions performed using SuiteScript and SuiteQL. In addition, two new columns have been added to the Personal Information Access Logs workbook:

The Interface Type column shows whether the action was performed through UI or SuiteScript.
The Source Details column shows additional information about the source, such as a script deployment ID or a template ID in case of Print actions. For more information, see the help topic Personal Information Access Logs Dataset and Workbook.

Compliance 360 SuiteApp Now Available in SuiteApp Marketplace

Compliance 360 SuiteApp enables you to have a single source of truth for user interactions with the customer record. The SuiteApp gives you access to user activity logs produced by the NetSuite Compliance 360 Cloud Service. The Compliance 360 SuiteApp enables users to:

Track and audit user interactions to customer records within NetSuite
Perform a search of when a user creates, deletes, edits, searches, views, prints, reports, or exports customer records, including logs produced by the SuiteApp in the last 12 months
Access user activities, key performance indicators, and dashboards in real-time for monitoring system usage For more information about the SuiteApp, see the help topic Compliance 360 SuiteApp. Banking SuiteApps

Following is the 2024.2 banking enhancement to SuiteApps:

New Service Provider Supports More U.S. and Canadian Financial Institutions
Cash 360 Enhancements
Payment Automation Enhancements
Australia Bank Feeds Enhancements New Service Provider Supports More U.S. and Canadian

Financial Institutions

This feature is not yet available. Cash 360 Enhancements Cash 360 SuiteApp version 1.2.0 is not yet available.

Payment Automation Enhancements

The Payment Automation SuiteApp now supports multiple subsidiaries. If you have a OneWorld account and have multiple US subsidiaries, note this. You can now apply for HSBC accounts in each US subsidiary and can process payments from each US subsidiary.

Vendor Prepayment Support You can now create and process vendor prepayments through the Payment Automation SuiteApp.
Payment Status Tracking The Bill Payment record now includes a visual status tracker which you can use to check the status of the payments.
Automation of recording of Monthly fees and charges Previously, NetSuite automated the process of recording an auto-funding request to pay for the monthly invoice fees of HSBC. In the current release, the recording of the payment of transaction fees is now automated as well. This new automation will save more time, allowing you to focus on other important tasks.
Ability to Reprocess Payments On rare occasions, payments to vendors end up with an ACH Payment Return or Data Error status. In the current release, users can now reprocess these payments. You no longer need to void the payment and re-initiate it manually. In addition, no new funding request are created for reprocessed payments; existing funds at the HSBC Online Account are used for the reprocessed payments. Reprocessed payments are automatically sent to HSBC for processing.
Additional enhancements in this release include:
- ▬ Prevention of withdrawal request submission if the total withdrawal requests for the day already exceeds the current HSBC balance. ▬ Ability to designate email recipients to receive all notifications from the Payment Automation SuiteApp, such as reminder email. ▬ A new email notification alerts users when payments are delayed for processing due to errors. Payments with Failed, Data Error, and ACH Payment Return statuses are included. ▬ Renaming of Billing Information under SuiteBanking > Setup to Account Information. ▬ Enhancements to the Vendors dashboard. The following columns have been re-arranged and renamed: ▭ Approved Vendors (formerly known as SuiteBanking Vendors) ▭ Vendors Pending Approval ▭ Eligible Vendors ▬ Enhancements to the Preference record now allow users to set up different preferences in each subsidiary in which they process payments. For the Payment Automation SuiteApp documentation, see the help topic Payment Automation SuiteApp.

Australia Bank Feeds Enhancements

Previously, an email notification is automatically sent every two hours from 8:00 AM to 2:00 PM AEST.

Business disclosure agreement is now available as a new method to import bank data. This method is especially useful if you do not want to avail of services from a trusted adviser.
You can now remove bank accounts from your bank feeds and exclude them from any bank data import. For more information, see the help topic Australia Bank Feeds SuiteApp.

Inventory Management SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 30, 2024.

Following are the 2024.2 inventory management enhancements to SuiteApps:

Quality Management Enhancements
SCM Mobile Enhancements
Smart Count Enhancements Quality Management Enhancements

Inspection Generation Including Parent Transaction

The NetSuite Quality Management SuiteApp enables you to better control the generation of inspection queues by including the parent transaction with the inventory transactions. This enhancement allows you to define individual inspection criteria based on a combination of parent and inventory transactions.

Enhanced Inspection Capabilities

The following inspection features have been included in the NetSuite 2024.2 Quality Management

SuiteApp:

Inspection tasks can be performed only by employees who have been assigned to an inspection. This ensures that inspection reporting is carried out by the approved employees and prevents unauthorized personnel from updating data.
To help improve the integrity and security of the data, the system prevents updates to inspection data for completed inspections.
To avoid unnecessary emails being sent when email notifications are not required, email notifications are generated based on configuration settings.
The Quality subtab now displays a list of the following quality inspection transactions and their status:
- Work Order
- Work Order Completion
- Assembly Build
- Item Receipt
- Item Fulfillment
- Purchase Order
- Sales Order
- Vendor Return Authorization
- Transfer Order
You can now generate an inspection queue by entering the transaction quantity in decimal format in the Ad-Hoc Queue Creation page.

Updated User Interface

The following user interface enhancements are included in the NetSuite 2024.2 Quality Management

SuiteApp:

The Quality subtab has been added to the Item page to group all quality records in one location.
You can now move between the NetSuite transaction page and the inspection queue record in the Quality Management tablet.
The Quality Management menu has been refined for improved customer navigation.

Compliance Enhancements

You can now restrict updating the Quality Data until after an inspection is finished. To learn more, see the help topic Quality Management Mobile Data Collection. SCM Mobile Enhancements

SCM Mobile provides the following enhancements:

Highlighting Table Rows with Colors
Assigning Printer Groups to Printers
Attaching Images and Files to Custom Records
Exporting and Importing Standard Mobile Processes

Highlighting Table Rows with Colors

SCM Mobile provides six standard colors that you can use to highlight rows of data tables. You can

choose up to three colors to set up on a single data table. When you set up a color, you add a column condition to specify the data you want to highlight. The app applies the color to entire rows that contain data that meet your condition. For more information, see the help topic SCM Mobile App Configuration.

Assigning Printer Groups to Printers

You can create printer groups and assign them to one or more printers available through your PrintNode client. You can create groups for dedicated printers that you use for areas, zones, and teams in a location.

On the app, you can set a default printer group for your selected location. During printing, you can specify

a different group and choose a printer that belongs to it. For more information, see the help topic Mobile Printing Setup Procedures.

Attaching Images and Files to Custom Records

Aside from attaching images and files to standard transactions and records, you can now attach them to

custom ones. When you set up image capture or file upload on a mobile process, you can choose from the supported custom records. For more information, see the help topic Setting Up Image Capture or File Upload.

Exporting and Importing Standard Mobile Processes

You can now export and import standard mobile processes to other accounts that use the same mobile app. For standard processes, you can export any changes made to page elements through Mobile Configuration. For more information, see the help topic SCM Mobile Setup. Smart Count Enhancements

New Smart Count Preferences

You can now set the following new preferences on the Smart Count Preferences page:

Schedule Count Review Data Processing – Lets you run the SC SS Count Review Data script on a scheduled basis to reduce the Smart Count Review page load time. The script runs as per your defined schedule to get the count review data and displays it on the page in a significantly less time. To access the script, go to Customization > Scripting > Scripts > SC SS Count Review Data. To see real-time data on the Smart Count Review page, click Refresh on the banner message that displays on the page after the script is run.
Schedule Dashboard Data Processing – Lets you run the SC MR Compute Dashboard Data script on a scheduled basis to reduce the Smart Count Dashboard page load time for the following portlets.
- Smart Count Summary
- Reminders
- Approval Summary The script runs as per your defined schedule to get the dashboard data and displays it on the page in a significantly less time. To access the script, go to Customization > Scripting > Scripts > SC MR Compute Dashboard Data. To see real-time data on the Smart Count Review page, click Refresh on the banner message that displays on the page after the script is run. Enhancements to the Smart Count Review Page following:
- Location
- Date
- To be Approved
- Count Status
- Count Reason
- Variance
- Counted By
- Class
- Inventory Classification
- Vendor
You can now view all unapproved counts in the Report section if you check the To be Approved box.
You can now view items quantities in picked or packed status in the Picked/Packed column in the Report section. For a combination of an item, bin, and location, the column displays the quantity of the item picked or packed.
The Reset Filters option in the Primary Filters section now has an additional functionality. If you click Reset Filters, you can update the filter values in the dropdown for any changes made to records such as location or vendor. For more information, see the following help topics:
Setting Up Smart Count Preferences
Working with Smart Count Review
Smart Count Dashboard

New SuiteApp Preferences

You can now set the following new preferences on the Smart Count Preferences page:

Confirm Before Approving, Rejecting, or Selecting Recount – This preference lets you confirm the action before you approve, reject, or mark items for recount.
Select Zone and Aisle for Counting – If you are a WMS user, this preference lets you select a zone and aisle before starting a count.

Updated Smart Count Mobile App

Total Quantity Counted – Displays the total counted quantity for an item for a selected location.
Available Lot Numbers – Displays the available lots for a bin, provided it is not empty. For items without bins, the field displays all lot numbers associated with a location.
The task list now displays the following new columns:
- Item Description
- Display Name
You can now select a zone and aisle before starting an item count.

New Permissions for the Smart Count Inventory Manager Role

The following new permissions are added to the Smart Count Inventory Manager role:

Bulk Manage Roles
Employees
Employee Records To view permissions, go to Setup > Users/Roles > User Management > Manage Roles.

Updated Smart Count Review Page

Aisle
Variance Quantity in Stock Units
Zone
The Primary Filters section provides an option to add or remove filters. Also, the updated Date field now requires you to enter a date range that is within 18 months.

New Field on the Count Configuration Page

The Count Configuration page now includes the new Location field. You can select one or more locations for which a count configuration applies.

Ability to Assign Recount Task to an Employee

You can now select the employee to whom you want to assign the task to recount an item. When you click Recount for an item, a popup window displays where you can select the employee for assignment.

New Fields on an Item Count Record

An item count record now displays Zone and Aisle fields. The field values are derived from the bin record for an item.

Item Record Management SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 23, 2024.

Following are the 2024.2 item record management enhancements to SuiteApps:

Support for Date Formats in Lot Number Date Elements

Support for Date Formats in Lot Number Date Elements

The Lot Auto Numbering SuiteApp version 1.3.0 now supports selecting date formats for custom and lot number date elements appear on the SuiteApp. When configuring a date element, you can now select the required date format from the following options: YYMMDD, DDMMMYYYY, DDMMYY, and DDMMYYYY. For more information, see the help topic Lot Auto Numbering SuiteApp.

Localization SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 23, 2024.

Following are the 2024.2 localization enhancements to SuiteApps:

Advanced Localization Features Enhancements
ANZ Localization Enhancements
Brazil Certification Tax Authorities Enhancements
Brazil Localization Enhancements
Brazil Reports Enhancements
India Localization SuiteTax Engine Enhancements
India Localization SuiteTax Report Enhancement
LATAM File Builder Enhancement
Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Now Available
Malaysia Electronic Invoicing Enhancements
Portugal Localization Enhancements
Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing Enhancements
Spain Localization Enhancements
Southeast Asia Localization SuiteApp Enhancements for Philippines Invoicing
Support for Transactions in Foreign Currency for Philippines Localization

Advanced Localization Features Enhancements

Advanced Localization Features SuiteApp includes enhancements for the following versions:

Advanced Localization Features Version 1.4.0
Advanced Localization Features Version 1.3.0

Advanced Localization Features Version 1.4.0

data accessibility through scanning to access information. For more information, see the help topic Quick Response Code.

The Customize Document Template page now supports accounts with up to 250 subsidiaries.
In addition to the supported languages for ALF Templates, you can now print invoices, sales orders, and credit memos in Hebrew and Indonesian.
In the Customize Document Template > Labels and Notes subtab, a new subtab Notes is added for entering custom translations to any subsidiary notes. You can add up to 4000 characters of custom translation text in the Custom Notes field of a Notes sublist. For more information, see the help topic Labels and Notes Customization. For more information, see the help topic Advanced Localization Features. Advanced Localization Features Version 1.3.0 transactions that comply with tax regulations.
You can now add purchase order custom notes for a subsidiary and any additional notes to be printed in the Memo section of a purchase order. The notes can include changes to a contact, bank details, or payment references. The Purchase Order Notes column is available in the subsidiary-specific Setup subtab of the Customize Document Template page.
Along with the supported languages for ALF templates, you can now also print sales orders, invoices, and credit memos in Arabic. For more information, see the help topic Setting Up the Advanced Localization Features Templates.

ANZ Localization Enhancements

ANZ Localization SuiteApp version 3.0.0 now lets you generate the following reports for Australia and New Zealand businesses if you have the SuiteTax feature enabled in your account.

Business Activity Statement (BAS) – This is a form that registered business entities in Australia submit to the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) to report their tax obligations. For more information, see the help topic Business Activity Statement.
GST101A – This is a tax form that business entities in New Zealand use to file their GST returns to the Inland Revenue (IRD). For more information, see the help topic GST Return 101A. To generate these reports, see the help topic Generating Localized Country Tax Reports. If you are using an account without SuiteTax, the ANZ Localization SuiteApp supports the following reports and templates.
Advanced PDF/HTML templates
Payment Times Report (PTR)
Supplier ABN List
Taxable Payment Annual Report (TPAR) For more information, see the help topic ANZ Localization. Brazil Certification Tax Authorities Enhancements

Electronic Invoice for Services in the National Standard

You can now generate and certify electronic invoices for services for cities that adopt the NFS-e Nacional standard. The PDF representation of these electronic invoices for services follows the DANFS-e template. For more information about the tax authorities for which the Brazil Certification Tax Authorities provides e-document templates and plug-ins, see Supported Cities.

Certification Web Services Availability Portlet

You are now able to add the Certification Web Services Availability portlet to your dashboard. The portlet displays information about the availability of the web services from the tax authorities you use to certify e- documents. Brazil Localization Enhancements

Support to Lot and Serialized Inventory and Assembly Items

You are now able to certify electronic invoices for goods with the Brazil Localization SuiteApp including the following types of items:

Lot numbered assembly
Serialized assembly
Serialized inventory item Brazil Localization also enables you to return goods or cancel e-documents from transactions that include these items types. For more information, see the help topic Creating Items for Brazil.

CNAB 240 Delivery Files With Payments From Multiple Subsidiaries

When generating Centro Nacional de Automação Bancária (CNAB) 240 delivery files, you are now able to include transactions and installments associated with multiple subsidiaries. For more information, see the help topic Generating CNAB 240 Delivery Files. Brazil Reports Enhancements

Additional Records for SPED Files

To further support businesses in Brazil, the SuiteApp now includes new records for the following Sistema

Público de Escrituração Digital (SPED) files:

ECD
- I100 – Centro de Custo
- J210 – DLPA – Demonstração de Lucros ou Prejuízos Acumulados/DMPL – Demonstração de

Mutações do Patrimônio Líquido

J215 – Fato Contábil que Altera a Conta Lucros Acumulados ou a Conta Prejuízos Acumulados ou

Todo o Patrimônio Líquido

ECF
- L200 – Método de Avaliação do Estoque Final
- L210 – Informativo da Composição de Custos
- Q001 – Abertura do Bloco Q
- Q990 – Encerramento do Bloco Q
EFD Contribuições
- 1001 – Abertura do Bloco 1
- 1900 – Consolidação dos Documentos Emitidos por Pessoa Jurídica Submetida ao Regime de

Tributação com Base no Lucro Presumido – Regime de Caixa ou de Competência

1990 – Encerramento do Bloco 1
C175 – Registro Analítico do Documento (Código 65)
F001 – Abertura do Bloco F
F010 – Identificação do Estabelecimento
F500 – Consolidação das Operações da Pessoa Jurídica Submetida ao Regime de Tributação com

Base no Lucro Presumido – Incidência do PIS/Pasep e da Cofins pelo Regime de Caixa

F600 – Contribuição Retida na Fonte
F990 – Encerramento do Bloco F For more information, see the help topic Available Statutory Reports for Brazil.

Country Tax Reports for Brazil Supporting Multi-Book Accounting

If you have the Full Multi-Book Accounting feature enabled, you can now select the accounting book from which to generate the following reports:

Brazil Balance Sheet
Brazil General Journal
Brazil General Ledger
Brazil Income Statement
Brazil Trial Balance For more information, see the help topic Generating Country Tax Reports for Brazil. India Localization SuiteTax Engine Enhancements enhancements:
Support for New Languages You can now view the India Localization SuiteTax EngineSuiteApp pages in your preferred language, except the India custom forms and custom lists. The SuiteApp supports 21 languages. To set your preferred language, go to Home > Set Preferences. For a list of supported languages, see the help topic India Localization SuiteTax Engine.
Addition of a New Tax Engine Plug-in The SuiteApp now includes the new NetSuite India SuiteTax plug-in to calculate taxes. To enable this new plug-in, go to Customization > Plug-ins > Manage Plug-ins and check the NetSuite India SuiteTax Plug-in box.
Support for Exchange Rate During TCS Calculation You can now calculate TCS on a transaction in which exchange rate applies. The SuiteApp updates the accumulated tax bucket values in the base currency of a subsidiary or company and calculates TCS accordingly on transactions.
Restricted Usage of Custom GL Plug-in for Roles Without the Custom Record Permission Only roles that are assigned the Custom Records permission can now use the Custom GL plug-in. For more information, see the following help topics:
India Localization SuiteTax Engine
Setting India Tax Engine Plug-in:
TCS Calculation India Localization SuiteTax Report Enhancement display transactions applicable to table 4 and table 5 of the GSTR-9 report.
India GSTR9 Exempted
India GSTR9 Nil Rated
India GSTR9 Non-GST Supply
India GSTR9 Table 4 Credit Notes
India GSTR9 Table 4 Inward Reverse Charge
India GSTR9 Table 4 Outward B2B
India GSTR9 Table 4 Outward Export
India GSTR9 Table 4 Outward SEZ
India GSTR9 Table 4 Outward B2C To access these saved searches, go to Lists > Search > Saved Searches. For more information, see the help topic India Localization SuiteTax Reports Saved Searches.

LATAM File Builder Enhancement

You can now clone file layouts. While the option to make a copy from a record only copies the record itself, cloning enables you to replicate child records as well. When you clone file layouts, you are able to copy layout sections, section sources, and source fields. For more information, see the help topic Cloning File Layouts.

Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Now Available

Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp version 1.0.0 is now available for installation as a managed

SuiteApp. You can install the Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp from the NetSuite SuiteApp Marketplace. The Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp helps NetSuite customers and vendors in Malaysia with the certification of electronic documents (e-documents) for invoices and credit memos.

E-documents are certified by Inland Revenue Board of Malaysia (IRBM) through Avalara access points

using the Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp. For more information about the Malaysia electronic invoicing, see Malaysia E-Invoice For more information about Malaysia Electronic Invoicing features, read the following topics:

Setting Automatic Selection of E-document Template and Sending Method on Transactions
Customizing PDF Templates
Combining E-Document Generation and Sending
Generating and Sending Outbound E-Documents for a Transaction
Viewing E-Document Status and Audit Trail

Malaysia Electronic Invoicing Enhancements

You can use the Malaysia Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp version 1.2.0 to create self-billed invoices from

NetSuite and send it to IRBM to certify self-billed invoices. You must use vendor bill transaction as a self-

billed invoice and send it to IRBM for validation. For more information, see the help topic Setting Up a Vendor Record for Self-billed Transactions.

Portugal Localization Enhancements

The transaction finalization introduces a new transaction certification step that changes the previous certification process.
The Document Series Identifier field is no longer required for the transaction creation. However, it is required for the transaction finalization.
The new transaction finalization process no longer certifies transactions automatically. You now have to manually certify your transactions on the transaction record.

Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing Enhancements

Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing SuiteApp includes enhancements for the following versions:

Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing Version 4.0.0
Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing Version 3.0.0 Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing Version 4.0.0

Singapore (SG) PEPPOL ID Bulk Update

The Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing SuiteApp now includes the PEPPOL ID Bulk Update functionality. Using PEPPOL ID Bulk Update, you can update customer and vendor records that are associated with Unique Entity Numbers (UENs) but do not have corresponding PEPPOL IDs. The PEPPOL

ID Bulk Update page allows you with following actions:

View the list of entities that are not associated with PEPPOL IDs.
Select multiple entities for updating PEPPOL IDs in bulk.
Apply filters to view the relevant entities with their subsidiaries and update them. When bulk processing is complete, the PEPPOL IDs are reflected on the customer and vendor records. Important: You must have the Singapore Localization SuiteApp installed in your account before you can use the Singapore (SG) PEPPOL ID Bulk Update functionality. For more information, see the help topic Singapore PEPPOL ID Bulk Update. Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing Version 3.0.0

Outbound Support for Purchase Orders

You now can generate and send purchase order outbound e-documents from the Singapore PEPPOL- Ready e-Invoicing SuiteApp. Note: You can only send outbound purchase orders through datapost access point. For more information, see the help topic Understanding E-Document Components and Records.

Support for Header Level Discounts in Inbound Sales Orders

Header level discounts are now supported for inbound sales orders that are imported from Singapore PEPPPOL network. The same discounts are displayed on the converted sales orders.

PEPPOL ID Format Validation

The PEPPOL ID format is now validated and any incorrect format results in an error. The accepted format is Country Code:Global Location Number (GLN). For example: 0195:SGTST123456A. For more information, see the help topic Creating a Singapore PEPPOL E-Invoicing Configuration Record.

Spain Localization Enhancements

New Modelo 303 and Modelo 390 boxes related to the inclusion of import and export transactions.
New SII report fields related to the inclusion of import and export transactions.
Support of import and export transactions in Spain-specific financial reports, workbook, and datasets.
Updated values in the SII dropdown lists related to the inclusion of import and export transactions.
New required DUA Number field on the SII Reporting subtab. This field must be filled with a unique value and is only enabled if the Type of Received Invoice field is set to F5. For more information, see the help topic Spain Localization. Southeast Asia Localization SuiteApp Enhancements for Philippines Invoicing

Philippines Invoicing functionality:

NON-VAT Taxpayers
Ease of Paying Taxes (EOPT) Invoicing Compliance
Exempt Transaction

NON-VAT Taxpayers

You can now specify whether a seller is a VAT or NON-VAT registered company for Philippine subsidiaries using the PH Seller Type list. This field is available on the Subsidiary Record under the Document Setup subtab for Philippines Invoicing. The seller type, followed by the Tax Identification Number (TIN) and branch code, appears in the header of printed Philippines documents. For more information, see the help topic Specifying the Seller Type on Philippines Documents.

Ease of Paying Taxes (EOPT) Invoicing Compliance

To comply with BIR Revenue Regulation (RR) No. 7-2024 in relation to Republic Act No. 11976, also known as the Ease of Paying Taxes Act:

Invoices as Primary Support Documents
Sale Type
Renaming of Invoices

Invoices as Primary Support Documents

Invoices now become the primary support document for VAT purposes. Official Receipts are now

supplementary documents and no longer a valid proof to support the claim of input tax by buyers or purchasers of goods and/or services.

Philippines Official Receipt PDF / HTML Template – The phrase “THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT VALID FOR

CLAIM OF INPUT TAX” is now added and appears in the footer section of this template. For official

receipts that have multiple pages when printed, the footer phrase appears on the last page.

Philippines Official Receipt PDF / HTML Template (Without Footer Phrase) – This new template allows you to reuse an official receipt as invoice (if applicable). The footer phrase “THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT VALID FOR CLAIM OF INPUT TAX” is excluded from this template.

Sale Type

A new Sale Type column is now included in the Items subtab of sales invoice and credit memo transaction forms for Philippines customers.

For applicable printed documents, a corresponding Sale Type column is inserted in the line item before

the Tax Amount column that indicates VATable Sale, VAT-Exempt Sale, or Zero-Rated Sale.

Sale Type does not appear in existing custom templates that you may have created prior to the release

of version 6.02.0. However, custom templates created using the Philippines Sales Invoice PDF/HTML Template or Philippines Credit Memo PDF/HTML Template after the release will have Sale Type visible. Renaming of Invoices Create your own custom template by renaming a standard Philippines template. You can rename your sales invoice and use a document title that fits your business needs (for example, Service Invoice, Charge Invoice, and others). Customize a Philippines template and modify the document title. For more information, see the help topic Renaming Philippines Documents.

Exempt Transaction

Transactions that are not subject to both value-added and percentage taxes can now be specified as exempt. The following appears when printing sales invoices and official receipts for exempt transactions:

The word “EXEMPT” appears in the header of printed Philippines documents.
The phrase “THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT VALID FOR CLAIM OF INPUT TAX” appears in the footer of printed Philippines documents. For more information, see the help topic Specifying Exempt Transactions. Support for Transactions in Foreign Currency for Philippines

Localization

In Philippines Localization SuiteApp version 2.4.0, transactions can now support amounts in currencies other than the Philippine Peso (PHP). You can add foreign currencies in the Currencies record list. You can print Philippines documents that use foreign currency or send them by email. See the help topic Transactions in Foreign Currency for more information.

Manufacturing SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 23, 2024.

Following are the 2024.2 manufacturing enhancements to SuiteApps:

Manufacturing Mobile Enhancements
Cost Variance Analysis SuiteApp Now Available
Supply 360 SuiteApp Now Available
Available To Build SuiteApp Now Available Manufacturing Mobile Enhancements

GS1 Support

The NetSuite 2024.2 Manufacturing Mobile SuiteApp enables you to scan GS1 bar codes to populate the

Lot Number or Serial Number, Expiry Date, and Quantity values in the production process. Manufacturing

Mobile enables you to scan GS1 bar codes to populate Lot or Serial Numbers in the consumption flow.

Enhanced Machine and Labor Start Stop Capabilities

The NetSuite Manufacturing Mobile SuiteApp 2024.2 release enables you to complete the following actions:

Perform mu ltiple work orders or multiple operations for the same work order simultaneously at a work center.
Badge in with only the employee assigned badge id.
Perform the setup activity more than one time. To learn more, see the help topic Manufacturing Mobile Administration/Setup.

Automatically Generate New Lot Numbers

The NetSuite 2024.2 release enables you to automatically generate new lot numbers by integrating with the Auto Generate Lot Number SuiteApp. After production you can then choose whether to retain or not retain the new lot number.

Print Labels from a Mobile Device

The NetSuite Manufacturing Mobile SuiteApp 2024.2 release enables you to print labels after production. You can define and customize the label template at the item level to suit your organization’s requirements.

Scrap Reason Code Description

The NetSuite 2024.2 Manufacturing Mobile SuiteApp now includes a reason when you scrap inventory items. To learn more, see the help topic Manufacturing Mobile Administration/Setup.

Cost Variance Analysis SuiteApp Now Available

The Cost Variance Analysis SuiteApp analyzes variances during the processing of work orders. These variances are the differences between the planned values and the actual values recorded for quantity and cost in work orders. This SuiteApp also enables you to do the following:

Measure the performance of work orders and act toward preventing cost overruns.
Review cost variances by work order, cost type, and operations. for each work order component. You can use this information to analyze cost overruns.
Conversion Costs– Displays cost variances for manufacturing operations. You can use the details on this subtab to understand any cost overruns that occur in any step of the manufacturing process for an item.
Cost Category – Displays the cost breakdown and variances by cost types for a work order. For more information, see the help topic Cost Variance Analysis.

Supply 360 SuiteApp Now Available

The Supply 360 SuiteApp analyzes component shortages across work orders based on location and date filters. The SuiteApp also lets you view planned supplies of any shorted component.

Following are the main features of the Supply 360 SuiteApp:

Provides an overview of the total numbers of work orders, components, and assemblies that have insufficient inventory on hand. You can view alerts related to planned supplies of components for a specific period.
Displays work orders with released, planned, or in progress statuses that have components in shortage in the Shortages by Work Order subtab. On the Supply 360 page, you can view these on the Shortages by Work Order subtab.
Displays the components used across multiple work orders with potential shortages in the Shortages by Component subtab. On the Supply 360 page, you can view these on the Shortages by Component subtab.
Displays inventory on hand, committed, available quantities, and all planned supplies of all components used across work orders in the All Components Requirements subtab. On the Supply 360 page, you can view these on the All Components Requirements subtab.
Alerts you to take action on components, highlighted in red, indicating that the components are completely in shortage.
Prompts you to act on work orders based on the first receipt date of a planned supply. For more information, see the help topic Supply 360.

Available To Build SuiteApp Now Available

The Available To Build SuiteApp helps manufacturers determine the number of assemblies or number of kits that they can assemble with the current available inventory. The SuiteApp evaluates both end assembly and subassembly components, allowing manufacturers to determine what they can provide to customers.

Following are the main capabilities of the Available to Build SuiteApp:

Calculates the Available to Build (ATB) value for assembly items and kit items by considering either top level or all levels of the Bill of Materials (BOM).
Displays ATB values for assembly items and kits details on the Sales Order page and the Item 360 SuiteApp dashboard portlets.
The Manufacturing and Sales pages of the Item 360 dashboard display the Available to Build portlet.
Calculates ATB for assembly items based on the item BOM revision.
Calculates ATB for kit item using the component on-hand quantity details from the item record. For more information, see the help topic Available To Build. Order Management SuiteApps

Following are the 2024.2 order management enhancements to SuiteApps:

Fulfillable Items with SuiteBilling Now Available
New Ship Central Capabilities
Electronic Bank Payments Enhancements
Electronic Invoicing Enhancements

Fulfillable Items with SuiteBilling Now Available

Fulfillable Items with SuiteBilling SuiteApp version 1.0.0 provides features that enable NetSuite SuiteBilling

to support fulfillable items in subscriptions. This SuiteApp helps you consolidate the billing and fulfillment processes for subscriptions that have accompanying fulfillable items, such as for companies providing modems with Internet service. You can do the following with the Fulfillable Items with SuiteBilling SuiteApp:

Link fulfillable items to their associated service or subscription.
Use a sales order with a service or subscription item that is linked to a fulfillable item entered by default.
Enter additional item information such as brand name, color, or serial number for fulfillable items so they are properly identified and tracked in transaction records and in their associated subscription.
Split subscription line items into multiple lines in a sales order to handle partial fulfillment, activation, and returns.
Send an email reminder for subscriptions that are pending activation. You can send the email reminders in bulk or upon fulfillment of subscription items.
Set up a reminder in the dashboard for subscriptions that are pending activation.
Include additional item information such as brand name, color, or serial number for fulfillable items in the printed invoice.
Merge same items with the same rates and subscription in the printed invoice.
Accordingly update the associated subscription when there are returns of fulfillable items.
Replace additional item information for replacement items with new additional item information. For more information, see the help topic Fulfillable Items with SuiteBilling. New Ship Central Capabilities

Packing by Waves

Previously, you can search for orders to pack using the order number or pick carton. Now, you can search by wave transactions to pack all waves associated with an order or all orders associated with a wave. Note that pick cartons and wave transactions are available from Warehouse Management.

Mark as Shipped Option for Packing

After you pack orders on the app, you can mark the associated fulfillments as Shipped. If you activate the Show Mark as Shipped Option rule, the Mark as Shipped button appears on summary pages of the packing flows.

Reopening Packed Cartons that Ship As Is

The Reopen cartons that ship as is rule provides the option to open packed cartons that contain items for individual shipping. You can add more items to open cartons before you ship them out.

Shipping with the Best Rate

You can set the Get Best Shipping Rate preference to enable this option for shipments that you process on the app. You can apply filters to limit carriers and to make sure that the app chooses the best rate available for your expected delivery date. The best rate may be offered by another carrier for a shipping method that differs from the one on the order.

Advanced Shipping Options Per Carrier

Carriers provide additional shipping options for local or international shipments that you can now set

on the app. These include additional handling, hazardous materials through USPS, delivered duty paid, and payment details for collect shipments, among others. The app enables fields for additional shipping options when you activate the Set advanced options from carrier rule. After you apply any of these options, you can view the adjusted shipping cost to reflect any extra charges from the carrier.

Shipping Hazardous Materials through USPS

On the Ship Central Preferences page, you can enter a contact person and number for shipments of

dangerous goods or hazardous materials through USPS only. Depending on the shipping method, the app automatically submits these details when you ship the items. You can view the shipping cost that may include additional charges from the carrier.

Additional Fields for International Shipping Documents

You can provide customs details, like content description and declaration statement, used for the certificate of origin or commercial invoice. Before you print shipping labels for international shipments, you can enter these details on the app. For more information, see the help topic Shipping Packed Orders.

Printing Single or Multiple Return Labels

If you set the Print Return Labels preference, the app displays the Print Return Label link on the Options

Menu. For local shipments, you can generate and print return labels for one or more existing shipping

labels. Before you print a label, you can change the carrier, method, or both for the return shipping. For more information, see the help topic Printing Labels and Documents for Shipping.

Tracking Shipped Packages

On item fulfillments, you can check whether packages are in transit or have been delivered. When you

view the package details, you can click the Delivery Details link to open a popup window that displays the package location, delivery status, and history from the carrier.

Support for Shipping Items on Commerce Websites

If you have a Commerce website, you can now display shipping methods associated with shipping items created through Ship Central. When you create shipping items or update existing ones, you must check the following settings: Charge for Shipping and Display in Website. On your website, shoppers can select a shipping method and view the corresponding shipping cost. For more information, see the help topic Creating Shipping Items for your Shipping Services.

Bill to Recipient Preference

You can now bill shipping costs to recipients that you set up on the customer record or Ship Central

Preferences page. On the Ship Central Preferences page, the Bill to Third Party preference is renamed

to Bill Other Parties. When you set this preference, you can enter the account details and classify the account as either a Third Party or Recipient billing type. On the mobile app, you can select the billing type that applies to a specific shipment or disable other party billing for it. To set up system rules for the new capabilities, see the help topic Configuring Ship Central Rules. To set up the new preferences, see the help topic Ship Central Preferences. For more information about using the new capabilities, see the help topic Ship Central Packing or Ship Central Shipping. Electronic Bank Payments Enhancements

Add Amount Filters on Electronic Payment Suitelets

You can now use the new Amount From and Amount To fields on the electronic payments Suitelets to filter the required payments based on the payment amount.

Add Return Email Address to Receive Email Responses

You can now use the new Return Email Address and Custom Email Address fields on the Electronic Payments Preference page to add the required email address. This email address receives responses to email notifications sent.

Add Total Payments Filter Criteria for PFA Records

You can now add the Total Payments filter criteria to the saved search on a PFA record. To add the filter on the PFA record, go to Lists > Search > Saved Searches > New. In the Criteria subtab on the PFA record, select Total Payments filter from the Filter list and click Add. Electronic Payments Preferences to Override Vendor Payments

Approval

You can now use the new Override Vendor Payment Approval Routing box on the Electronic Payments Preferences page to override vendor payments approval settings on the Account Preferences page. To check the Override Vendor Payment Approval Routing box, go to Payments > Setup > Electronic Payments Preferences.

Send Reminder Emails for Batches in Pending Approval Status

As of 2024.2, you can send reminder emails to the approvers using the new Send Reminder button on the Bill Payment Batch and Global Bill Payment Batch pages for batches in Pending Approval status. The Send Reminder button is available if approval routing is enabled and the total amount exceeds the payment approval amount.

Support to Display Credit Transactions

A new Include All Credits box is added to filter and display all credit transactions on the Bill Payments

Processing and Invoice Payments Processing pages. Check the Include All Credits box to filter all the

credit transactions irrespective of the due dates entered in the due date filters. Clear the Include All Credits box to filter the transactions based on the due dates entered in due date filters.

Support for Role Based Approval Routing in Payment Batches

You can now set approval limits for roles instead of individual employees from the Company Bank Details page. The assigned role must have minimum permission of an EP Approver role. If the amount exceeds the approval limit of any level the emails are not triggered. You can edit or view the assigned approver roles from the Payment Approver Roles column in the Approval Routing subtab of the Company Bank Details page.

Support Tax Calculations for Discount Term Transactions

You can include or exclude tax amount when adding discounts on the total amount by using the Include

Tax For Term Discounts box on the Accounting Preferences page. This feature is only applicable to

accounts that have the SuiteTax feature disabled. To check the Include Tax For Term Discounts box, go to Setup > Accounting > Accounting Preferences. Electronic Invoicing Enhancements

Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp includes enhancements for the following versions:

Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Version 9.05.0
Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Version 9.06.0
Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Version 9.07.0 Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Version 9.05.0 Cancel Status for E-Documents in Outbound Transactions with

Certification Plug-in

Electronic Invoicing now supports canceled e-document status in the e-document certification process. Canceled status can be set through certification sending plug-in or insertAuditTrail sharedmodule API. When a transaction is set to Canceled e-document status, the status will not automatically reset to For Generation status even if you modify the transaction record.

PEPPOL Template Support for SuiteTax

You can now use PEPPOL generic templates for custom transaction of sales and purchase (outbound).

These templates are supported with custom data source plug-in implementations to populate all the

required values. You can use the template contents and the custom data source plug-in implementations to set up e-document template records. These records can then be used for outbound e-document generation. For more information, see the help topic PEPPOL Templates for SuiteTax.

PEPPOL ID Lookup

Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp now has the PEPPOL ID field in customer records, vendor records, and

the subsidiary preference records on the Electronic Invoicing Preferences page. This field is used by the entities registered on the PEPPOL network. You can set the PEPPOL ID field on the subsidiary preference record on the Electronic Invoicing Preferences page for subsidiaries, and for customer and vendor records in the E-Document subtab. For more information, see the help topic PEPPOL ID. Bypassing PO# Validation when Converting an Inbound E-Document into a Vendor Bill

Electronic Invoicing 9.05.0 now supports bypassing the PO# validation when converting an inbound e-

document into a vendor bill inbound transaction. If the Field Mapping for Inbound E-Documents field contains mapping for a purchase order number and the inbound XML contains a purchase order number which is not found in the account, you can create a standalone vendor bill without mapping it to any purchase order for any vendor. This feature can be configured from subsidiary preferences records for the subsidiary of the vendor. You can bypass the PO# validation by selecting Yes from the Bypass PO# Validation in Inbound Conversion field. By default, the value of this field is set to No. For more information, see the help topic Bypassing Purchase Order Number.

Improved Outbound Template with JSON FreeMarker Validation

Validation on saving the outbound e-document template shows a warning popup if the JSON FreeMarker

template content is malformed or has complex FreeMarker directives. It can be evaluated at runtime (generation). You can click OK to save the template or click Cancel to make further changes.

Network MR Enhancement

The default filtering for the Automatic Get Network Status MR script is updated to include transactions with Network Status Updated On value. The script execution occurs the day before the current date instead of the transaction date. For more information, see the help topic Scheduled Script for Getting Network Status of E-Documents. Sending Email to Administrators for Accounts with more than 10

Administrators

The Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp now supports sending email messages on MR script execution and inbound web service error to more than 10 administrators when the Recipient of E-document Notifications field is blank. The email messages are sent in batches of 10 active administrators at a time. Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Version 9.06.0 Avalara for E-invoicing Using NetSuite Electronic Business (NSEB) SuiteApp Starting Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp version 9.06.0, you can now use Avalara for e-Invoicing by installing the NetSuite Electronic Business (NSEB) SuiteApp at supported locations. For more information about NSEB, see the help topic NetSuite Electronic Business.

Converting Purchase Order E-document to Sales Order

Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp now supports sales order transactions as inbound transaction type. You can

use the following methods to create an inbound e-document with the sales order transaction type.

Manual creation
Using Rest Web Services
Using Email Capture plug-in You can process a customer issued PEPPOL purchase order into an inbound NetSuite sales order. To help with the conversion, a sample sales order inbound e-document template mapping and a custom data source plug-in is provided.

Email Customization for Customers and Vendors

You can use the new Email Template list on the customer and vendor record to view the list of the email templates with their record types. The email template can be used in the e-document sending method plug-in implementation to use separate templates for customers and vendors.

Electronic Invoicing Support for Additional SuiteApps

The Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp version 9.06.0 is required to install the following SuiteApps:

The Israel Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp supports compliance with the Israel Tax Authority's latest requirements for continuous transaction control and e-invoicing.
The Singapore PEPPOL-Ready e-Invoicing SuiteApp uses Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp as the main component for processing and exchanging electronic documents.

Transaction Response for Inbound E-document Record

You can create and send Acknowledged and Accepted transaction responses when receiving the inbound e-document. To use this feature, you must do the following:

Check the Support Transaction Response box in the Subsidiary preference
Assign e-document transaction response template
Assign e-document transaction response sending method to the required subsidiaries

Transaction response is created or sent for the following:

The Acknowledged transaction response is created when the inbound record or e-document is in the For Conversion status.
The Accepted transaction response is created when the inbound record or e-document is converted successfully, and the created transaction is approved.
The transaction responses are sent periodically by the Transaction Response Send MR script. Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp Version 9.07.0

Avalara License Check

Starting 26 July 2024, additional license checks will be added for transactions using Avalara services for certification. You must have the following active licenses to generate e-documents for transactions and get them certified from Avalara:

NetSuite Electronic Business Network Extension
Avalara Processing for NetSuite Electronic Invoicing Cloud Service Contact your NetSuite Account Manager to purchase the two licenses. Important: Read the following information for Avalara License check.

The license check has no impact:

If you are an existing Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp user but not using Avalara services for Electronic Invoicing.
If you are an existing Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp user who has existing accounts with Avalara's ELR platform.

The license check impacts only if you are an existing Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp user using Avalara Processing for NetSuite Electronic Invoicing services, through the NetSuite Electronic Business SuiteApp. In such case, make sure you have the above two licenses.

Avalara for E-Invoicing

The Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp version 9.07.0 will support cash refund, vendor bill, and vendor credit transactions for sending e-documents to Avalara. You can check localization specific help center documentation for more details. Multi-book Accounting Support for Israel E-Invoicing through

Avalara

The Accounting Book for Currency field is added in the Electronic Invoicing Preferences page. Select Secondary Accounting Book, or Tertiary Accounting Book from the list to generate the e-document for Israel e-invoicing through Avalara.

NetSuite Electronic Business Now Available

NetSuite Electronic Business SuiteApp (NSEB) version 1.0.0 is now available for installation as a managed

SuiteApp. You can install the NetSuite Electronic Business SuiteApp from the NetSuite SuiteApp

Marketplace. Before installing the SuiteApp, it must be provisioned by your NetSuite account manager.

NSEB SuiteApp provides the foundation for NetSuite users to configure and participate in global business

networks like Oracle Business Network (OBN) and PEPPOL. The SuiteApp provides global electronic invoicing solutions for country mandates worldwide, by partnering with Avalara. The NSEB SuiteApp version 1.0.0 introduces the following features:

Enable NetSuite users to connect with potential trading partner
Enable NetSuite to integrate electronically to all other member companies, both Oracle and external, on the Oracle Business Network.
Enable NetSuite accounts to issue invoices compliant with electronic invoice registration and control regulations in the supported countries.
Enable the participating NetSuite users to be linked to the PEPPOL network by partnering with Avalara, without the need to sign up for access points in each country. The following SuiteApps are required to install the NSEB SuiteApp to connect to OBN accounts, store user credentials, and establish document transfers between the SuiteApp and OBN:
Israel Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp
SuiteProcurement SuiteApp Note: You should not use NSEB SuiteApp in Sandbox and Test drive accounts as the NESB feature is not supported these accounts. For more information about the NSEB SuiteApp, see the help topic NetSuite Electronic Business. NetSuite Electronic Business SuiteApp Version 1.1.0

NSEB Inbound Support

NetSuite Electronic Business will now recognize the target SuiteApp based on the document type sent by

the OBN (Oracle Business Network) and create an inbound record using required fields.

Avalara License Check

You must have NetSuite Electronic Business Network Extension and Avalara Processing for NetSuite

Electronic Invoicing Cloud Service licenses to use the following features:

Avalara Provisioning
Avalara Company Creation
Avalara Mandate Activation Contact your NetSuite Account Manager to purchase the two licenses. Important: Read the following information for Avalara License check.

The license check has no impact:

If you are an existing Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp user but not using Avalara services for Electronic Invoicing.
If you are an existing Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp user who has existing accounts with Avalara's ELR platform.
If you are an existing SuiteProcurement user.

The license check impacts only if you are an existing Electronic Invoicing SuiteApp user using Avalara Processing for NetSuite Electronic Invoicing services, through the NetSuite Electronic Business SuiteApp. In such case, make sure you have the above two licenses.

Country Specific Mandate Activation

NetSuite Electronic Business version 1.1.0 will support activation of mandates for all the countries supported by NetSuite.

PEPPOL/Bulk Mandate Activation

If you select a PEPPOL mandate under E-Invoicing field to activate a subsidiary, all the PEPPOL mandates supported by NetSuite will now be automatically activated.

SuitePeople SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 30, 2024.

Following are the 2024.2 SuitePeople enhancements to SuiteApps:

Search and Navigation Changes for Benefits Tracking
SuitePeople Workforce Management Enhancements
New SuiteAnswers Category in Payroll Links Portlet

Search and Navigation Changes for Benefits Tracking

Benefits Tracking version 1.0.5 includes changes to the audiences for saved searches used to view Benefits Tracking reports as well as the location where they can be found. features by going to Reports > Saved Searches. Before the update, Benefits Tracking links are available by going to Reports > Benefits. After the update, the Benefits center link will also be removed from the Reports tab.

Audience Change for Saved Searches – The following saved searches will be shared only to users with the Administrator and Human Resource Generalist roles:
- Benefit Tracking – Employee Benefit Costs
- Benefit Tracking – Employee Benefit Coverages
- Benefit Tracking – Employees without Benefits Before the update, the searches are available to all users.
Custom Roles to Require Access to Saved Searches – If you created a custom role for use with the

Benefits Tracking SuiteApp, you must create a copy of the saved searches, then add your custom roles

in the search audiences. For more information about providing reports access to custom roles, see Adding Custom Roles as Audiences in Benefits Tracking Searches.

SuitePeople Workforce Management Enhancements

As of 2024.2, the following enhancements are available with the SuitePeople Workforce Management (WFM) SuiteApp:

SuitePeople Workforce Management Now Available in Marketplace
Manual Updates Required for SuitePeople Workforce Management Time Clock and Mobile Apps
Rebrand of the AdiClock Windows app to SuitePeople Time Clock
Track Added Time Fields in Workforce Management Mobile Apps
Configure Short Breaks in Workforce Management Mobile Apps

SuitePeople Workforce Management Now Available in Marketplace

SuitePeople Workforce Management (WFM) SuiteApp is now available for installation from the SuiteApp

Marketplace. This SuiteApp enables you to streamline shift scheduling, capture time and attendance across your workforce, and calculate wages. Users of the following Adi Insights SuiteApps should install the SuitePeople WFM from the Marketplace to continue using WFM features embedded in NetSuite:

Adi Insights (Bundle ID: 317115)
Adi Insights – Embedded (Bundle ID: 401708) In the future, updated releases will only be available with the SuitePeople WFM SuiteApp from the Marketplace. Installing the SuitePeople WFM SuiteApp from the Marketplace and uninstalling the Adi Insights SuiteApps will not affect data linked to your account.

Recommended Actions

With the availability of SuitePeople WFM in the Marketplace, users should complete the actions:

WFM users with the Administrator role should switch to using WFM from the Marketplace, which include granting access to the SuitePeople WFM Integration role to their and other employees’ accounts.
All WFM customers with the upgraded version should set up their WFM portlet again to work with the new SuiteApp version. For more information about switching to use WFM from the Marketplace and setting up the WFM portlet, see the help topic Installing the SuitePeople Workforce Management SuiteApp. Manual Updates Required for SuitePeople Workforce Management Time

Clock and Mobile Apps

Important: This change is targeted to be available in June 2024.

SuitePeople Workforce Management version 2.5.0 and SuitePeople Time Clock version 2.5.0, the mobile

apps used with the SuitePeople Workforce Management (WFM) SuiteApp, deliver security updates to improve protection for app users. If you use one or both apps to record any time punches, some of your data may have been captured when your iOS or Android device was offline. To make sure that all data are captured or recorded, you must perform the required actions to completely sync employee time with WFM servers. If you are using one or both the WFM and Time Clock mobile apps, complete the following steps:

Before the upgrade release, turn off automatic updates on your mobile devices.
After the upgrade release, complete the following steps. a. Connect your mobile device to a cellular or Wi-Fi connection. b. Open the SuitePeople Workforce Management or SuitePeople Time Clock mobile app The app will automatically sync with WFM servers and ensure that all employee time are saved. Any employee time punches recorded when devices were offline will be synced. c. Download the latest version of the app from the Apple App Store or Google Play Store. d. Turn on automatic updates. e. Repeat steps A to D for the other app. For more information about the upgrade date and required actions, see the following topics in the

NetSuite Help Center, or in SuiteAnswers:

Action Required Set Manual Updates for the SuitePeople Workforce Management Time Clock and

Mobile Apps

Checking that the SuitePeople Workforce Management phone app is up to date
SuitePeople Time Clock Setup and Troubleshooting

Rebrand of the AdiClock Windows app to SuitePeople Time Clock

Important: This change is targeted to be available in June 2024. SuitePeople Time Clock version 2.0.0.0 upgrades the AdiClock Windows app, which is used in conjunction with the SuitePeople Workforce Management (WFM) SuiteApp. SuitePeople Time Clock icon.

The installer information reflects the new name.
The installation folders are named SuitePeople Time Clock.
The app UI colors, including the headers and footers, change from a green and white theme to a blue and white theme. A comparison of the components in the current version of AdiClock and the upgraded SuitePeople Time

Clock version 2.0.0.0 is shown in the following image:

To update the Windows app, choose from the following options:

When you receive a notification that a new version of SuitePeople Time Clock is available, click Install update.
If you have a manager or administrator role but do not see the update or notification, manually check for updates in SuitePeople Time Clock. For more information, see the help topic SuitePeople Time Clock for Windows.

Track Added Time Fields in Workforce Management Mobile Apps

SuitePeople Workforce Management mobile apps version 2.4.10b590, available on iOS and Android

platforms, lets you configure added time fields so that you can track additional time segments in timebill records. When setting added time fields, you can select the fields that will be visible to employees when they punch in and set the order that they appear. Configuring added time fields can help employers with labor costing and customer billing. You can configure time fields for WFM mobile apps on the SuitePeople WFM SuiteApp and Web versions. To configure the fields, go to Workforce Management > Setup > NetSuite Integration > Settings > Time Fields. For more information, see the help topic Linking Workforce Management Fields with NetSuite.

Configure Short Breaks in Workforce Management Mobile Apps

SuitePeople Workforce Management mobile apps version 2.4.9b589, available on iOS and Android

platforms, includes short break prevention, which you can use to set the minimum allowed time for employee paid and unpaid breaks. When turned on, employees can only punch back in after the short break time has elapsed. This feature lets employers comply with regulations governing the length of short breaks. If not monitored, short breaks that do not meet the allowed minimum length can incur monetary penalties for employers. To configure short break settings, go to Workforce Management > Setup > Account Settings > Time & Attendance. For more information, see the help topic Short Break Prevention.

New SuiteAnswers Category in Payroll Links Portlet

With Payroll Dashboard SuiteApp version 2.01.0, the Payroll Links portlet now includes the SuiteAnswers category. You can access specific SuiteAnswers articles using the following links in this new category:

Monthly Compliance Updates – This link opens to a SuiteAnswers article that contains the latest tax and compliance updates for the current month
Contact U.S. Payroll Support – This link opens to a SuiteAnswers article that describes the steps on how to contact SuitePeople Payroll Support. For more information, see the help topic Payroll Dashboard Overview

Taxation SuiteApps

This release note was updated September 30, 2024. Following are the 2024.2 taxation enhancements to SuiteApps:

SuiteTax SuiteApps

Tax Authorities Provisioning Information

Legacy Tax SuiteApps

International Tax Reports Issue Fixes SuiteTax SuiteApps

Tax Authorities Provisioning Information

The SuiteTax Engine (STE) version 2.00.56 introduces Tax Authorities provisioning information. With this update, you will see the following enhancements:

All the tax codes automatically provisioned by STE will have information regarding the Imposing Tax Authority and the Reporting Tax Authority. This information will be visible in the Tax Authority section, in the corresponding fields.
You will be able to provide this information for your created tax codes. You will be able to fill this out in the Tax Authority section, in the corresponding fields. Legacy Tax SuiteApps International Tax Reports Issue Fixes windows:
- Online Filing page
- Tax Filing Setup window
- Formatting window
- EU Sales Filing Setup window
For Poland VAT report, you can now view adjustment journal entries when you drill down on box

Previously, box 46 retrieved adjustment details from box 42 which excludes adjustment journal entries.

The UK MTD System Notes pagination now shows the complete history of submission details.
The UK MTD Submit via CSV page now shows the correct submission dates. Previously, some dates resulted to incorrect data formatting after submitting the VAT100 Return report in CSV format.
The Portugal VAT report is now fixed to recognize comma (,) as a decimal separator when the selected number format on the VAT report is 1.000.000,00 or 1 000 000,00.
For Luxembourg VAT report, the OS-LU tax code is now included in the computation for the following boxes: Box Value 012 Box 454 + 455 + 456 472 Net amount of sales S-LU, R-LU, INT-LU, R3-LU, E-LU, O-LU, MT-LU, ES-LU, ER-LU, EINT-LU, ER3-LU, ESSS- LU, S-LU-16, INT-LU-13, R-LU-7, ES-LU-16, ER-LU-7, EINT-LU-13, ESSS-LU-16, OS-LU 022 Box 012 - 021 For more information, see the help topic What goes into each box - Luxembourg VAT report. Wholesale Distribution SuiteApps Following are the 2024.2 wholesale distribution enhancements to SuiteApps:

Updates on Volume Rebates

Previously, when you add rebate tiers in the agreement details, the system automatically assigns the tier with the lowest range as the fixed default tier. Transaction with items that qualify for volume rebates reference the tiers when applying the corresponding rebates. Now, you can select any of the available tier ranges as your default tier when you create or edit a rebate agreement detail that uses a linear rebate scheme. Under the Default column of the Rebate Tier section, select Yes next to the tier value that you want to set as a default tier. See the help topic Adding Agreement Details. You can also set default tiers when importing rebate tier data into NetSuite using CSV. On the CSV file, enter True under the Default column for your preferred default tier level. See the help topic Importing Rebate Tiers Using a CSV File.

Improved Recalculation Process for Volume Rebates When a rebate is applied is applied to an item, the recalculation process now updates the achieved rebate amount for an item based only on the rebate value of the associated rebate agreement. In succeeding transactions where a new tier is reached for the same item, the rebate tier value in the same agreement is applied. Previously, the system compared different agreements to find the best deal for the same items that reach limits in succeeding transactions.

Additionally, the recalculation process now considers updates on the rebate tier information which

can be applied to future transactions. Rebate tier information updates include changes in rebate tier range and rebate tier value. Note that transactions created prior to rebate tier changes and the new recalculation process still use their original rebate values. See the help topic Recalculation of Volume Rebates. For more information, see the help topic Rebates and Trade Promotions starting June 11, 2024.

SuiteBuilder Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated August 26, 2024. Customization

Changes to Access Type Settings for Custom Record Types

To provide more control over who can access your custom record entries, NetSuite has introduced a more precise setup for users with the required permissions. The No Permissions Required access type for custom record types has been renamed to No Permissions

Required for Internal Roles. You can assign this access type when you want to make custom record

instances available to internal roles without requiring permission. When you select this option, additional configuration options become available for you to use to set access for external and unauthenticated users. For more information, see the help topic Setting Permissions for a Custom Record Type.

SuiteCloud SDK Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteCloud Software Development Kit (SuiteCloud SDK) is a set of tools you can use to develop SuiteCloud

projects. These tools are the SuiteCloud IDE plug-ins and extensions, and the command-line interfaces. 2024.2 SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code Is Now

Available

SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code is now available for download. For more information, see the help topic Installing SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code. As of 2024.2, when you add an account using SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code, a new option for machine-to-machine authentication is available. This new option replaces the option to save a TBA token issued in NetSuite. For more information, see the help topic Adding an Account in SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code. 2024.2 SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js Is Now Available SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js is now available for download. For more information, see the help topic Installing SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js. TBA token issued in NetSuite is no longer supported.

The account:savetoken command is no longer supported. For more information, see the help topic SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js Reference. 2024.2 SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm Is Now

Available

SuiteCloud IDE plug-in for WebStorm is now available for download and fully compatible with WebStorm

2024.1.5. For more information, see the help topic Update SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm. As of 2024.2, when you add an account using SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm, a new option for machine-to-machine authentication is available. This new option replaces the option to save a TBA token issued in NetSuite. For more information, see the help topic Adding an Account in SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for WebStorm. 2024.2 SuiteCloud CLI for Java Is Now Available SuiteCloud CLI for Java is now available for download. For more information, see the help topic Installing SuiteCloud CLI for Java. supported. For more information, see the help topic SuiteCloud CLI for Java Commands.

Upgrade to OAuth 2.0 Authorization Protocol

The SuiteCloud SDK tools release includes the OAuth 2.0 authorization protocol. This new protocol impacts your credentials for these tools. When you upgrade the SuiteCloud SDK tools to the next version (24.2 for SuiteCloud IDE Plug-in for

WebStorm and SuiteCloud CLI for Java, and 2.0.X for SuiteCloud Extension for Visual Studio Code and

SuiteCloud CLI for Node.js), your current credentials file, along with your locally saved credentials for any

of the SuiteCloud SDK tools, will not be valid. Reauthenticate to use these tools again. For more information, see the help topic OAuth 2.0 Authentication for SuiteCloud SDK.

SuiteScript Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated September 16, 2024. Refer to the following sections for details on SuiteScript updates for NetSuite 2024.2:

Changes to External Suitelet URLs
New N/pgp Module
Changes to RESTlet script and New N/scriptTypes/restlet Module
Changes to the Hide in SuiteBundle Preference
Newly Supported Record Actions in 2024.2
Newly Supported Record Types in 2024.2
Removal of the Ext JS Library in 2025.1
2024.2 SuiteScript Records Browser

Changes to External Suitelet URLs

Suitelets that are available without login have updated External URLs as of May 9, 2024. The new URL

is displayed in the External URL field on the script deployment record and uses the &ns-at= parameter followed by a new value. To prevent broken links to Suitelets that are accessed with hard-coded URLs, you must update those links to the new format.

Give special consideration to the following:

All hard-coded URLs are impacted.
Cases where the URL is resolved automatically, using url.resolveScript(options) and similar methods, do not require any action.

Hard-coded URLs can be found in various places:

In scripts and HTML files in your account
Occasionally in other places like script parameters
In external systems that retrieve information or trigger actions
Links on your Web site
In rare cases, where a Suitelet is used as a public Web site, it might be referenced by search engines

Tips for locating and updating hard-coded URL that call external Suitelets:

The previous format that will now result in broken links uses the &h= parameter and a different value. For example, /app/site/hosting/scriptlet.nl?script=123&deploy=123&h=ABCDFEFGHIJKLMNOPRSTUV would now be updated to /app/site/hosting/scriptlet.nl?script=123&deploy=123&ns- at=KLMNOPRSTUVABCDFEFGHIJ.
New External URLs can be found on the Script Deployment record of Suitelets that have the Available Without Login preference enabled. Script Deployments are found in most accounts at Customization

Scripting > Script Deployments.

See Search for Scripts Containing Hard-coded URLs with &h Parameter, SuiteAnswers article 1016553, for a possible solution to find affected URLs in your account. As with all script samples, this solution is not guaranteed to work in your account due to varying features, permissions, and settings. Changes to url.resolveScript(options) and https.requestSuitelet(options) Starting July 30, 2024, returning external URLs with url.resolveScript(options) will only be allowed for authenticated sessions. Scripts using url.resolveScript(options) with the returnExternalUrl parameter set to true will no longer work in untrusted contexts. To avoid errors, you must review scripts that use the url.resolveScript(options) method with the returnExternalUrl parameter set to true and ensure that this setting is used only in a trusted context.

Effective June 13, 2024, https.requestSuitelet(options) will be supported for internal URLs

in trusted contexts. This will become the default behavior, without the need of setting the option.external parameter. On July 30, 2024, use of option.external=true will stop working, and https.requestSuitelet(options) will only work for internal Suitelets. This change also applies to the promise version: https.requestSuitelet.promise(options).

Untrusted contexts include:

A client script where all roles are selected in the Roles field on the Audience subtab of the script deployment, AND
The client script is running for users whose identity cannot be identified, such as customers and shoppers on Web sites.

Trusted contexts include:

External Suitelets accessed with the updated External URL from the script deployment record.
Suitelets called within an authenticated session, such as within NetSuite UI pages for logged in users. These Suitelets are internal and do not require the Available Without Login preference.
Client scripts called within an authenticated session, such as within NetSuite UI pages for logged in users.

Suitelets that are accessed through Web sites on the server side can remain external with the Available

Without Login preference enabled. You can access Suitelets using the new External URL format on the script deployment record. For more information, see the following topics:

Setting Available Without Login
https.requestSuitelet(options)
https.requestSuitelet.promise(options)
url.resolveScript(options)

New N/pgp Module

A new N/pgp module is now available. The N/pgp module loads generated PGP keys from a secret to securely send messages to one or multiple recipients. To send an encrypted message, you must first create the contents of the message with the pgp.createMessageData(options) method. Next, use the MessageData.encrypt(options) method to securely encrypt and optionally sign the message contents. Message recipients can optionally enable configuration preferences to customize how messages are decrypted. You can also use this module to create certificate.Signer objects to sign plain strings. For more information, see the help topic N/pgp Module. Changes to RESTlet script and New N/scriptTypes/restlet

Module

Currently, any RESTlet script that returns HTML content is determined by the Content-Type header in the

HTTP request. If the Content-Type header of the HTTP request has a value, the value gets passed to the

HTTP response. If there is no Content-Type header defined in the HTTP request, the default value of the HTTP response Content-Type header is HTML (or text/html). As of September 30, 2024, any RESTlet script that does not have a defined HTTP request Content-

Type header will have a default HTTP response Content-Type header of plain text (or text/plain). If you

require any RESTlet scripts to have a return value in HTML format, you must update these scripts. Use the restlet.createResponse(options) method of the new N/scriptTypes/restlet module to set the RESTlet's HTTP response Content-Type header to text/html explicitly. The restlet.createResponse(options) method lets you specify the Content-Type header for your Restlet response to ensure that it is in the format that you intend it to be. You can use this method in the return statement of your RESTlet script’s entry point functions. For more information, see the help topic N/ scriptTypes/restlet Module.

Changes to the Hide in SuiteBundle Preference

Some SuiteApps and SuiteBundles may include scripts or files that were marked as Hide in SuiteBundle

but must be accessed in the browser, such as client scripts or library files and assets needed on the client side. Enablement of the Hide in SuiteBundle preference for this type of file is not a valid configuration. In preparation for this change, accounts with such SuiteApps and bundles installed have been updated to clear the Hide in SuiteBundle preference for scripts and files that have been run on the client side. As of NetSuite 2024.2, any scripts that have the Hide in SuiteBundle preference enabled will fail to run if accessed on the client side.

Newly Supported Record Actions in 2024.2

The following table lists the newly supported record actions for SuiteScript in 2024.2.

Record Type Action Description

Inventory Count approve Changes the status of completed counts to Approved

Inventory Count reject Reassigns the Open status to completed counts

Inventory Count startcount Changes the status of Open inventory counts to Started

Inventory Count completecount Changes the status of counts from Started to Completed/ Pending approval Completely Billed markprojectascompletelybilled Billed completely

Newly Supported Record Types in 2024.2

The following table lists the newly supported records in SuiteScript for 2024.2.

Record Type Notes

As Charged Project Revenue This record is available when the Projects Management, Charge-Based Billing and Rule Advanced Revenue Management features are enabled. Currency Rate When the Multiple Currencies feature is enabled, this record is partially scriptable. It can be created, read, copied, and searched. When the Multiple Currencies feature is not enabled, this record is not scriptable. Resource Group The resource group record is scriptable in server and client SuiteScript.

Removal of the Ext JS Library in 2025.1

NetSuite has started the process to remove the unsupported Ext JS library. If your customizations rely on

this library's API, despite its lack of support, you should prepare for this removal as soon as possible. To help you identify usages of the library in your account, a banner message will be displayed on pages that load a script using the unsupported Ext JS library. This banner display will be available in accounts running NetSuite 2024.2. The Ext JS library will be removed in NetSuite 2025.1. The removal of the Ext JS library may break external references to it. If you want to continue using the Ext JS library, you must replace it with your own external instance of the library. Otherwise, you need to adjust your code to work without the use of the Ext JS library. 2024.2 SuiteScript Records Browser The 2024.2 SuiteScript Records Browser is not yet available.

SuiteTalk Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

Fully Supported Record Types for REST Web Services in 2024.2 In 2024.2, currency rate is added to REST web services as a fully supported records. For information about this record, see the help topic Currency Rate. For a list of every supported record, see the help topic REST Web Services Supported Records. You can also see the list of supported records in the REST API browser. For more information about working with the browser, see the help topic The REST API Browser. SOAP Web Services Version 2024.2 SOAP web services version 2024.2 is not yet available. When SOAP web services version 2024.2 becomes available, version 2017.2 will be retired. For information about the supported generally available versions, see the help topic Support for Existing WSDL Versions.

Araxis Merge Diff File for the 2024.2 Endpoint

The Araxis Merge diff file highlights the schema changes between the 2024.1 and 2024.2 endpoints.

About the Araxis Merge Diff File
Using the Araxis Merge Diff File

About the Araxis Merge Diff File

NetSuite publishes an Araxis Merge diff file for every new endpoint. Depending on the scope of the release, changes described in the Araxis Merge diff file may include:

New record types
Elements (fields) that have been added, removed, or changed
New sublists (lists)
New joins
New search filters and search return columns
New platform operations Using the Araxis Merge Diff File Important: The screenshots in this section are for illustrative purposes only. They do not reflect changes related to any specific endpoint. The Araxis Merge diff file is generated using Araxis Merge. When you click the Araxis Merge diff file link (when it is available), a page appears that offers an overview of all schema changes. The following screenshot shows how this summary page looks. In this example, the highlighted rows indicate that an XSD has been modified. The integers at the center indicate the number of changed lines in the file. To see the exact differences, click the report link in the column on the right or click the name of the file in either column. When you click any of these links, the Araxis Merge diff file shows a page with two columns. The previous version of the file is displayed on the left and the new version is displayed on the right. Changed elements are highlighted. For example, the following screenshot shows an excerpt from the report on platform.commonTypes.xsd. Notice the addition of two values to the PermissionCode enumeration: _accessPaymentAuditLog and _advancedPDFHTMLTemplates. The Araxis Merge diff file also shows changes to data types. The following screenshot is a snapshot of transactions.sales.xsd. Notice that the chargeType element changed from an enumeration to a RecordRef. 2024.2 SOAP Schema Browser The 2024.2 SOAP Schema Browser is not yet available.

Taxation Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

SuiteTax

Tax Liability Payment Transaction in SuiteTax
Tax Authorities Provisioning Information
Brazil Reports Enhancements
Spain Localization Enhancements

Legacy Tax

International Tax Reports Issue Fixes
ANZ Localization Enhancements
Portugal Localization Enhancements

Tax Liability Payment Transaction in SuiteTax

Starting from 2024.2, you can record payments of tax liabilities to tax authorities using a new tax liability payment transaction type. This was not possible in SuiteTax before the Tax Liability Payment Transaction feature. To use this feature, you need to have an accountant role or a role with the Tax Liability Payment permission. With the introduction of the Tax Liability Payment Transaction feature, you can now do the following when creating a tax payment transaction:

Enter tax liability payments details
Adjust the tax payable account prior to recording a tax payment
Process payments to tax authorities only if there is a tax amount due to the tax authorities. You can create tax payment transactions to settle U.S. Sales tax, VAT, and GST. You can also void and delete tax payment transactions. To create a tax liability payment transaction, go to Transactions > Bank > Create Tax Liability Payment.

UI Updates in NetSuite 2024.2

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 GMT

This release note was updated September 16, 2024.

NetSuite Guided Learning

The NetSuite Guided Learning tool is now available in all production accounts. The feature provides you with contextual step-by-step instructions to help you complete various tasks within NetSuite. It includes more than 350 guides in 24 languages. For more information, see the help topic NetSuite Guided Learning.

New Redwood Experience Theme

You can now use the new Redwood Experience theme, which gives NetSuite a different look and feel. The Redwood Experience theme offers new colors, icons, and fonts for the page header, forms and lists, and dashboards. By default, the Redwood Experience theme is enabled only for the Login page. To enable the Redwood Experience throughout your instance of NetSuite, go to Home > Set Preferences. On the Appearance tab in the Redwood Experience area, click Enable.

Enhancements to Text Enhance

Undo, and Redo actions are available. For more information about using this capability, see the help topic Text Enhance. Note: Text Enhance is:

Enabled by default, but can be disabled by users with an Administrator role.
Available for accounts located in the United States and Canada.
Available for users whose language preference is set to English (U.S.) or English (CA) and for assisting with English language content only.
Available to any user with access to a page where Text Enhance is available (no additional permissions are required).
On first use, Text Enhance displays a confirmation message to inform you that you are using an artificial intelligence (AI) feature. The message is as follows: "Text Enhance is an AI feature that generates content for your use. Your data may be processed globally according to the Oracle Services

Privacy Policy." Click the link if you want to view the policy, which opens in a new web browser tab or

window. Click OK to close the message. After you close the message, the system continues the Text Enhance action that you selected.

Collapsible Sections

The following enhancements will help you to see more content on any page:

The page header, including the page name and links, now collapses when scrolling.
You can now collapse or expand all field groups by clicking their names.